GRAMMAR
THE
or
LANGUAGE
ITALIAN
BY
FERDINAND
GICILONI
FLORENCE
PUBLISHIO
BY
RIC0B9I
1838
AN"
C'
'.
^"J"
ixii^
""
'^f /?
"
'
t^i/.
7/a.^k^
2.tr
A^AOiiAd/',
..*...,
\
r AWTBD
IT
riuz
XJB
MomnuL
avd
Ci
"
"
Signer
provetta^
Si
Non
stati
questi
la
del
di
pub
pie-
di
tali
lei
di
a
le lin-
grazie
nuove
di
nella
ma
una
elevaV
ei rawisa
lei
di
coraggio
sua
obbligazione
giudizio
in
comparire
origi-
alia
contribui
a
pubblico,
cost
tribute
offrirle un
^
V
di
di
opportunith
ai di
ammirazione
rispetto al
lo
spinta
precetti
ne
ingegno
quale gli porge
sua
ottiene
Non
il di
dh
ficare la
sieno
amnzamenti.
ardito
gli
che
Vhanno
qualunque,
Siccome
farlo
quale
labbra.
sue
tezza
cose
s'inse-
nellapiu armoniosa/ra
grammatica
il
chi
a
Vautore
che
medesimi
viventij
dalle
il
presentarsi
Ella
cui
libro
questo
lusingarsi
osa
tant'altezza
ora
in
in
giudicarne.
namente
gue
unafavella
che
e
deggiono
gna,
ne
di
elementi
Gli
e
a,
lei talentij
lei carattere,
di
lei
testi-
bonth:
e
le
la
sua
quali
rendono
UnUliss.
Servo
F.
divotissimo,
CICILONI.
IPlEBViifil
of
Italy has giren
in this eoontrf
No
of
the
in
spurious
itself in
of
name
is maniflBSt
Veneroni
its Toluminousness
been
and
compilation
heterogeneous, confused,
hardly
irhidi
Italian in
of
bBB
made
pubiisbed for
of Jonnier;
deamess,
of
at the
and
a
void,
paralleled;still that compilation,
abandon
many
all
tiie
labours
study
this
to encumber
the
the
concise
which
and
to the
and
of
path
perfonned
correct
is, the
purpose
however
by
are
rules,
end, without
a
are
as
of the woAs
aPractical
too
lose half theipr
value
exemplifications;
annexed
egregious
the obstruction.
remove
of tiie most
One
still
repeatedly reprobated:
despair,continues
literature, after
others to
hi
to be
that
by
being
hare
is indeed
decided
any
defects, Miuch
so
ratum.
deside-
yet a^ieared suiBciently sali-
reputation, as
spiteof
its ele-
to teach
adcaowledged
an
established
have
pie-emioeBce
in use,
left
has
one
siSactoryto
UBder
improved work
an
9
language
Italian grammars
to several
birth
still been
has
meat$
modern
of the
the cnliiTation
Although
these,
often
by
instead
Rules"
wanting
of
placed together in
refierence.
ce
absen-
the
a
being
mass,
G
PREFACE.
A
recent
more
much
also possesses
for
useful; and,
what
the
in
publicationsof
Other
and
merits
of
Galignani,
lies under
objection
superfluousalong with
for
is worse,
dialect
Florentine
the
merit, but
collected
having
the Grammar
one,
the
teachingfrequently
place
of the
the kind
have
Italian language.
their respective
imperfections,which
it is not
cumbent
in-
to discuss.
pretensionsof
The
in small
useful
compass,
towards
the present are,
of what
more
knowledge
a
with
greater perspicuity and
been
done
of
Italy,will
complete
and
comprise,
is essential
Italian, exposed
precision,than
Soave's, the standard
be found
in several
it
"
of pointsof difference
specification
might
extensive
and
feature
be
said, that in this grammar
systematicview
of the
of every
in which
language,
and
is taken
of
a
a
consists
and
that the
a
fuller
much
in which
nent
promi-
numerous
and
explicationof
of the
the
sired,
de-
more
language, Augmentatives
Diminutives; that it contains
Pronouns,
mars
gram-
exact.
"
any
has
respectsless
"
Were
and
former.
in any
Corticelli's and
Even
of
to
difficulty
Italian
is
dundant;
re-
IrregularYerbfi
PBKFACE^
more
are
dMindlj
armiged
wdl
redaoed
refereneey
as
as
dassificatioo.
dkHU
It
of Italian
CDitaHiDg
w"Nrd8
England,
Italy,has
of
those
its
a
copioi"
to a
more
at
to
their
be
compenthat the
loo
termination,
cessary
has
the grammars
pnblished
confonndmg
intricacyin
regulationsbetter
zed
methodi-
for many
who
however
been
may
use
this
be
work;
led to introduce
nnne^
the
with
yersant
with
a
Some
in what
few
the
con-
to the Italian
the
are
delled
mo-
language,
English
on
regards the yerb.
finities
things haying various grammatical af-
be familiar
different
to the student
peculiar articulation
of
syllables
obserred,
difference from
presented under
are
they may
is to be
particularyiew
requires some
this head
ying
ha-
them.
it
definitions,
These
thor
au-
them, partly
conformity with general usage, partlyfrom
experienced their utilityfor pupils less
As
a
deariy derelc^ied,
definitions will doubtless
Grammatical
which
of
tables
detailed in
and
in
with
and
in
be noticed
might
practice highly necessary
in
but treated
summarQy
in
7
of
m
the
aspects that
each.
letters and
language is acquired with ease by oral
but yrith great dilBculty,
instruction,
and never
a
8
PRtfFACS.
perfectly, by
Italian.
and
than
since,
ef the
most
is
besided
oidy
as
to
the
is induced
under
the
whose
examination
sanction
it
in
in
En*
masters
are
it may
words
ted
omit-
be
combining
combinations
of
of
the
sounds
prefix
these
in
himself
author
observations
jvdge,
competent
most
a
work
tfie
and
undergone,
whose
they decl"e.
much
or
treatise.
(the
press
it has
Italian
component
supervising
to
accompaniment
on
that
in
engaged
being abroad)
an
year:
snperffluoiis.
syllables and
through
(pinion of
a
in
fiicitUale.
person
its progress
iannmerable
difficult
in
precepts
ndeS'oanoeming
and
it better
teach
Italians
bat
far
attempied
namerons
inadequate
of
peculiar
The
As
the
pertons
collection
giyen
will
of silent
volume
enunoiatkMi,
tiot
A
a
E^lish
glandy
is here
none
speaking; preceptor
A
hcMir
an
iwiUcni,
to
Prosody,
obscurity
metrical
part
it, a
of
a
and
subject hitherto
The
mistake.
pronunciation
prosody,
is in
treatise
wifl
be
of
paration
prevolved
in-
centuation,
ac-
words
a
,
induded
in
ABBREVIATIOff
AU
Aee"
"
,
IN
WQBK
THIS
Ahiilwe
Mas,
Mafcoline
Accosatsire
No
Nnmber
Adjeetiire
N
"
.
,
USED
AS}
Nominative
,
Adw,
Adverb
P.
Penon
Comimettve
Pert
Penonal
Dmtiwe
Plo
Plural
Ex
Esample
Pret
Present
Fca
Feaioine
Pron
Pronoan
IiM
Indicative
InC,
Iflfioitive
"
.
"
,
"
Gmij.
D.
dat.
or
.
.
Siog.
'
indieatef
tbet
Snb|aiictite
IN
THE
EXERCISES
llie
word
is
USED
MABXS
Singnlar
....
Sn)^
alike
Ilalian
id
aod
EogMi.
tndiettes
=
is
( ) Eojlish
bjr those
The
how
placed
th"
between
in
words
Bumher
thej
are
the
to
4
WAS
diffisrent
transposed
,
1
parentheses
over
be
to
are
two
wider
word
which
it is
placed
are
be
to
translated
under.
placed
words
Englisli
Italian.
vords
numbers
When
fsme
in
expressed
not
the
that
be
in
phrase
same
expressed
in
words
English
Italian.
marked
are
by
ooe
word
4
very
much
afraid
show
j temeva
moUo,
with
:
as,
the
OP
THE
LANGUAGE
ITALIAN
I#
LESSON
ITALIAN
A
ALPHABET
PRONUNCIATION,
AND
Ba
be
bi
bo
"
9
bu.
9
,
ci|
B
Ca^
ce,
G
Da^
de, diy dOj du.
D
Fa,fe,fi,
E
Gra,ge,gi,go,gu.
F
Ja, je, ji,jo,ju.
G
La^
H
Ma
cu.
co,
fo,fu.
le^ li; I09 lu.
mi
me
y
mo
9
I
Na;
ne,
ni^
nOy
J
Pa;
"pCf
pi;
po;
L
Qua
;
M
Ra;
N
Sa
;
que
si
se
0
Ta,te;tl;to,
P
Va,
Q
Za;
R
Giia
26;
;
Zi,
gne
;
;
ru.
8U.
TO;
TU.
ZO;
gni
zu.
,
S
Sea; 8che; schi;
T
Scia;
see;
quo.
;
tu.
Vi;
TC;
pu.
rO;
80
;
"
mu.
nu"
qui
,
ri;
re;
f
;
gno
sco;
,
gnu.
sou.
6ci; 8cio; sciu.
PRONUNCIATION.
1 2
with
pronounced
Gli is
U
in
liquidsound,
a
and
neglzgere,
V
except
Z
rivatives,- in Angli
glicanoy Gliceraj
a
de-
its
An^
Angliy
^
and
other
few
a
words.
hene
Bastone
Camera,
gnoy
hirra
,
hue.
bocca
,
y
,
cheto, chiedere,
cena,
cibo, compa-
curare.
debito
Dare
,
,
Fame
9
9
duro.
dono
y
y
ferire, fine, fosso,
Gastigo,
gondola
digniti
fuso.
gherminella, giro, ghiro,
genera,
gusto*
Jattanza, jeri,jonico,jugero.
Madre,
meridionale,
misto
Naye, Nestore, nibbio,
LaTare"
Padre,
nome"
muro.
nume.
lena, lino, logorare, luglio.
piselli,ponte,
pera,
Quadro,
puro.
querela, quindici,quotidiano.
Rabbia
,
Santo,
morigerato,
,
rodere
riso
remo
,
senno,
rustico.
,
,
simulare,
seno,
sono,
sonno,
suddito:
Tarlo, tenere,
Vanagloria
,
yena
timone,
togliere,tuffare.
yirt"
,
yolont4
,
yulcano.
,
Zattera, zelo, zingaro, zolfo, zucchero.
Gladiatore, gleba, gliele,figlio,globo, glutinoso,
gnafife,
figlia,
guadagnare,
compagna,
cam-
giugnere, ignudo, ignorante, negligente,
negletto,negligere,negligenza, Angli.
pagna,
Sciame, scimunito,
scena,
sciorinare, sciuga-
i3
paOKUMCiATioir.
jo,
to
scheitio^scliinarey
scarare;
scoxjEonare;
scusare*
citt4 di Sorrento
Nella
U di undid
Tasso
quato
quecento
U
trasferito
esso
ed
famiglia
sua
marxo
del
miUe
yiyere
per
,
qualitidi primo segretarioera
fin
dalFanno
madre
di
mille
da
concessione
Sansererino, Principe di Salerno
in
ayyolto, quasi per
nel secolo decimo
PARTS
Parts
in Italian
,
stantiye,
in
Napoli
Tasso
tro-
della
corso
as
or
Noun.
Adyerb.
Conjunction.9.
2.
The
7.
The
sta-
in
e
fis-
dimora*
sua
SPEECH.
distributed
,
yiz.
The
Pronoun.
The
sua
II*
OF
Speech are
in English
tra-
dalla fortuna.
quarto la
of
Adjectiye. 4.
6. The
La
a
hESSOBf
The
il
tutto
cui
chiamato,
procacciarsiun decente
fuori di Bergamo
la noUle,
oye
,
tempi potente assai, famigliade'Tassi
sata ayeya
ad
che
de'Bossi, noUle
Porsia
fu
casi, nei quail Bernardo
yita, il costrinsero
alcuni
steftOy
Ferrante
Btato
,
UUmento
cin*
di
Berrixj
a
famiglia originariadi Pistoja che
piantata fa grandemente fayorita
yossi
Tor*
cinqnecento trent'uno*
Torquato
Gli ayyersi
si
a
studji dopo
a'suoi
liberal
fu latta
ne
luce
di
,
alia
alia
nardo
quattro. 11 padre di lui, Ber-
quaranta
erasi
renne
:
"
"
i
into
The
.
Article.
5.
The
3.
nine
SubThe
Verb.
Preposition* 8. The
Interjection.
1
4
SUBSTANTIVES.
small
yery
are
con-
are
is the
KODN,
or
of
name
thing.
any
Suhstantiyes
and
into
The
names.
common
and
sorts;
tWo
former
such
places :
per
prothe
are
Gugliel^
as
ter
latThe
InghUterra^ England.
of kinds
or
species of things
names
,
William;
J
are
the
animal;
animaley
as,
diyided
are
of persons
names
mo
parts, which
Italian.
SUBSTANTIVE,
A
termination,
English language ,
in the
in the
siderahle
of
in tlie sereral
otlier variations
and
changes
tlie inflexions, or
But
uomOy
:
man.
GENDERS.
Every
All
of
names
Men,
ing their dignitiesor
Andrea
y
peratore
2.
or
All
;
poet
professionsapplied
EratOy
regina
,
3. With
which
masculine
a
or
queen
and
; cameriera
to
they terminate
genders.
other
line
mascu-
be
may
:
im-
Thomas;
of
nouns
them
,
of that
regard
of the
are
poet.
,
the
express^
nouns
termination
a
to
whatever
muse
as
TommasOy
of Women,
names
gender,
as
their
Andrew;
emperor
,
Well
as
callings,
gender, whatever
as,
the
gender.
feminine
1.
in Italiajn is of
noun
are
of
final vowel
name;
dignities
the
nine
femibe
may
:
m^r^re, mother;
servant-maid.
,
nouns,
commonly
the
vowel
determines
in
their
l5
SUMTAVTITKfl.
Moans
as
9
ending
tavola^
Greek:
table*
a
of the
are
Except
gender
feminine
derived
some
from
:
the
as;
Some
fev
their
Tary
in
nouns
their
rary
meanings
IFrammay
\
as
they
:
^ Drama
_
genders
is masculine.
^
r%
'
i..
"
LDram''Wetgnef
is
'
p
"
feminine.
is masculine.
f Theme
,
'
is feminine.
iFeary
is masculine.
f To-morrow
f
_^.
'
y^Breai of day
of a wound,
f Cuticle
.
Margine,
is feminine.
^
X^^i^j^^
^^
margin,
\s "eniinine"
is masculine.
is masculine.
rj/iFtA:ee;;er,
^
^
'
t
Army
,
is feminine.
l6
SOBOTANTITBd.
Tlie
general rules
in
liable to the
are
e
Nouns
4.
costume
in
Jame
5.
me
gender of
ing
end-
nonnt
exceptions.
most
generallymasculine;
are
as
,
custom.
y
But
for the
,
Nouns
h\xu"eT ; speme
in
re
hope^
,
feminine.
are
generally masculine:
are
as,
dotore^ pain.
The
following
being
polvercy dust;
6.
ending
in
nte
for
are
the
carcercy
most
part
mind;
current;
correntey
sor--
people, (feminine) :yro"/tf,
;ybn^c, fountain, (of both genders.)
source;
forehead
gentey
Fine, end; tras^ey beam,
mi
ashes;
derbolt;
thun-
mountain.
montCy
Except mentCy
gente,
rule,
tower.
^
cenercy
genders.
as,
this
m;fol"orey
of both
Nouns
masculine:
re
aere^
leprey hare;
are
tor
ax;
scure,
arborcy tree;
prison ,
from
.'/eWre, fever; coltrey coverlet;
feminine
But
deviate
nouns
lie, thousand,
in the
7. Nouns
in /
;
as,
:
Genesi
^
minine
singular,fe-
are
for the
most
part
minine:
fe-
toast
(in
metropoliy metropolis.
drinking'; Tamigiy
in i
genders:
plural*
Except barbagianni
compounds
of both
in the
is masculine
ending
as,
are
y
owl; brindisiy
Thames;
eclissi
,
eclipse;
d\y day, and
and
numerals
dieciy ten; quindiciy fifteen.
Genesis;
is of both
genders.
its
ding
en-
n
furtlier
distinguished
by Laving ivr"^
ject,
obthe Singular,which
Numbers,
implies one
and the Plural
which
impliestwo or more
,
objects.
Italian Nouns
have their plural formed
ently
differfrom their singular with few exceptions.
Nouns
are
,
SCBSTARTIVES.
Noans
1 1*
haTing
in the
change
not
ifiaestd
J
accented^
last vowel
their
plural: as
king;
re^
under
comes
which
do
lable
monosylall Italian
rule,
this
1)
kings;
re,
or
majesties. Eyery
inajestjy
noun
words
1
monosyllables being accented
are
pronunciation.
in
Nouns
13.
their
of the
termination
plural:
maestro
as,
Feminine
i3"
letter
into
climes;
i4"
Nouns
in
feminine
or
,
and
ca
require
in the
final yowel, for the
the
harsh
sound
be
of the
lost
by
and
c
the
g
masculine
h
an
before^
the;
preserving
which
would
wise
other-
,
change
of
monarchic
monarch;
monarcUj
of
houses.
case,
plural
sake
this
change
in a,
whether
ga,
masters;
dog, cani, dogs.
cane,
house;
casaj
X\\ii
for
i
an
maestri,
ending
as,
whatever
singular,change
into
master;
nouns
e.*
an
number
^
clima,c\ime;climi,
gender,
j be in the
ma
of this
last yowel
the
masculine
the
Ex.
vowel.
monarchs;
lega,
league; legke, leagues.
ending in
Nouns
without
into
an
any
e;
as,
cia
accent
and
gia pronounced short,
the
upon
minacciaj
/, change
threat; minacce,
spiaggia, shore; spiagge, shores;
of these
terminations
the
in which
the
but
la
ats;
threnouns
i is accented
,
or
as,
sensiblypronounced,
provincial province
magia, incantation;
follow
;
the
general
ruk:
/7row//ic/e proTinces;
magle,
,
incantations.
SUBSTANTIVES.
20
i5. Mouns
the
in
plural:
e
ending
numher
in
that
pretty
priest; pretty priests;
as,
mother;
madrcj
change
into
ntadriy mothers.
which
le,
rowel
have
Except
variation
no
those
either
in
specie, species; requie rest ;
JLcie,surface; harharie^ CTxielty
; progenie
as,
:
in
t
an
super^
,
geny;
pro-
j
serie, series; ejffigie,
efiigy.
But
moglie
and
wife;
,
Millcj thousand,
1
for the
Nouns
17.
in
into
vowel
that
Except
variation
no
which
its
in
smoke;
call
,
as,
the
have
makes
plural of
ajo have
in oi:
on
the
the
Nouns
in
I,) make
contraction
to
tion
abbreviathe
word
caligine)
["rom testudi-
plural uomini
their
,
men.
and
plural in aiy
diSyportinajOj porter; porti-
naiy porters, strettojOy press;
19.
,
hands.
plural.
its
,
in
by
caligOy (from
as,
plural:
maniy
terminated
,
man
in the
hand;
mano,
testudini
Those
also
plural by changing
giniy plur.; testudo
;
mille
hypotheses.
their
thus
in oyo,
those
.*
originalform:
Uomo
18.
1
always
) tortoise
ne
form
o
nouns
,
but
plural.
ipotesiyhypothesis and
as,
in the
make
ox,
mila;
makes
in / have
6. Nouns
an
buoi,
plural mogli,
is used
bue^
strettoiypresses.
short, (that is,
their
plural in
in/ is, however
tempioy temple, tempj)
or
ii
,
accented
not
orj
more
at
option,
used
:
tempiiy temples.
as,
ai
SUBSTANTIVES.
in io
TluMe
30*
their
centedy) h"ye
morioj
but
in poetry
Nouns
ai.
the
which
makes
9
in cio,
plural in
Gods^
in
prose;
used.
chio^ ^ioy glio, short, make
ciliegioy cherry-tree; ciliegi,
cherry-trees; occhioy
"on
mor-
chi, gi, gli; as, cacioy cheese;
cif
cheeses;
caciy
ac*
Except
murmurs.
Dei^
is also
Dii^
i is
in ii: as^
plural always
9
the
in which
mormorii^
mtirmur,
God
DiOy
long y (or
eye;
occhiy
figlio^
eyes;
ifigliysons.
Nouns
11.
their
in
plural
in
and
co
gOy of two
make
syllables,
chiy ghii ksyluogo, place; luoghif
places ;^co, ^g;Jichi,figs.
"xcept|/7orco,pig;GrecOy Greek;
Those
take
in
no
co
and
h in the
gOy of
The
Aatico,
aprico,
briaco^
"bbrtaea,
beccairco,
carico
,
cadnco,
,
catalogo-.
h in the
two
lables,
syl-
plural: as, amicOy friend;
following) howerer,
the
than
more
atniciy friends; teologOySLdiyine
caattgo
make
Greet.
porciy
23.
which
formation
are
;
^eo/o^/,divines.
exceptions,
of their
mitting
ad-
plural.
expedient,
sacrilegioui,
wild.
unloading,
trajfic.
^4* Nouns
terminating
united,
consonant
and
ghi:
as
Some
then
in
nouns
change
a
o
alter
ghi^
their
form
in the
feminine
ther
ano-
plural
in
inns.
plural in
a^ and
in the
masculine
plural: example
hundred;
centiaaja,
hundreds.
thousand;
migliaja,
thousands-
miglia,
miles,
migliajo"
a
migllo,
mile
;
for
moggie,
a
"taio,
bushel;
"("]"#
bushels,
pair;
V^\^"
pair,
egg;
nova,
eggs.
pa
jo,
uovo
"
26.
the
measure
Other
nouns
are
are
used
In
than
"
braccio,
in
masculine
ring,
arm,
two
terminations
in i and
latter
in
a
:
in
feminine; but
the
feminine
in
the for*
termination, and
one
"
,
following list,the
less used
in the
A cello
the
have
it both
preferably
those
denote
o
masculine, the
in another.
Uy
in
plural"forming
mer
moggia
corn;
chi
hifolchi^ploughmen;
;
gender, being
their
singular^ and
CentiDajo,
their
hifolco^ploughman
,
go, with
and
co
make
albergOy inn;
25.
in
asterisk
some
some
will
plural
in i.
anelli
and
anella.
bracci,
braccia.
bndelio"
bowel,
badelli,
budella.
calcagao,
heel,
calcagni^
calcagna.
in
a3
SUBSTANTIVES.
EXERCISE
FOR
TBB
PITPIL
TO
falsehood,
FMtk,
WftlTB
DOWV
tBI
TLVUlU
pecdiiai
bee.
duke.
prato.
meadow,
fligoore
gentleman,
cielo
heaven,
gregge,
ftoek.
pianeta"
dace
,
,
,
planet.
24
follow
SUBSTANTIVES.
t;he rules
00
the
nouns.
^6
ARTICLE.
grammarians
Italian
judges
who
in the
z^i^ro
il
the
the
and
rule
the
with
riy
of such
Gods
the
and
g/i,
use
ii
zero;
versal
uninot
",
nouns,
gU ziiy gli zaffi--
article
plural gli instead
the Gods;
used
hefore
gender beginning
elision of the
handle;
the
eye;
is used
with
la
Zo
2.
oy
of
nouiis
vowel
a
the
imperoy
masculine
the
suffers
hut
then
the
love; Velsa,
,
/' amore,
as,
any
the
ni,the
a
or
empire;
occhioy the
V
noun
feminine
vowel
:
"s, la
beginning
marinay
Stella, the star; la industriay
in both
is contracted
/'
as,
hefore
consonant
any
navy;
La
I*
with
of the Gods.
degli Dei,
uditOy the hearing.
V
Za
the
takes
gli Deiy
is also
Lo
other
numbers
vowel
singular; as,
the
elision takes
/' uomOy
the
man;
the
before
the
dustry.
in-
an
idols. Before
idol; gV idoliy the
idoloy the
place only
gli uomi^
men.
is contracted
as', V arnica
V
the
zeroy
,
of ii as,
in
zio, the uncle;
is, however,
practice to
plural
,
I.*
il
of
nouns
etc.
Dei
an
il
It
sugar.
,
'ii hefore
singular: as,
classic
modern
good
some
using
sapphire ;
,
Aero
2 i/cc
in
concur
of
example
of
opinion
,
kind,
that
the
and
writers,
(i),the
(I) Bttommattei
the
y
;
"
in the
singular
friend; and
CorticeUi
j
"
*
Soave.
before
before
an
a:
ati
in
the
e
1*7
ARTICLE.
plural J
I'-epoehe
89,
it is better
la
ie
epocuj
contrary
for;
although examples
it in the
with;
con,
followed
when
upon,
joined to
as
,
,
the
to
a
the
by
noao
that ukes
slug,
artiele,are
e
that
Ukes
Before
nooik
the
takes la
plur,
ting,
GoUo
C
co' "
a
that
flouD
arficte lo.
plur,
Bj col^coi or
Before
ibe
article U.
the if espreMed
in; per,
m,
following way*
Belbre
With
stances
in-
found.
prepositions
suj
other
in
epochs:
\\ie
give this article entire
to
amiche^
are
The
3.
y
plur.
ting.
colia
COgU
or
coUe
or
lo con
(cott
gli
la
con
le
COD
,
In
if
the
etprefsed1^7neLnei
J^or the
if esprcffcd
by
On
if
the
or
pel^
peior
eipreffedBy ful,f oi or
negii nella,iielle
pe' perlo per glipef la per fe
fa' |f olio fu gli | f alia f uile
no'
nello
Examples
'With
the
book, eol libro;
the bell
with
In the
the
the hell
,
On
nel
the
libro $ in the Boife" nello
Bulla
strepito; in the
f'tfr lo
streptlo; for
,
sul
lihrog'on
the rock
sullo
,
tcoglio;
the
on
eampana,
elisions
same
uomOy
It is proper
writers
strepito;
la eampana.
per
Collo, collay collcj nello
neir
lo
eampana.
book, pel lihro; for the noife^
,
the
noife, eon
eampana,
the book
bell
eolla
book,
bell,nella
for
"
with
use
as
the
f
etc.
are
articles
when
that
the
liable
alone
:
to
Ex.
sull'uomo.
to
remark
most
exact
,
the first only of these
formations
of
28
ARTICLE.
the
con
article
with
lo,
lay
con
also words
are
in
con,
cogli heing
signification
,
of other
cogliercyand colloycoUa,
inflexion of the verb
an
prefer
rest, which
le, to the
gli,con
con
and
word,
oue
collcy being substantives^
4* Diy
the
ay
J
of
nature
of
da
with
indefinite
an
article
manner
a
English particlesofy to
Londra
\
Of Looaon.
A
the
but
Loodoa.
To
begiuning with
noons
"
of
Londra
t
aod
,
da
: as
Londra
From
/
London.
,
6. The
Definite Article
to
dual
ecco
have
dined
zato
con
6" Names
drea,
general
here
V
with
uomo
you,
and
men
che
drew.
An-
ployed
em-
indivi^
an
to
one
cation,
signifior
more
mortal, gli uomini
are
is the
being
of their
limited
An-
to
from
of
ves
substanti-
common
full extent
when
also
mortali,
,
An
before
in the
specificobjects:as,
nished
da
,
taken
and
sono
Andrea,
,
teration
al-
Andrea,
ad
in Italian
a
is used
meaning
when
both
conyey
"r
,
Andrew;
drew;
ad;
without
remains
a
""""?
become*
a
,
Da
that
partly in
*
'f'^l
""t"^^
'.
,
in
corresponding with
from.
y
Before
Di
partly
nouns,
,
prepositions,in
the
used
are
whom
man
puniste
gli uomini
;
che
you
the
men
pu^*
that
hannopran*
s^oi.
of cottntries
kingdoms, provinces,etc.
of great extent,
are
empires,
generally used
with
ARTICLE.
the
article; aSf Russia
definite
Russia
la
9asto
un
e
precise rule
No
regard
is
tliis head
for
Cipro
9
the
only make
di Spagna
8.
and
definite
of
names
empires
in the
taken
not
there
when
il
is
is
full extent
dalV
F'ado
9.
1/1/
We
to,
must
they
10.
as,
Proper
go
Paris, vediamo
dianw
a
Parigi ^
are
as,
into
is expressed
Germany,
countries
some
to
not
see
Asia,
in
generally take
Peru, andiamo
towns,
we
Cina,
villages,
article:
go
Peter, vedo
to
the
PerU;
al
dalla
the
take
Parigi;
I
meaning:
into
case
of persons,
places, do
they
Consequently,
from them, we only
China, s^engono
names
when
Italy
"
us
before
etc.
or
which
America
let
suppressed
re
Germania,
in
except
from
come
small
and
see
:
il
Spain ^
Spagna,
of their
from
go
Italia
Africa, and
article
I
as,
of
,
put the prepositions. In this
by
we
,
in Francia,
motion
a
it
gives
king
della
re
kingdoms
France, egli^
is in
he
Malta;
^
which
the
as,
article
,
;/'J?/^a9
personal title followed
a
country
not
,
The
is
of di:
use
as,
Cuba.
there
of the
name
article:
Malta
reject itras,
Cyprus; Cuba,
Whenever
7.
by
others
the
Sardinia
laSicUia^SicHj ;laSardegnaf
and
be fixed with
can
take
some
,
Elba;
large country,
a
paese.
on
islands
to
2Q
as,
we
Paris,
an-
Pietro.
3o
4KTICLC.
With
1 1.
is used
:
il vecchio
Giacomo;
Iddio
tente
or
,
The
3.
1
followed
article is
by
Qenerale
names:
proper
5. The
words
indeterminate
preposition
are
,
as
:
he
ogni
corte
lazzo.
goes
,
mese;
But
we
the
6. When
without
court
to
two
Holland,
il
ignore Smith;
the
definite
month
palazzo
il
in
a
a
cle
artialia
va
,
palace, andate
form
nouns
preceded by
the
eyery
vedo
say
Miss,
or
taken
soyereign's,)
and
it is taken
palace,because
1
used
go
MrS;.
;
manner
to
il
Hill,
contadoy country;
church;
corte, court;
house
casa^
palazzOy palace, (meaning
an
Onnipo^
Hie Carlo.
Mr.
il S
James,
If.
bottegay shop; chiesa,
in
il
as,
Smith,
l*
an
personal titles
Signora^
rule:
preceding
Mr.
Signor Holland;
Mrs.
N.j la Signor a
1
aS; old
General
as,
JliU; Ring Charles,
the
follow
:
before
placed
4* (i) S ignore y Mr.;
1
place preceded by
or
Almighty God,
Onnipotente,
Dio
article
II Tasso,
definite article
the
adjectivetakes
the
^
of person
name
lioweTer,
name,
sls, II Petrarca
A.
12.
family
a
I
,
a
see
determinate
the
pa*
the
sense.
denomination
with
se
regard to its use, the first of thein English
is
(being employed adjectiyely,)
,
placed the second in Italian,goyerned by da? as,
of
a
thing
,
(l) Signore is contracted
or
an
J
coaionaat
but
the
before
/
a
impura.
doud
begioniog
with
a
TOwel,
3
AJITICLX.
bed-room^
"i
una
da
camera
baitiglia da
.tie,una
17. When
teito;
f
wine-boi-
a
vino.
designatea thing or per*
son
according to matter
quality,or countrj^the
noun
specifyingthis quality etc* irliich is often
in like manner
the first in English
employed
,
adjectirely9 is also the, second in Italian 1 but gotwo
nouns
,
^
iremed
by
Florence
dit
i^ine^i^inodi
18.
Firenze
d'oro;
school-master^
; sl
di scuola^
maestro
un
oriuolo
gold watcji^ un
as^a
ther
employed adjectiTclybefore anodefine a thing
in English to describe
noun
or
of
according to its form 9 shape or particularity
construction
in the
is transposed in Italian
as
,
two
foregoing rules , but goremed by a.- as^ a
a tant-bebell-lamp^una
lampada a campana;
lettiera a padiglione. (i)
steady una
A
noun
,
19. When
is
the
mentioned^
birth,
his
country
or
y
io tliMo
modes
tbat
tbe two
of
town
of
a
thing
instead
or
languages
the
j
a
when
accessary
laundry
,
noun
stanza
folding-door porta
,
has
tjbeother
employing
one
other
; or
d$l
"
bucato
dua
Inghil-
variation
/
winding
imposts.
as
gio*
form
always unilanguage having
the
designation
adjectiveor
:
a
not
for
two
an
are
that
caccio
Boc-
England: quest
expression
sometimes
person;
of the
lavatojoJ
Utmaca
sipgleivord
a
of
d'
\^#^o//a
,
sometinies
place of
or
Cerlaldo,
da
;
person
a
native
signifya
of
native
a
be observed
three
to
of Certaldo
is to
It
(l)
if the
Boccaccio
town:
Astolfo,
terra
da,
it takes
of
province
or
di;
it takes
native,
a
9
nation
a
participle
wash-house
,
,
stair-case
tC4da
,
a
3
ARTICLl.
a
^ da
non
vane
this
Sardegna
di
Cremona
of
in the
noun
a
pane
give
J
bread?
me
del
of what
pane?
the
bat
mentioned
vino, e
pane,
certain
if
number
1
particular portion
kind is intended
or
limitation
shall
We
sono
marinari;
then
"
eat
no
is u^d
saik^rs,
captain has
the
because
punito
the
In
i).
we
last
mean
that
though
ra^at,
no
are
^ee
you
sold at
alcuni
of them
a
nuiriber
specified.
The
.
English Indefinite Article
expressed by
is
tion
por-
bread, wine, and beer,
selb
birra.
article
any
certain
a
substance
^
be not
hare
soldiers, il capitano ha
some
the
del
you
no
those
soldati, (or
example
datewU
meaning
came;
yedete
quellieke
punished
2
fore
becase,
will
without
as, he
:
mangeremo
dei
dinia.
Sar-
of
accnsatiTe
aS)
,
article is used
vende
bread;
is mentioned:
is meant
be
any:
or
some
volete
to
some
or
i
natire
a
rather
but
;
nominatiye
Englished by
non
is not
(i) Dely dellOf della^ deiy degliydeiUy
20.
are
Pa via
of
nor
,
anzi
Pavia;
female
yoang
,
da
nd
Cremona^
before
a
noun
a
2;
before
un,
or
der
beginning
(I) Some
iin
una
,
masculine
ra,
than
uno,
the
with
s
a
a
Uno
un\
is used
,
beginning with
a
of the
noun
vowel
impura,
,
or
an
or
or
any
z;
s
same
other
una,
impugen-,
nant
conso-
before
a
gramioarians have ("Qed the article ihos appliedPmrtitwt,
34
ARTICLE*
with
is
the
of number
noun
Italian
expressed in
lo, la,
etc.:
The
^4.
he
as,
yende
pound,
measufu:
sells
due
before
placed
shillingsa
scellini
la libbra.
apposition,or
in
noun
a
i7,
two
sugar
lo zucchero
Article
Definite
the
hy
weight,
or
,
,
it expresses
immediately following another, of which
a
quality is suppressed in Italian : as
il Signor Grant,
of John,
Mr.
Grant, the son
,
,
Cardinal
figliodi Giovanni;
the
of Louis
minister
i3th,
lieu,primo piinistro
EXERCISE
received
Sh"
the
in
riceve
pensione
garden.
"Where
the letter
Date
day
to
of
hanks
the
sponda
armies
The
the
suono
fa
casa
(the
arrivera
on
the
people, and
the
encamped
were
of
noise
the
strepito
istrumento
c*
A
bomha
in Italian the
from
on
(he roof.
cadde
be
the
sentire
They
sent
some
tetio, mandarono
placed before
genitive follows
dti padre, via. the house
hearing
di
impedirono
shell fell
ed
genie
(hindered us)
English the genitivemay
governing it;
ministers?
vrill arrive
army
instruments
discorso.
fio^sa ,
The
Danube.
(4) king'sspeech.
In
the
accampaii
Danubio.
of
sound
erano
esercito
iapettore.
to-morrow.)
princesyreve
carrozza
V altro,
diman
(I)
prince. The
carriagesof
the
sono
letiera
after
the
inspector. The
the
Rules.
principe,
are
Oye
decimpterzo,
preceding
the
Riche^
il Cardinale
Luigi
from
pennon
giardino,
Give
di
on
a
Richelieu, the prime
the
noon
the
:
of the father.
snbstantirt
at" the father's
'35
IKTICLE.
soldi ert
diversi
Do
throw
not
non
to
the
II
teatro.
the
appleson
the
/urono
ioro
table.
Tho
gods
deaf
were
sordi
Three
Gods.
the
Tie
volonta
sacrificed
were
the
on
suo
will of
The
preghiera
bnlls
is
iappeto.
of the wicked.
prayers
book
carpet.
mela
getiate
^
His
the different theairei.
into
the Gods.
to
The
of the unfortunate
wives
sventurati
immolati
2
prisoners
sent
the
petition to
a
prigioniere
Lions
Emperor.
i
not
are
Leone
supplica
2
ferocious
so
ianio/eroee
Iron
is
is
Wine
quiet.
a
The
Ring
Naples
with
the
from
the 20th
on
yenii
=
from
came
is
Prussia.
of
Emperor
comes
me
from
We
receive
China.
writing-table^ten
tcrivere
Do
the
letters
died
of
left the
lascialo
orders
from
Congress.
^Congresso.
the
captain.
ordine
yon
Vi
viene
a
The
capital
has
ha
Spain.
out)
capitate (fem.)
Russia
rieeviamo
Te
Paris.
to
Torino
is in
(shallset
partiremo
is the
Piemonle.
Tea
We
go
Turin
vennero
He
to
"
-^"
The
(shallgo)
andro
"
I shall
London.
Piedmont.
I
Vienna.
at
fratello.
govematore
Portugal
England.
governor's bTot!:er.
Polonia
cosa.
IngJdlterra.Portogallo
Napoli
tranquillo.
Poland
in
caroprezzo
ci
thing.
necessary
a
necessaria
dear
is
earo"
is
Denaro
tigre.
quanto
dear.
JFerro
Money
tigers.
as
i
like Madeira
Madera
piace
wine-bottJes
,
wine?
Give
Vaiemi
and
w\
coffee-spoons,
sei
cajje cucchiarino.
36
ARTICLE.
iron
due
I have
guns.
lo
cannone.
I
wine.
ho
Where
is
the
i
is
He
?
of the house
not
home.
at
in
padrone
shall
He
court.
to
go
from
palace?
He
court.
at
was
in
casa,
(went out)
alia
comes
Toscana.
da
2
We
of
of) Tuscany.
native
of) Paris.
native
(a
cenammo
master
(a
di
N.
supped with Mrs.
We
N.
par Ian do
stava
botUe
a
Recaleci
catena,
Mr.
lost
perduto
(Bring as)
goldchain.
a
speaking to
was
have
cucchiajo,
Ecco
tv^o
We
(Here is)ihe silver-spoon.
pens.
gome
of
He
house.
the
usci
They
town.
D.
Captain
the
the
in
are
of Mr.
son
Is he
shop.
N., is
the
church.
at
now
in
I
adesso
to
go
church.
The
merchants
wedding.
a
negoziante
ifo
friend
a
at
were
(He who)
court.
at
say
truth.
the
Is
man.
Di
verita.
dice
he
What
a
his
siete
Marchioness
Marchesa
the
navy.)
and
not
Are
fish.
fitime pesce,
a
sembra
is
an
a
Ger-
Irishman.
Irlandese.
no
,
stranger.
She
is
you
a
Lady
Countess.
poet?
donna
of the
a
slraniero.
He
is
Capiain (in
a
di
We
have
every
day
some
ogni giorno
poeta.
The
am
Contessa.
e
marina,
river
a
always
yoi f
(No^ sir,) he
Signor
I
you?
are
dress)he (appears lo me)
mi
not
=
paese
Scotchman?
u^/r abii(i
does
couit
vive
Scozzese.
(By
at
countr^^man
che
has
nozze.
lives
chi
He
Lake,
logo
a
poem.
poema.
A
treatise
trailato
on
37
ARTICLE.
been
I have
eloqaence.
Marseilles
at
Martiglia
eloquenza*
Toulon.)
braudy ?
j^ou sell
Do
Tolone.
a
fine
a
,
t
hella
(GWe
sir.
aequavitef St,
vendete
=
=
Tes
(near
town
vieino
then) a
me
dalemene
of it.
glass
(mas.)
hicchiere
=
LESSON
Y.
ADJECTIVE.
An
1.
of
Adjectiyeis
Substantiye,
a
word
a
and
expressing the
with
agrees
lity
qua-
it in gen,
and
der
2.
haye
the
change
those
in
their
into
o
and
e
i
ftliccy happj
of both
Italian
this
point which
upon
must
classics
been
it ; amount
in
;
and
Re
be^
donna
man;
after
be
with
giyen by
to
the
the
number
rules
in
specting
re-
nouns.
generallybe placed
may
niceties
some
follow
of that
and
before
there
haye
Ex.
genders.
plural they
but
as
e:
Those
1.
feminine
feliccj happy
4. Adjectiyesin
of the
the
and
ficent
king; regina benefica, bene-
the formation
are
in
o
woman.
their
both
for
a
an
uomo
queen;
For
termination
are
neficoybeneGcent
3.
chieflyin
adjectiyesend
Italian
few
some
o
number.
their
of
substantiyes
the
language on
ding
acquired by the rea-
attention.
different
following :
Such
rules
Grammarians
;
38
ADJECTIVE.
AdjecXiYCSo" shape
adjectives y
those
that
elements
four
of the
and
tion, and
weather
their
stantives
sub-
5i It is
oratofs,
un
man,
uomo
damp
that
whenever
,
we
directingthe special attention
of
reader
or
liat;
acquafredda;
water,
observed
be
to
English
the
gr^teinl
et
round
a
umido.
tempo
,
desirous
cold
;
y
verdi;
scarpe
Inglesi ;
riconoscente
to
6. When
placed
be
adjectivehas
an
after
is detached
and
substantives
of
the
the
noun.
reference
a
are
adjectiveused,
epithet or
an
adjectiveshould
this
after
rotondo
capptllo
un
fiSy
shoes,
hearer
conyersa-
9
oratori
gli
quality
any
common
,
epistolarystyle put
:
green
express
in
are
,
verbal
nation;
colour,
y
to
ral
seve-
them
from
by
,
a
it is
verb
,
put
in the
plural ;
if
genders, the adjectiveis
and
:
as,
vallies and
telli del
several
with
an
it
valli
ie
hills
e
of
erano
your
the proper
so
ne
in
the
without
sono
were
last
:
as,
without
/'
time and
ora
ed
place.
a
il
verb,
be
priety
impro-
belle
the
y
e
contentiy the
friend
sculine,
ma-
should
ifra'
thers
bro-
pleased.
adjectivebe placed immediately
substantives
the
be
ferent
of dif-
are
beautiful,* le sorelle
are
sisters
can
used
masculine
le colli
amico
vostro
and
If
substantive
last whenever
placed
7
the
they
it may
after
agree
luogo opportune
y
ii)
iDJECTiyC.
EXERaSE.
The
richt
The
rich.
The
The
is rich.
sister
brothers
brother
rich.
were
is cool.
water
is rich.
The
Give
red
some
Prendete
joa)
me
green
Telyet.
verde
velluto'.
a
French
of
white
(shall give
of
darb
yi
A
gratefollady.
signora.
to
red
She
traveller.
English
an
viaggiatore,
How
general.
bottles
wine.
bianco
I
master.
graiefill
generale.
oaany
were
shoes.
domani
sposb
How
A
to-morrow
parlerb
mairied
sisters
nero
(shall speak)
I
ind
glass
a
of hlack
pair
rosio
the
were
hiccJiiere
A
shoes.
sisters
brothers
Jreseo,
Take
The
officers
many
shall
yon?
(adj.)
quanta
wine
have
( wedrink)
?
She
has
heremo
friends.
(a great many)
(adj.)
moUo
will
have
yon?
table
This
friend.
Questa
arnica,
have
He
is
a
(adj.)riyalL
pochi
sincere
rivals.
How
is too
sincere
Sriend.
sincero
amico,
has
had
too
much
has
he
gonna,
These
mandatifVoitro
"White
trooble.
Questo
handkerchiefs
India
"
^"
JazzoUtto
Your
sent?
paper.
carta.
gown.
swords
many
spada
specchio
brother
is
She
corio.
looking-glasses
many
How
short.
troppo
They
(adj.)
troppo
(a few)
enemies.
(too many)
I have
are
coarse.
ordinario.
A
black
a
4o
ADJECTIVE.
LESSON
VI.
COMPARATIVES.
As
8.
adjectiyesexpress
stantiyes;and
we
the
either
may
of
qualities
increase
diminish
or
these
qualitiesin different ways; hence
degrees of comparison ; the positive^
tivCy and
adjectiyetaken
called /70MViVe/ in
in the
comparatives
superlative.* as
il
arise the
compara'
superlative.
The
is
sul"-
pillricco,
in its
higher
a
highest
lower
or
or
y
degree,
degree
lowest
"
rich ; piii ricco
ricco
,
the
simple signification
richer
,
richest; ricchissimoy most;
,*
or
rich.
very
An
9.
adjectiyein English
hecomes
tive
compara-
heibre
the pohy placing the adverh more
sitive
or
adding er to it. In Italian the comparative
"
is expressed hy the
adverh
piii, and the
adjective:as, more
industrious;/ym industrioso;
wiser, piitsavio.
Menoy
lesS; and
in
making
egli e meno
with
this
a
meglio,
better
comparison:
aS;
affabile; we
are
transaction
noi
he
di questa
Than
10.
is
siamo
acquainted
meglio infor^
faccenda^
expressed
2d.
3d.
By
St.
afiable,
better
By del, dello, della,
By di.
I
also used
is less
;
mati
are
;
che.
dei^
degli,delle.
4^
IDJECtlVE.
wlien
ad\^"T*bs; and
it
precedes a
preposition: as he
e^li k piu forlunato
by
a
is
than
speak
be
to
che
silent, i meglio paHare
in Rome
prudent
tban
piU
be
emente;
in Florence
che
Roma
5.
Thany
nitiye
mood,
1
is
forti
di
We
che
As
.
.
.
So
.
.
(i)Asmucb
.
"
.
.
.
.
much
So
stimato
piu
a
verb
not
in
che
non^
or
stronger tban
are
credetCj
non
the
di
infi-
qttei^
belieye,
you
siamopiu
or^
eredete,
quello che
.
by
expressed by
pillforti
siamo
esteemed
more
was
Firenze,
followed
Ex.
lo che.
i6.
in
che
coraggiosa^
egli era
^
in
to
courage^ously thaii
more
tbey bebayed
prudently, si comportarono
eke
se,
wi-
than
savio; it is better
tacere;
mente
lucky
more
,
govertied
noun
as"^^ Ctanto
.
.quanta
ijuanto
.
asf J 1
asj
c
as^
jco5h
.
"
.
come
che
i \altrettanto
.
CD
So
much
.
So
many
As
As
-3
"
.
"
.
"
as
much
many
.
V
( |
/^
as
g
f tanto
"-
"
\
is
as
.
cautious
Egli
^
Egli
^ cauto
(1) When
tanto
followed
as
cauto
a
father;
padre\
padre.
quanto
quanto
by
the
il
participte.
quant
quanta
u
He
.
il
o
4^
Adjective.
"gli
i
Egli
i altrettanto
We
cauto
cost
rewarded
ricompensati
eravamo
tanto
JVoi
eravamo
ricompensati
Noi
eravamo
cosi
We
work
mucli
as
lavoriamo
Noi
has
He
as
much
as
ha
"gli
In
these
latter
placed
Much
17.
9
amiable
vie
y
The
The
before
ne
9oi.
avete
tanto
tanta
^
y
in
Italian
he
more
as
via^
Pi{^
9
correct
be
the
used
he
more
lavora,
much
as^
much
more
with
compara-
for
gains
instance.
Exercises
in
or^
piit lavora
piii guadagna.
Note,
be
must
y
piii guadagna;
quanto
^
etc.;
English;
it is in
Italian
,
vie:
or
eiL-
etc.
cannot
works
is
comparative
a
piu amabilcy
article
rendered
more
you*
quanta
piii grande
assai
greater
tiyes
as
examples^
pressed by assai^ molto^
18.
voi.
omitted.
he
may
che
voi,
quanto
prudenza
two
voi.
come
you.
prudence
tanta
voi,
o
voi.
quanto
ricompensati
tanto
.
quant
ricompensati
altrettanto
eravamo
padre.
jou.
as
Noi
Noi
il
che
cauto
much
as
were
padre.
il
come
tanto
"
upon
this
at
placed logcili^r
and
,
the
end
the
foUoiviog Lessons
of the Grammar,
"
are
44
ADJ"CTiyC.
LESSON
VII.
SUPERLATIVES.
19.
;
with
20.
The
the
superlative
any
object;
The
the
assaiy
absolute
is not
relative
etc.
of
the
before
compared
is.
is made
by
positive into
by placing
or
the
the
adverbs
issimOj
onesto,
assai
onesto
ging
chan-
moltOy
positive: as,
onestissimoymolto
tive
rela-
or
,
onesto,
honest.
very
21.
Tliis
superlative
by annexing
arci.'
or
absolute
either
superlative absolute
very,
;
the
last vovrel
issimay
honest
superlativeis
the
to
positivethe particlesstray
belloy handsome;
as,
cibelloy very handsome.
of expression by no
means
2a.
strabelloy
But
these
noble
duplication of the
The
expressed
is sometimes
or
are
ar-
modes
elegant.
the
positivehas
superlative:as, buono buonoy ex-*
tremely good;grande grandcy exceedinglygreat;
force
nuoyo
of
this
perfectlynew.
nuovOy
23,
Adjectives in
thQ plural,take
as,
and
co
24* Adjectives in
changing
simoy yerj
25.
The
io
issimOy issimay
it also before
jriccOyrich; ricchissimo
into
io
issimo:
req[uiringan
go
,
very
in
etc.:
rich.
superlativesby
become
as,
h
savioy -whcsavis-
wise.
superlativerelative
is
expressedby
il
4^
ADJECTIVE.
piit, lapii,
26.
If
etc.:
French
1
active
most
in
Those
the
who
the
imitate
il
(as,
,
:
soldatOf
attwo
article
from
follow
placed between
soldier,il piu
pill attivoy) deyiate
piu forte.
,
should
be
is to
piU aiiivo.
repeating the
il
strongest
il soldato
or
1
article
no
y
the
the
superlatiye relatiye
a
substantiye
asy
as,
genius of
the
soidaio
the
lian
Ita-
language.
27.
,
fra
This
the
or
Uy
collerico
28.
delle
or
sisters;
superlatiyetakes after it the genitive
prepositionstrayfra : as, la piiihella
the
most
delta
sorelUj the
handsomest
passionate in
the
of
the
family,ilpiic
famiglia.
Adjectiveswhich
of their
are
irregularin
comparatives and
mation
for-
superlatives.
Comparative,
Positive.
the
Superlative.
adjective,adverb.
Good
huono
migliore meglio oUimo,
Bad
catliyo
peggiore
peggio pessimo,
Small
piccolo
minore
meno
Great
grande maggiore
huoniaimo.
or
minimo,
or
cattivistimo.
or
piccolissimo.
maisimo^ot
granditsimo.
Acrid
ucre
aeerrimo.
Celebrated
celebre
celeberrimo.
Salubrious
salubre
aaluberrimo.
Upright
integro
integerrimo.
Miserable
misero
mi$er
rimo,
ox
miser
They take the comparative and the
method
superlative in the common
grande , piiigrande y il piiigrande.
ittimo.
relative
also:
as,
46
LESSON
CARDINAL
VIII.
NUMBERS.
ORDINAL
AND
Ordinal.
4 St
Primo.
2d
Secondo.
3d
Terzo.
4th
5ih
Quarto.
Quiato.
6ih
Sesto.
7lh
SettinK).
8lh
Ottavo.
9lb
NoDO.
"lOth Decimo.
iith
decimo
Uodecimo, nndicesimo^
or
primo.
12th
Duodecimo^
dodiceaimo,
cimo
de-
or
secondo.
43lh
Decimo
terzo, tredicesimo.
44th
Decimo
quarto, quatiordicesimo.
iSih. Decimo
quiato, quindicesiaao.
i 6ih
Decimo
47ih
Decimo
sesto, sedicesimo.
settimo, diciassetteaimo.
48th
Decimo
ottavo,
49lh
Decimo
nonotdicianoovesimo.
20th
248t
Ventesimo, or vigesimo.
Yentesimo
primo, or vigesimo
primo.
30th
Treiitesimo,
40th
Qnarantesimo, or
50lh
CinquaDtesimo^orquinquagesinio.
60th
80ih
Sessantesimo,or sessageaimo.
Settantesimo,or settuagesimo.
Otiantesimo,or ottuagesimo.
90ih
Novantesimo,or nooagesimo.
70lh
400th
Centesimo.
4000lhMillesimo.
200
Dogento,
or
due
or
diciottesimo
.
trigesimo.
qiiadragesimo.
47
miMNCBS*
Cardinal,
ColleeUve*
j
300
Treceiuo.
400
Qaaitrocento.
Una
decina, half
Miklc
Una
doazina,
Una
veutina,
4^000
2^000
Due
400,000
\ Un
mila.
Cento
mila.
4,000/)00
Un
miliooe.
2,000,000
Due
miliooi.
pajoj a
Una
pair.
teore,
a
dotem,
a
a
score,
treutina,
of
numher
/^
fo
thirty.
Una
io
quaraotioa,
of
numher
the
forty,
r
Ad
JDislrihutive,
ad
noo
noo
Una
hy
one
,
Un
cinquaDtiaa, ha]f a hundred.
oj
cenlinain,to the numher
one.
^
doe
A
trc
a
hundred.
due,
a
three; and
to
Uo
two,
three
ire,
a
hy
two
to
migliajo,
hy
the
of
numhtr
a
thousand.
A
od.
A
centinaja,
hy
migliaja,hy
Millanta,
hundreds,
thousands,
thousands
thoU'
upon
sands,
1.
XJnOy
una^
when
a
be
cannot
Numeral
the
ho
ne
UnOf
2.
four,
or
me,
daste
darb
s
jou
hare
e
voi
annexed
the
then
we
ricevuto
I
$cudi
will
to
use
to
as^ete
uno,
number,
be
res
requi-
in the
the
of the
give you
icudi
as,
one.
lar:
singu-
crowns;
But
if
number,
is
plural :
thirty-one crowns
i trenluno
veniur^o.
phrase;
(oTij'One pounds.
make
the
a
twenty-one
substantive
but
Article:
an
of
a
tions
contrac-
same
ne
to
scudo^
,
received
ho
end
and
liifbra
article, or
prefixed,
"
the
,
s^eniuno
quarantuna
have
at
followingsubstantive
as,
the
it is when
quattro,
una
the
to
as
contracted
I hare
lo
is liable
you
che
twenty-one
mi
crowns
I
as,
sent
man"
sfi
,
48
NIJBIBERS.
*
One
3.
of years:
the
thousand
year
one
neir
anno
is
y
are
number
In
6.
speaking
ordinal
before
the
Carlo
quinto.
The
7.
il
primOy
;
z7,ai,
second
with
the
to
first hors^
8.
In
1
tre
It is three
I shall
see
is
etc.
English
expressed
//
// and
;
ai
sup^
we
fifth,
the
Charles
third
the
numbers.
mentioning
s^edrb
la
first;i7,ai, i, or
li tre,
or
,
prima bat'
horses, i primi
;
prime battaglie.
as,
month
as,
as
due,
and
are
so
lows:
folthe
on
,
rable
prefe-
//.
Sono
Vi
number:
the
cardinal
i and
substantive:
the
article, placed in
of the
date
agree
,
kings, princes,
the
in Italian
press
of
and
declinable
first battles, le
the
cavalli;
already seen.
have
battle; the first
first
the
ty,
twen-
except
,
with
primo ca\^allOy the
tagliay
indeclinable
we
as
numbers
and
gender
and
in
venti,
cento
are
milione^
Ordinal
5.
otto
numbers
y
uomini;
cento
men,
eight hundred
mille
mille
uno
hundred
one
as,
4* Cardinal
il
tkou^andy
or
expressed in Italian, with the cardinal number;
is the conjunction a/t^
in the
notation
nor
not
in
hundred
a, before
or
,
a
the
ore,
or
o'clock
quattro
you
at
time
of
day, we
sono
le
tre
say,
;
:
ore,
four
may
or
alle
o'clock
quattro;
'
:
5o
AVGMENTATITES
kind
general classes denominated
angmentaXiyeSy and diminutiviy di-
t ii^i
y
minutiyes
each
;
,
of wieh
that
Nouns
2.
change
chest
cassa,
in o^^o,
and
o^/a
tadinottOy
y
a
stout
a
their
last vowel
etta:
as,
end
degree
of
principey
casUy
the
a
con^
house;
en-
fTince
y
;
part, change
most
e//o, ella;
inOyina;
prince; (i) contadino
peasant;
large.
for
into
a
y
peasant;
Diminutives,
3.
contadiho
somewhat
house
Others
smaller
a
nine:
femi-
be
gios^ancya youth; giot^anottOy
youth;
grown
a
indicate
one
great book;
a
large chest.
a
9
as, from
increase;
well
cassohcy
;
into
ne
of the masculi-
are
libroHCj
librOy book;
as,
sou
their last vowel
primitiye word
the
gender^ though
a
its suhdivisions.
has
augmentatives. They
hecome
of thtf
nouns
of two
consist
resci
ace
The
words.
aid of other
the
tifigto
principino
y
ettOy
young
a
contadinclloy
peasant;
a
peasant; contadina,
country woman;
contadinella, a country lass;/jowero, poor;(2)/?o-
young
vertttOy
little
poor
a
diminutives
many
a
poor
AccfuUy
(I) Contadino
(a) Poveretto
acquerugiola
water;
//iro, book;
formed
are
more
bitrarily:
ar-
from
as,
of
poverettUy
man;
woman.
4. But
sense
little
libercoloysmall
is not
a
dimiautiTe
masc.
Denote
as
wel
compassion. Pwarttjta fem.
as
slightrain;
book:
but
,
y
a
priroitireword.
smallness
endearment
and
a
old
PecchiOy
vecchiayOlA
5
DIMtNtTlVES.
AND
ji'tfccAicre/Za,
poor
woman
5.
Tbe
y
has
language
of badness
and
accia^
another
class
in
Tbej
baseness.
or
astro
astra:
laccioy
large bad
Allied
nouns
end
in accio
,
poet;
colul-
knife.
tbem
to
an
conyej
-paltry poet: coltello, knife;
J
a
of
poeta,
as,
j
poetastro
eating;
little bed.
letticciuolo
9
idea
;
old woman;
/y^^g/ora^iVi rilifjing,whicb
called
man
nice in
one
gkiottoHe, glatton;ghioiterello,
dog; cagnuoloy little dog;
cancy
lettOf bed;
old
vecchierellOy poor
man;
I
is
a
class
of
terminations
in
which
and umCy
denote a collection
aglia, ante
or
quantity c^ irhat is signifiedbj the primitive
in a simple sense
but
sometimes
word,
more
or
frequently in a sense of rilifying
contemning.
J
^
COLLECTIVE.
SIMPLY
From
anticOf ancient;
besliUj beast;
.erde, green;
COLLECTIVE
fie"..,
.mmuteness.s
VILIFYLNG.
^
S minuzzaelia,
^
v^P*'*^
^
i
of
scraps,
( any
S pacciame^
tmpaccw,
"^
people!
rabble;
J-;-^'j-^'a
.
mi/iusza
V^^^
.e"/"".,j"
AND
"
.
anticaglia , SLniinmiies;
bestiamcy cattle;
nuisance,
}
a
sort
heap
| 'l,acciume,
\ dirt.
;
of
5^
AUGMENTATIYSS
6.
Of
the
dimension
diminutir^Sysome
: as
little
omettOj
to
,
small
casetta,
apply simply
Others, which
house; libretto^little book,*
msLn;donn"ttay
termeA
arc
contemptuousness
omicciatto
,
:
as
little woix^n.
press
dispregiatiyi,ex-
,
paltry fellow
donnisciuola
low
;
woman
,
;
doctor.
doitorettOf insignificant
Others, again, called
vezzeggiatii^i are.
playfulor caressingnature
fratellinoj dear
sorellina
of
y
dear
: as
a
,
little brother;
little sister.
,
second
7. A
from
the
diminutiye
first :
as
is
frequently formed
from
,
casiettayMxxXe case;casseitinaf very little case;
little man;
omettoloj very little man.
omettOy
8. In like
their
have
formation:
new
omaccioy
9. The
be
a
as,
to
a
from
all in
man;
varied
or
by
a
omaccione,
of variations
singleword
common
fying
vili-
from
worthless
easuy
augmentative and
increased
force
great number
given
not
the
manner
which
will appear
may
in the
house; which, however,
use
,
though
all found
in
lowing
folare
the
dictionary.
(Note) Poueraccio,
or
maic.
Means
poor
fellow io
grodness of temper. J'Qyeraccia, fem.
a
sense
bolh
of
passion
com-
AND
Diminotivi.
53
DIMIMVTIVES.
Peggioraiivi.
Accvefctiivi.
Casettaf
casotta
caseitinOy
casotio,
casoccia.
casone,
casuccina.
casaggioj
casalone.
casaccia.
f
casettina
y
casella
,
caserellay
casolare.
casamento
,
caserellinay
catolaraccio.
casellina
casucciaccia.
,
caseilino,
DitpreggutiyS.
casinay
casile,
caiinoy
casipola*
casinina,
casupoia.
cascrino.
casuccia"
casuzza.
"ome
lo*
kind
of
of
the
Italjrdifferent
difference
any
ion
no
because
synonimous,
are
y
of
instance
dottorettOy and dottorellOy
tiyes and
tliis
parts
prerail, without
signification
; for
Adjectiyesalso
of
in different
terminations
are
dot"
equally
of doitore.
disparaging deriyatiyes
1 1.
of words
formations
formed
are
Diminutiyes,
with
into
Augmentayarieties of signification.
AUGMENTATIVE.
From
belloy handsome
grande
;
be Hone
some
mighty handgrandaccio and
y
large ;
grandonaccio y enormously large*
;
y
54
AUGMENT
AND
ATIVES
DlMINI}Tiy"9.
DIMINUTIVE
,
In
simple
a
sense.
tungOf long; lunghettOy
From
grandcj
rather
large; grandicellOy
gialloyyellow ygial I ogno,
rather
and
yellowish
long;
giallognolo.
faded
yellow
,
and
red; ross'gno
rossOf
brunOy hrown;
In
;
rossiccio, reddish.
brunazzo
brownish.
^
endearing
playful or
a
large*
sense*
tristOj malicious; tristarelloj
From
tristarellinoy somewhat
cattivOy (i) had;
malicioti^.
catlivelloj roguish
t^emiigliuzzo: labbra
i^ermigliOfvermilion;
vermigliuzze
;
lips finelyvermilion;
y
ly
brillantej hrilliant;brillantuzzOy beautifulbrilliant.
12.
Even
,
benonCy
the
3. As
and
and
capricious
them
must
reading,
sufficient
(x) O^Uw9
to
masc.
the
and
which
be
to
rules,
be
these
mations,
for-
has
the
mentative
aug-
a
more
notice
the
intimate
from
of
ous
vari-
too
are
subjected to
acquired
this
of
diminutive, bcnino,
of this kind
formations
of invariable
degeof
partake
example, bene^ well,
for
1
Adverbs
some
sion
preci-
knowle-
conversation
them
will
facilitate.
Means
also
a
prisooer of
war.
Odtiva
f"ra.
be
55
X^
LESSON
PRONOUNS.
A
l^ronoun
instead
employed
word
id A
of
a
noun.
In
"is*
there
Italian
Personal, Conjunctire 9
stratiTe, Relative
Some
of these
tives, and
stand
in the
in the
some
Possessiye
Interrogative, and
,
^
Demonf
Indefinite.
of Suhstan-
natnre
of
nature
Pronouns
of
sorts
aered
are
Adjectives;and
subject,like them, to distinctions of number,
and gefider,with
of formation*
variations
case,
Some
tion;
Pronouns, however, undergo no variaare
but
serve
unaltered
for
the
different
bers,
num-
etc.
Personal
Pronouns
being divided
All
person.
person,
other
their
PERSONAL
further
nature
distinction,
first,second, and
Pronouns
are
of
third
third
the
agree
in person
Antecedents.
AiTD
Personal
imnation,
the
the
a
which
except the AelatixfCy
with
%.
into
have
PRONOUNS.
CONJUNCTIVE
Pronouns, agreeably to their denoexpressive of Persons,
are
of Substantives
:
when
put
and
into
are
of
que
obli-
led
governed hj verbs, thej are calConjunctive Pronouns, having, as such, a
eases,
and
peculiar variation
Pronouns
of form.
of the first person
are
intended
to si-
56
PRONOUNS.
gnify the
are
with
associated
Those
persons,
or
person^
of
to
persons,
whom
the
speak,
or
who
speaker, Jo, I; noiy
the
second
the
who
signifythe person
speech is addressed,
we.
or
,
tu,
thou; voiy you.
Those
of the
spoken
elleno, fem.
third,
some
other
person,
or
sons,
per-
of, egli, he; eiia, she; eglino, mas.
they.
AW.
From
roi stesso
Da
yourself
Plural.
N.
Yourselves
Voi
G.
Of yourselves
Di
D.
To
A
Ace.
Yourselves
Abl.
From
yourselves
stessi
voi stessi
voi stessi
Voi
stessi
yourselves'D^
THIRD
Vi.
Vi.
siessi
yo\
PERSON.
Singular^^Masculine.
N.
Himself
Egli
G.
Of himself
Di
D.
To
A
Ace.
himself
Himself
Abl.
From
Da
Se
himself
se
stesso
stesso
stesso
se
Si.
Si.
stesso
stesso
se
Plural.
N.
Themselves
Eglino
G.
Of
themselves
Di
D.
To
themselves
A
Ace.
Themselves
Abl.
From
Se
themselvesDa,
se
stessi
stessi
stessi
se
stessi
se
stessi
Si.
Si.
6
PAONOUNS.
1
ConjonctWe.
Plural.
Elleno
If.
Themselves
G.
Of
themselves
Di
D.
To
themselves
A
Ace.
Themselves
Abl.
From
3"
Personal
Si.
stesse
se
the
in
Protionns
Si.
stesse
se
Da
themselves
8te8se
se
Se
stesge
stesse
nominatire
case
expressed (as in English)^or omit^
ted and understood
(as in Latin). It is preferable,
tically
boweyer, to suppress tbeniy unless used emphabe
may
either
for the
them
,
required
or
of
specialattention
for
hearer
the
distinctness
to
to
prevent
ambiguity.
3. These
m
the dative
In
they may
spoke
to
then
,
a
low.
precede or folthey are usually
either
conversation
common
P^t before the
He
accusative
or
"erb;which
conjunctivewhen
case
governed by
become
pronouns
verb:
me
;
mi
parlb.
I
saw
her; la vidi.
63
PROKOUNS.
A
4*
verb
He
coDJanctire
always joinedto
is
speaking
was
to
me
tbe
after
placed
pronoiin
it :
;
parlavami.
I
her;
saw
uidila.
When
tedy
tlie verb
tbe
initial letter
doubled
; as
Give
of tbe
dammi.
He
tell
tbe
of ail
yowels
9
considered
moodj
write
In
can
To
writing
bave
;
bim
;
written
or
in tbe
participle
a
^
are
to
scriverglL
posso
scrivendogli.
bim
,
Having written
,
verb
a
joined:
bim
to
to
gerund
a
placed after, and
I
monosyllables are
coming w.itb
pronouns,
infinitive
tbis
from
be accented.
to
5. Tbese
is
ine;parlonimi.
to
exempted
not
diggli.
only pronoun
bim, dtgliy and
tbat
Note
acc^Mi-
annexed
pronoun
spoke
is tbe
rule:
vowel
a
,
me;
Gli
in
terminates
to
bim;
avergli
scritto.
scriltogliyor
Oi^endogli
scritlo.
6. Witb
verb
a
in tbe
imperative mood,
if
ployed
em-
tbe conjunctive
affirmatively,
pronoun
placed after, if negatively,precedes;
Speak
Do
An
not
to
'Speak to
exception
is better
placed
lateci.
par
ns;
to
is
non
us;
tbis
before
affirmatively
employed,
rule
an
ci
parlale.
is,tbat
tbe
pronoun
imperative verb,
wben
in
tbe
tbird
eved
per-
'
63
PHONOUNS.
'Wm
tliiM
:
The
7.
let him
united
to
is correct
in rre^
condurre
,
we
t-^
final
and
if the
is cut
re
conduct
can
when
,
loses the final e^
pronouns,
the
Italian.
in6nitiye mood
examples giren above;
ends
nitire
the
of these
any
the
in
of
present
him, preferable
to
"af
^u:tff/t,whichyhowevery
to
as
gli dica,
y
them
infi-
off: as,
,
in
possiamo
condurlL
EccOy
8.
word
a
beholdy has
of
it,
if it
as
of
frequent use
conjunctivepronoun
a
were
verb,
a
phrases : eccomij
behold
eccoei,
9. TVith
by
and
teco;
themselves
y
me^
/e,
con
^ith
con
is
me
by
#eco,
He
took
with
co
lui*
(I) Con
also
with
him
;
the
Ueo
con
reTival
of
eon
,
wWeb
are
iiaa
been
,
writcri,
Mre
bot
ffvrae;
are
in
which
and
con
are
affectationa
notco,
con
to
"Osco,
etc.
thee,
by
con
use.
the
verb,
con
luij
condusse
seco^
be
more
pressed
ex-
lei,
con
WjbII
loro
as
(1):as,
seco,
reprobated2
ference
re-
are
or
amm
^e-
used
be
antiquated modes
attempted hy aome
atill
;
her^eif, with
properly, as
mi
am
/Ae/n, having
of
more
milar
si-
I
with
cannot
jconjuDCtive'pronouns
meco,
preision
with
luiy^eco leijseco
seco
The
her,
"till
usually,by
1.0.
eccoti,
,
preferablyto
and
me
which
nominative
the
loro:
scy
with
to
here
or
me,
elegantlythan
more
to
following and
are;
himself
seco,
con
him,
we
sense
annexed
expressed bjfmecoj
with
by
behold
here
us,
tlie
in
the
in
of
ex-
modern
*
M#ce
iotolerable.
i
G4
PROKOUIIS.
any
is
intended;
I
case
and
and
me^
him; iopunitco voije
not
not
her
to
;pa^late
a
lui.
non
non
e
me,
lei,
a
vi
lo
to
emphaus
or
as,
punish jou,
Speak
contradistinGtiaii
where
in
would
puniscOf parlatemi,
the
AU
11.
conjunctiye pronouns
Taried, for different
numbers
different
as^eie
Le
sentiva
They
in different
sentence,
also:
cant
as
for
in the
proper.
im-
serve,
un-
for
of them
you
spoken
them
numbers,
eyen
her?
to
sing"
employed by good
and
cases
some
be
example,
I heard
are;
sometimes
are
and'
cases,
parlato? Hare
Le
here
writers
in the
same
following :
Reslandogli (dat. sing.)la
speranza
d'oppri-
mergli (ace. plur.)
The
hope
Ilia
12.
a
consonant,
in
see
of
oppressing them
used
as
a
lofty style, than
him
;
// vedo
,
and
stimo
conjunctiyepronoun
it is not
(when
or
remaining
in
s
impurayhnX
to
him*
before
rather
I
conyersation;
common
lo s^do,
I esteem
him
;
lo
il stimo,
not
,
i3.
a
ra,
or
accusatiye
Glij
as
yerb
beginning
a
z.*
plural,is used
with
a
as,
I honour
them;
gli onoro.
I esteem
them;
gli stimo.
ifowely and
only
fore
be-
simp^
65
PRONOUNS.
I will
But
1
we
Parlate
The
but
may
dissi
luif
egli k
I said to
him
with
leii
as,
;
to
respect
(in the nominative)
which
vero;
be
may
:
as
it
,
expressed,
egli^ justas well.
s^ero^ without
XI.
LESSON
PERSONAL
,
employed expletively in
of ii
sense
verb,
a
singular.
is sometimes
the neutral
lui and
is less usual
in the
as
to
loro; speak to them.
a
with
lui;
a
first mode
Egli
is true;
prepositiona:
be done
or
dative
the
as
loro, or parlate
this pronoun
i5.
used
the
same
the
li yedo*
,
he
may
zomberb.
gli
them
see
j
without
or
lo
I
say
Loro
4-
with
bang them;
AWD
PRONOUNS
CONJUNCTIVE
costisufd
Singular.
Masc.
Fern.
Essoj
He.
"'55^,
She.
MtdesimOj
Self.
Medesima,
Self.
DessOf
Own-self.
Dessa,
Own-
Plural,
Ma"c,
Fem.
Essi,
Esse
Medesimiy
Med
Dessi,
Desse,
They.
J
est
me
Selves.
^
Own-selves.
self.
i
60
PAONODRS.
three
Tliese
oblique
employed, i.
as
egli; but
is
tbe
same
monstratiye
Esso
is ratber
Cambierebbe
anche
essa;
"ssi
e
isperano;
soffrono
non
suffer and
Esso
2.
do
number
or
nothing
"Con
Con
without
of
Un
a
in its
V
Rispettate
cura
him"
in
e
Con
,
mezzo
in the
essa
non
,
that
,
I
is not
clothes
nature
frequently
^
/ei, with
di
esso
the
fice
of-
examples:
unafontana
;
o/it
;
who
fountain.
a
colui
prudente
be
y
performs
in these
her.
them.
us, you
as
che
non
;
does
not
care
prudent.
panni furono troi^ati,e
The
is
esso
middle
Bespect public opinion ;
for
tbe
in
but
opinione pubblica
di
of
expletiye:
pronoun
and
garden,
si
an
ned
gover-
yariation
,
oblique cases,
relatiye
giardinOj
A
used
then
^oi, loro; with
noi,
EssOy
3.
change.
,
pronoun
lui, with
esso
bis road.
on
hope.
not
; it is
than
more
esso
de-
joined to personal pronouns
is
demonstratire
a
noun,
pro-
more
she too would
by tbe preposition con
gender
personal
a
Reentered
in cammino;
.
jof
as
:
entro
They
the
in
cliango
not
cases.
Esso
1.
do
pronouns
found,
were
con
and
essi, i denart;
with
the
those
^
money.
;itx Medesimdf
and
stesso, which
both
signify
68
PRONOUNS.
lasciati
JHe hanno
Se
egli non
Non
La
not
che
so
I know
.
viene,
does
If he
n'e
morte
is at
let him
else
can
alone.
us
danno;
che
to
come
us.
but
us
barm.
spalle,-
"e
sovra
expect
altro
riuscirne
what
left
aspetti;
ne
comey
possa
not
Death
soli; tbey have
hacks.
our
.
afftttine spronarono
nefurono guida;
avari
JVon
e
sa,
Wot
affections
avaricious
terprize,and
IVe
2.
is
to
were
spurred
as
a
relative
antecedent
some
the
to
us
;
and
en-
suhstantive
then
ferring
re-
pronoun,
,
of discourse
intpre-
guide.
our
employed
alia
ject
sub-
signify
to
serves
or
rit, them,
of, to, for,from, by, with,
about"
or
him, her,
Ltheni*
ij inutile ilparlame,
Se
volete
If
you
I
sing
Se
ne
They
Ne
conceive
quando
ho
when
ne
I harve
of it.
voglia;
inclinationybrit.
parlerebbe
per
would
about
talk
;
idea
the
it.
un
continuo;
anno
it for
a
whole
year.
hofattopiii disegni,fra quail u'^piaciuto
uno
I have
which
Ha
Videa
meglio concepime
will better
Canto
speaking of
it isuseless
nel
;
made
one
cor
several
of
them
drawings of
is
tantofuoco
it
,
amongst
approved.
che
tut to
ne
arde;
69
PROyOt'NS.
has
He
his
in
^vith
burning
Tante
illuminated
Was
udl
ne
He
no
of her
news
any
J
y
into
ne
hai
d'un
If thou
desirest
Queste
pere
sono
These
pears
are
ne
fine
will often
to,
helmet,
buone:
good
or
ployed
em-
require
substituted
ne
find another
voiete?
will you
:
altro;
un
Ne
have
one.
ho.
any? (of
(of them).
some
va
to
;
to
he
donzella
The
go
with
neutral
verbs
of
away.
come
is
away.
going
affrighteddamsel
was
necessary
q^.
away.
spaventata
Fu.necessario
It
thus
when
elmofinOy troi^ane
employed
;
Venirsene;
La
added
heard
had
he
as,
Andarsene
Se
a
I hare
3. iTe is much
motion:
non
them:
desir
them).
che
day.
a
English,
he
to
some^
for, of it J of
Se
for many
propriety of language
,
one
instantlj,although
rendering
In
piiidi
sien
novella*
her
knew
air
the
that
them.
by
subitOy benche
conohhe
La
che
d* intorno
lamps appeared around
many
is ali
he
it,
lampade apparirono
ne/u lucida;
Varia
So
fire^ that
such
heart
che
i
that
was
venwa
ne
coming
capitani
the
;
se
ne
captains
on,
levassero
should
ve
mo-
;
I*RONOURS.
70
In
be
this mode
of
speech
generallyto
seems
expletive; but, haying always
an
place mentioned
some
it; namelj, this
4.
ne
j
To
to
understood, means/rom
or
that
or
reference
placCy whateyer
and
gire emphasis
ayoid
it maybe.
repetition,nc
be also
may
to
with
rence
refesense
employed in the same
adrerbs
signifyingthis place, t hat place
Partite
di
Depart
from
partitene subito;
e
qua,
this, and
departyrom
Uscite
di
Idy ed uscitene
Go
out
of
that, and
19. Ci
and
He
Se
will
abandon
not
If that
misfortune
paghero
I will
Scusatemi
Excuse
me
avvenuta
happened
not
;
to
us,
together.
speak
to
of discourse
to
,
libertd;
con
with
you
They are employed as
antecedent
referring to some
relative
upon|?V
I shall think
freedom.
pronouns,
substantive,
signify
of, to, for, at, in, or
;
fosse
ci
a.
Ci pensero
the
;
non
y'lparlo
if I
in
pronouns
insieme;
all
se
directly.
us.
had
tutto
pay^OM
it
:
quella disgrazia
F'i
of
out
ci abbandonerd
non
directly.
employed
are
following examples
Egli
go
it
subito;
conjunctive personal
As
1.
ci
."
o/it.
or
bject
su-
"".'
FHONOtJNS.
lo
darb
ci
for
ci
We
shall
I
furoisb
shall
I
remedy
it.
Noi
Mi
rimedio;
1
7
ci
compenso;
it*
find
good eomppnsatioii "/i
alfine risoluio ;
#oifo
last resoWed
at
am
buon
troveremo
Ascoltai
que$te parole
1 listened
these
to
it.
upon
rispondery'i;
senza
words
without
replying
to
them.
3.
They
adverbs
th4s
or
both
much
used
instead
for it tOy in^ or from
locality,
y
of
question),ci haying the sense
of
in
place
also
are
Mi
\^i of there
place 9
^
ricordo
d'esserci
I remember
Non
80
I cannot
haying
ridir
ben
well
to
yi
here
,
place:
it
(thisplace).
entrai;
I entered
how
recount
(the
venuto;
come
come
that
or
it
ot
(that
it
place),
yenni
allora
in Roma
quattro
I
came
then
ci
e
,
mesi;
Rome,
to
have
and
been
already.
city)four months
i pieno di gente;
Quel balcone
navali:
ujjfiziali
That
balcony is full of people; I
nayal
other
yi
see
in it (this
t^edo
due
in it two
officers.
4- f^i and
each
gid
ttato
sono
in
ci
are
such
sometimes
phrases
repetitionof either
to
,
substituted
preyent
in diflerent
an
senses:
for
ward
awkas.
PRONOUNS.
"72
vi ci
Egli
conduct
will
He
it is mucli
But
of
mode
Egli
you
to
better
to
expression,
ambiguity
well
as
it
use
adrerb;
an
for
he
other
or
aToid
to
cases,
cacophony:
cold;
vicondurrt;
w
(that place).
such
in
as
condurrd
vi
ttan
rather
condurrdy
instance,
conduct
will
all
you
there.
5. These
tly,with
in
verbs
which
in
being too
n*d; there
JYon
ce
ne
There
sono,
or
some
un
uomo
vi
Sufficient
serve
things
employed
nation
in all ; the
established
much
is
by
stom
cu-
of it.
none
non
sono;
ne
ve
there
are
of
adverbs
as
rimedio;
instances
in
relative
the
gender
"
was
"
there
who.
man
a
is
othwer
no
medy.
re-
of the
conjunctivepronouns
used
personally,have
person,
the preceding lesson.
They
irrational
or
which
there
che;
in
asfverhj i quali'^^;
alcuni
sono
third
presented
been
or
altro
e
of the
also
vi
are
era
ao.
not
be
may
of them.
sonoy
Non
though
instances,
ce
Vi
expletives,and
mere
JYon
Ci
are
some:
none
to
are
many
of them
in
employed, indiflFerenof speaking,
impersonal modes
in
they
omitted
use
words
tfWo
and
,
beings :
accusative
reference
with
pronouns
as
such
,
only,
number
^
as
but
they
are
with
va*
follows:
73
PROZfOUHS
Plural.
SioguUr.
Here
is the
Ecco
book;
I shall
read
it;
il
librOf lo leggerd.
the box, and send it to
Take
Prendete
!a
scatola,
e
Mr.
Jones
maiidatela
al
;
Signer
Jones.
Do
yon
F'edete
Eat
the
see
horses
i casfalli?
these
pears
Mangiate
^
? I
li i^edo,
to
La
signora pare
The
lady appears
JSfon
mai
8ono
non
I hare
and
is
^
geloso ;
ttato
been
never
be
jealous;I
io
effetto;
in
reality*
lo
sono
e
,
am
meet
with
any
of the other
foregoing examples.
united
sometimes
not
and
so,
so.
(viz.lOyla, li,gli,le,or
then
i in
non
W/, tiy ci, vifsi,change their
they
the
of it:
giovinetta^e\o
young
require
lo sarbt
I will not
"i.
buone.
sometimes
will
instead
so^
good;
le troverete
queste percj
be rendered
find them
will
you
Proprietyof language
/o,
them;
see
,
e
when
conjunctivepronouns
ne,)"" in several
The
as
i into
one
two
are
pronouns
word,
of
before
a
verb:
me
"e
lOf or
li,or
melo
cell
direte^you will tell it me
darcte, you will give them
;
to
us;
74
PRONOUIfS.
parlerdy
i^ene
or
ney
ve
will
be
speak
to
you
of it.
it is better
But
tbey
loy
vencj
cela
is
verb
a
When
But
or
be
tbe
direte;
curtailed:
wbicb
tey
or
me
in
must
giyen uncurtailedy mela^ meliy melcy
Gliy
22.
in tbis
in order
of le
Glielo
tbe
avoid
to
le
loy
feminine
lay
dissi
tbe
le
so
send
:
of le lo dissi
as
well
as
tbe
l"
la
,
,
always
etc.
it
to
is used
line,
mascu-
disagreeableconcurrence
liy le le;
I said
;
Mandategliele
Instead
added
e
an
by /o, /a, /i,/e, or it^yand
for
case
bas
^
followed
wben
dative
in tbe
quently
fre-
a8"
place
take
cannot
witb
bare
parlerete.
men
contraction
le united
all substantives;
are
conjoined,tbey
thus
are
final yowel
tbe
mc-
atid i^elo is botb*
;
tbey
Mel
tcluy
meluy
cency
separately, as
produce ambiguity,for
otberwise
may
tbem
write
to
to
as,
ber.
tbem
to
ber:
Tbis
mandaielele,
ce
licen-
y
is also
ne
used
before
parlai being
gliene parlai
,
more
to
object.
tbose
and
,
POSSESSIVE
Are
elegant
unnecessarily;le
signify I spoke
LESSON
I.
but
ne,
wbicb
correct
to
her
tban
of it.
XIT.
PRONOUNS.
imply
tbe
possessionof
an
'jQ
PRONOUNS.
moria^
and
a
of action
verb
hope^ paura, "ear,}
motion, are expressed by
speranzUj
memory,
or
and
the deBnite
loroj)
w,
stantive:
sub-
the
placed before
article is
the
in
corresponding conjunctiye pronouns
datiyecase, (viz. in*, a", gliy Uy ci,
the
as,
I broke
bis
I broke
my
arm
leg ;
6. Consonant
gli ruppi
;
mi
expressed by si, if tbey
bave
same
as
person
or
persons
by gli le, loro,
if
J
otber
or
person
Peter
persons
Peter
il braccio.
take
tbe
number
I have
F^idi
sua
Their
the
loro
madre
a
;
ha
I
saw
to
his
quaranta
kindred,
is in
noun
excepted
vostro
penknife
immedia-'
of
or
that
alone
temperino
the
title
article, if
;
Maestd
mother
of
noun
a
given
loro
La
This
il
dato
some
;
are
possessive'j)ronouns
by
singular
to
as
gli ruppe
tely followed
tbey do not
Ho
reference
(John's)arm
tbe
and
nominative,
bis
broke
7. When
tbe
tbe
to
il braccio,
si ruppe
Pietro
reference
are
bis (o'Wn) arm;
broke
Pietro
:
his, her, their,
a
tbey bave
gamba.
la
ruppi
tbis rule,
to
il braccio.
:
padre
your
;
father.
Majesty,
cinque
anni.
old.
forty-five
years
rule, however, is disregardedin elevated
style and
in
is
poetry.
PRONOUNS.
8. The
article
in the
plaral ; when
either
number,
//
brothers
Saluiaie
da
the
Make
// nostra
Our
la
e
f
9. A
madre;
compliments
balla
dances
of title
possessive pronoun
is
bene
to
your
takes
the
as
;
well.
kindred
or
well
sister;
Si'
mother*
good
singular as
Tour
"
;
il vostro
buona
vostra
fratellino
noun
in
me.
dell* ax^vocato
little brother
in the
tradito
betrayed
counsellor's
and
father
have
parte
padre
gnor
diminatire
a
as,
vostrifratellim'hanno
Your
kindred
or
or
signore
adjectire;
an
interrenes;
ngnoruy
or
is
noun
when
possessive
a
of title
noun
a
that
or
when
required
before
comes
pronoan
is
77
place
plural,
after
article
when
the
it:
sorella^
\^08tra
the
or
la
sorella
sfostra.
Possessive
10.
the
when
of
they follow
belonging to :
Questo
II
M.
his own;
own
;
libro
miOy
d mio
own
my
il nostrOy
il loro
their
,
own;
il
a
del
he
sua;
the
or
takes
ticle
ar-
sense
is mine.
own
;
il
sua
,
i^ostro, your
employed
; are
,
cur
be^ in
thy
tivelyto signifysubstance
Ha
to
il tito^
our
own
verb
this book
-,
;
the
dispense with
pronouns
property;
care
of
substanas,
his
own
(property).
.12.
Imici,
i
tuoi,
i
suoi,
i
nostri,
i
yottri
i
,
78
PAONOUNS.
loro,
his
our
,
to signify
substantively
wiy,
their
fjrour
relations
,
thy^
friends
,
ibllo-
,
etc.:
wers,
II
used
are
comando
generate
a* suoi
d*attacare
il
ne-
mico.
The
ordered
general
his
troops
the
attack
to
enemy.
i3. When
his, her, their, hare
in
not
noun
his,
nominatiye
either
expressed
or
the
di
by
by
reference
they
case,
suoi,
suOySua,
lui; her, by di
to
a
be
may
ioro;
sue,
di
lei; their, by
Ioro.' as"
Noi
stimiamo
di
la
lei
We
esteem
But
it will
Signora
figlia;
Mrs.
be
glia
He
[alia
than
sed
by
amici,
miei
(1)
In
and
even
and
"ubttantive.
hr
di
the
common
to
o"
of mine,
amico,
uno
,
use.
leijiglia;(1)
Mrs. N. and her daugh*
figlia ^oixXi.
daughter).
iacorrect
best
avoid
to
de*iuoi
thine,
But
to
put
di
this is
writers, aocieat
lui,
erroneous
and
rather
is ei.pres-
etc.
amico,
tuo
un
his
to
mean
dei
uno
or
amici.
EDgKsh-IlaliaDOnmmars
tome
di
,
alia
mio
un
lei
,
lei, or
A. friend
4*
1
her
to
di
lui
alia
presents
sua
di
use
doni
makes
ten
or
daughter.
her
to
proper
necessary
dei
di
N. and
figlia,
sua
e
ambiguity: as,
Signora N. ed allafi'"
Ioro, whenever
Eglifa
JV.
la
it it laid
di Ioro
di lei
,
,
modern
to
b"
inelegMit
,
belwmo
the
,
bitirle
the practice Iteingeslabiishrd
j
aud,
^h"it
ia
more,
by
PRONOUNS.
79
Many Italians, especiallytbe Tuscans,
i5.
speaking
f^entUman
make
use
of tbe
writing
or
to
a
Yfiili Yfhom
they
^
of
title of tbe
a
third person:
superior ^
yiz.
ella
is
now
manner
not
are
gender,
Fou
2.
case,
wbicb,
wing
follo-
in the
:
{Madam^
According to
(l) I.fi ii
which
,
Peri. Pron
N.
and
i^o"-
or
ladyship,)for
generally substituted
a
familiar
signoria^
nostra
or
^
,
feminine
signoriayijovLTlordship,or
lady
a
in
qt
this mode
bwrJ
ff""|u*i"t'y
being
an
Sir) Ella
in ronTWWtion
of
Con
.
j.Pror
(i)
addressing
etwi
in
inaccurary of lan^uajja,ibould
tb"
per-
noniiniliT*
ba avoid"4.
.
80
PRONOtNS.
Signorie
le
sons
9
and
gentlemen
verb
3. The
do
How
Come
do,
do.
do
How
Come
for
do,
you
or
?
or
come
sta
ella?
come
sta
ella ?
Gentlemen
or
Signorie^
le loro
stanno
:
as,
Madam?
Signora
,
both
Sir?
ignore?
you
sta
used
put in tbe tbird person
is to be
you
do
How
be
may
ladies.
stay S
Come
loro
Ladies?
le
or
Signorie
loro?
'
with
adjective oxA participleagree
4. The
the
title: as,
Are
5.
soddisfatta?
ella
E
(Sir,
you
Your
baying
J
il
by
give me
Signora
,
I have
Ho
read
/' ordine
6.
Gentlemen,
7. This
sejes
hyjdi
is
pressed
ex-
lei: as,
;
il di
ordine,
lei
,
or
di lei,
expressed by
both
order
JTour, relatingto
Signoriy
or
person^
i siioi orecchini.
ordine
suo
one
ear-rings;
your
your
il
to
etc.
sua^
dia
mi
letto
reference
suOyla
Madam,
satisfied ?
Madam)
or
la
il
loro,
loro
in the
la
more
or
lorOy
etc*
persons,
as
stima
mi
mode
of
third
person
i di gran
addressing
is
,
is of great value
esteem
your
Italian
r wo
tome:
pregio.
persons
feminine
of
is very
8
PRonouiis*
1
perplexing to foreigners; itis^ however, so far
from
being general, tliat in some
parts of Italy,
with being somewhat
of an
it is taxed
tion:
affecta(i) the second person pluralmay therefore
indecorum.
and without
naturally,
used in many
parts by the best educated and
politeof the Italians.
used
be
It is
most
(I)
It
adopted
more
from
have
to
sccmt
been
tlio language of tbe
and
Italy,
of th" lixteenlh
innoTalion
an
bare
cenlury,
Spaniardi afler they bad
oblaioed
been
before, a"
absolutelyunknown
of it are found in tbe earlier Italian writers ; tbeynever
traeea
DO
nsiag
erince
Tbis
elU
from
is manifest
the
to
respect, but always voi,
IbUowing paaeage of D^nte, in wbicb be represenis bimself speaking
d*)ttdtuao
wilh
in
Teneration
to one
Dal
m
to
of bia ancestors
foi cbe
prima
Ricomminciaron
ber
siete il padre mio,
Foi
date
Foi
loTate si cb' io
mi
a
baldessa
parlartutla
alwaysaddresses
,
piiicb'
son
io.
"
respectfully,
employs tbe
Laura
voi
:
tfonttantly
^
"
'SB*^ proffertoil cor
Boccaecfo
too
his characters
in tbe
parolemie.
Fbi mi
Petrarcb, wbo
to
t
sofferie
Roma
le
lo comminciai
"
,
wbo
address
describes
tbetr
,
tbe
vol
piece.
turn
"
of real life, makes
manners
equals and
style: Monsignore,
a
ma
superiors"
of whatever
di
maraviglia
mi ditsj
is one
instance out of an infinity.
Many otber examples in corroboration,
might be adduced
same
m
io
bo
gran
all
rank,
cio cbe voi
w
from
,
tbe
best aatborities.
Tbe
by
the
voi
is
bit Italian
used
frequently
personages;and
tragicdrama,
nor
in Goldoni's
tbe eUa
into poetry,
even
scenes
has
never
of modern
of
been
genteelcomedy
introduced
limes.
6
,
into
32
PROITOIJNS.
LESSON
XIII.
DEMONSTRATIVE
The
I.
show
or
they consist
very
conducive
the
dicate
who
to
first class
The
called
pronouns
point out
to
PRONOUNS.
demonstrative
objects.In
of three
tbe
serve
guage
lan-
Italian
classes,(i) which
are
perspicuityof meaning.
is composed of those which
proximity
of
the
objectto
an
in-*
person
speaks.
second
The
which
of those
class
the
indicate
,
object to the person spojien to..
dicate
inthird class comprehends those which
of an
the remoteness
object both from the
spoken to and the person speaking.
arranged in their
present these pronouns
proximity of
The
person
We
an
respective classes.
^8t
Glass.
2d
j^S^^^i^.^iSr
iSfesto/S
Q""lW3;que
Q-""t"'
\c^t^^'I
1
,
/t-otesta,
This.
(1) There
three
are
Pronouns;
(2) In
Qass.
3d
Cotesti,
Quest!,
Questa
Class.
the
Qwella
J
^^^^
classes of Adverhs
for which
plural quegliis
,
see
used
(3
(fem.)
,
correspondingto
^hat part of speech.
before
a
vowel,
an
s
these
impura
of Demonstrative
impura
t
or
a
s/
beginningwith
queU* before
a
consonant,
a
yowel; quel before
except
s
impura
mkI
^
noun
a
a
m.
x
or
,
zjfjuei before any other consonansj
quelU at the end of a phrase.
(3) In the singular, guellois used at the end of a phrase , before
s
a,
an
ne
masculi-
84
PRONOUNS.
Oggi
quesio iuogo, domani
in
in this
To-day
place to-iaorrow
coiesti panni in dosso
J^edendovi
those
Seeing
Partite
y
clothes
upon
tbat.^
iu
;
yon.
cotesti;depart from
da
quelio,-
those
(persons).
Stamane^stamattinay\\nsx"LOTn\u^;
5.
this
sera,
erening;
of
St a
This
6.
questa mattina^
mancj
tractions
con-
que-
notte.
of mine
coat
sta^
to-night; are
sianottCy
questa
questa
sera,
horse
that
of yours,
y
mio
expressed hj questo
are
in
abitOy
etc.,
cotesto
vo^
cavallo.
stro
He
and
she
followed
by a relative
are
expressed by coluiy quegli or queip
pronoun
coleiy colorOy quegli or quei:
7.
y
they
,
,
y
He
who
is
Quegli y
mio
officers
is
parla agli uffizialiOlandesiy
che
it who
know
il
Coloro
Costuiy
costei
y
them
to
in
Mandate
via
Cacciate
via
writing;and
without
tried it
have
che
sanno
plurals
In
Dutch
e
zio.
They
chcd
the
to
uncle;
my
8.
speaking
I'hanno
have
an
with
their
idea of contempt
spective
re-
atta-
conversation:
common
colei
provato.
coluiy coleiy
y
;
;
send
that
costui; dirve
in solemn
woman
this fellow
discourse^ they
conveying
Such
idea.
away.
away.
are
ployed
em-
85
PRONOUNS.
Cotestuiy cotestei, cotestoro, are
now
solete, though employed by classic writers
9.
CodcstOy
only
from
codesta,
cotesiOy
Cestui
10.
ortbograpliy
costoro^coluiy
,
merly.
for-
etc.
cotesta^
costei
^
differ in
etc.
ob-
colei,
co-
lorOfVaajhe
employed in elevated diction , as
without
^fi:
genitivegoverned by a noun,
the
// coHui
piacere or
pleasure of this
il
piacere di cestui;
,
The
Al
colei
At
the
cry
ThiSy
11.
things
Do
corse;
of that
female
that
he
this
meaning
J
ran.
thing
that
j
pressed by questo, cid, quello:
tell him
that ; non
gli dite cib.
ct
are
not
What
11.
grido
man.
this?
means
Quest o
meanings
dir
vuol
used
is often
questo^
alone
in
;
with
I
chc
reference
to
as,
some
a
variety of
substantive
understood:
In
questo
At
this
Jo
sono
I
Mi
hanno
They
1
3.
venuto
have
to
(momenta
sopravenne
she
(moment)
come
am
ella
up.
questo (fineor
a
this
(end
condotto
conducted
TVhaty used
came
a
or
stood);
under-
effetto);
purpose).
questo (stato);
me
to
this (state).
independently, without
refe-
86
PRONOUNS.
to
rence
a
substantiye, and
expressed by che^
is
I know
wbat
See
wbat
not
be
to
{cosa
tbink;
things
betingunderstood:)
non
done
baye
may
what
meaning
che
so
pensarc.
s^edete
;
che
abbia
fatto.
LESSON
XIV.
PRONOUNS.
RELATIVE
Relatwe
A
I.
preceding
some
II
I
quale
Quale
3
i
discourse;
Quali
which.
What
,
whom.
Whose
Cui
which.
Who
quali
y
\
Cbe
,
That
[U cbe
1.
botb
Tbe
quale y
to
persons
i
according
i
stag wbicb
il
cervo
to
you
wbicb
al
y
is
,
gender
employ
is varied
of tbe
killed
;
;
ammazzaste.
I devote
quale
mi
myself;
dedico.
applied
in
tbe
antecedent:
quali impiegate.
quale
,
trade
tbe
you
Tbe
// mcsttere
what.
wbicb
tbings y and
to
wbom
men
uominiy
Tbe
which,
quali y wbo^
and
Gli
II
,
Which.
II
article
that.
which
Who
}
|jQue?cbe
"
of
to
Plur.
Sing.
^
subject
or
noun
reference
a
its antecedent.
is called
wbicb
bas
pronoun
87
PRONOUNS.
Sette
donnCi
Seven
ladies
the
Chcy who,
3.
nominative
and
genders:
alone
who
God
The
degli
sees
whom
persons
the
hearts
you
saw;
for
numbers
uomini
of
tion.
men-
serves
hoth
of
accusative
solo s^ede i cuori
che
Dio
that,
which,
whom,
and
the
I will
of whom
names
"
quali raccontcrb;
delle
i nomi
;
men.
chc
le persone
vedeste.
The
dog
The
hares
that
barks; it
that
4. Cuij whose,
both
and
numbers
le
run;
che
cane
lepri che
whom,
abbaja.
corrono.
unvaried,
serves,
in
except
genders for all cases
It is employed in the genitive
note
without
prepositionsto deor
,
the
nominative.
and
dative, with
them:
Yesterdayarrived
will receite
Jeri
you
youi* orders;
Vuffizialeda
arrivb
whom
officer from
the
riceverete
cut
i
vo-
itri ordini.
The
Gli
uomini
When
used
determined
noun
dative
to
men
whom
a
it is in the
,
or
cui par
without
by
you
the
spoke ;
last
its
one,
on
case
is left to
depending
context;
genitive,
accusative.
e.
a
verb,
on
be
a
it is in the
8^
PRONOUrVS.
In
the
genitive9
it may
after
the
substantive
on
Wbose
di
courage,
il cui
cuif
Tbe
the
The
man,
Cui
vins^
del
col
quale
quale
Le
which
it
cui
dareie
della
etc.
onde
which
che
"fT
I do
which
ITon
che
preferred.
it precedes
:
trunks.
vanquished.
in
lofty style for
qualiy delle quali,
it
bound.
am
reference
the
to
to
a
general
precedes ,
is
stantive
subrule
expressed
^
libro,
I have
book
what
know
so
I
yhaiYing
pronouns)
not
coraggio,
ai^into;
sono
(in exception
quale
coraggio
give our
anger
dei
:
bauli;
will
y
or
,
Jf^haty 'which
of relative
depends
employed
with
chains
6.
hy
as
il
accusative,
you
quale
:
,
be
to
i nostri
whom
J
cui il
are
I'ira; whom
catene
The
di
on
is often
Onde
5.
or
and
to
depends
rendered,
dative
verb
L*uom0y
y
it
be
examples
in the
Wben
may
before
placed
wbich
coraggio
first
two
be
JVon
or
read
qual
so
;
libro
abbia
ietto.
when
But
used
be
cannot
the
What
TVhaty
cib chcy
I know
or
a
phrase
admirative,
^uale
:
fine
meaning
he
man
! che
that
which
belVuomo!
is
y
quel che
what
is
expressed by
:
has
done
j so
quel che hafatto*
89
PRONOUNS.
What
you
is yery
say
true
;
cid che
dite
i
i'e-
rissimo.
7.
the
TVhichy
haying reference
antecedent^ is expressed by
cosa
to
sentence
a
il che
la
or
as
qual
:
have
They
which
does
surpriseme ;
ancora
punito il masnadiere;
mi sorprende,
hanno
Non
che
8.
non
A
not
relatire
omitted
which
pronoun
,
understood
and
expressed
The
yet punished the highwayman;
not
in Italian:
houses
you
in
sold
;
le
Are
Chi?
who?
Che?
vendeste.
PRONOUNS.
used
pronouns
che
case
XV.
INTERROGATIVE
"
frequently
English^ is always
as^
LESSON
I
is
in
asking questions;
whose
whom?
?
what?
Quale, sing,qualijifuai?jln.what^
Quanta, quanta! sing,how much?
Quantij quante? plu. how
a.
Chi
is
applied to
Whom
do
Whose
stores
Di
chi
iono
you
persons
want?
are
Chi
il
many?
only :
as
s^olete?
these ?
questi magazzini?
,
which?
PRONOUNS.
90
3. Che
is
substantive
Che
Che
done?
you
which
is
have
vessel
avete
have
or
detached
?
prdso
?
taken
you
4. Quale and quanta
^
joinedto
be
may
are
is this ?
bicchieri; qual prenderb?
i vostri
Here
stantive
sub-
?
reasons
your
a
it;
from
Qual giorno ^ questo? what day
le vostre
ragioni?
Quail sono
are
"What
;
?
hastiniento
What
fatto?
avete
cosa
vulgar incorrectness)
a
done
you
Che
Ecco
a
ax^etefatto?
avetefatto? (not
cosa
What
without
:
hare
What
and
with
both
employed
wine-glasses; which
your
shall
I
take?
Quanti
libri
avete?
how
many
books
have
avete
com-
you?
La
i bellitsima:
seta
quanta
ne
prato?
The
silk
you
is
very
fine
:
of
it hate
XVI.
INDEHNITE
A
much
bought?
LESSON
I.
how
pronoun
way
that
PRONOUNS.
indicates
is called
objects in
indefinite.
an
determi
in-
PRONOUNS.
9^
altrui
Nonfart
Do
not
to
te
per
thou
;
likest
not
thyself.
for
vile
Altrui
To
other
3.
L^
me
a
J
caro;
people yile^ to
altrui
used
property of others
Abbiate
Take
cur
a
Dobbiam
dell*
altrui;
property.
to
togliere r altrui;
di
guardarei
ought
the
means
:
of other's
care
dear.
me
suhstantiyely,
J
We
vuoi
non
which
that
one
any
che
quel
be careful
take
to
not
another's
property.
4* Altro, altra,
pronoun
Per
y
himself
show
to
altro
d'essere
mostrarsi
In order
employed by itself
referring to persons :
is
che
an
non
be
other
quale
soleva
to
as
definite
in-
era;
than
he
Was.
IVon
dii^enta
altra
ma
,
does
She
used
It is
a.
and
to
Per
By
la
the
an
but
another
become
what
she
^
be.
joined with
voi in
emphasis
not
;
the
personal
pronouns
for the
expletire manner
j
:
pratica
che
noi
practice which
altri
we
Noi
altri
Jtaliani;
Voi
altri
Inglesi; you
we
abbiamo;
have.
Italians.
English.
sake
noi
of
93
PEONOUIfS.
adjectirelywith
3. It is connected
kind
of eyery
TC"
altra
Quasi
:
bella
another
if
As
substanti-
si trovasse;
gia\^ane non
handsome
girl were
be
to
not
found.
// tempo
The
chiede
allri
pensierij altri
requires other
time
lament
thoughts ^
i;
other
la*
mentations*
5"
jiltrOf substantireljemployed, conyeys
meaning of something else^ any thing elset
Volete
tf/^ro?
Facendo
you
hare
di
rider
at
something
sembiante
Pretending
But
will
laugh
to
repeated
when
in the
one
repetition signifies
di
e
as,
else?
altro:
else.
the
sentence
same
thing
thing
any
the
another
,
,
thing
y
or
different things:
two
^
Altro
adempirej altro " promettere;
fulfil is one
thing " to promise, anotlier.
To
6. Altro,
is
9
meaning
by che, in
employed adverbiaUy
of except
Niuna
saw
Non
7.
both
V
:
uno
nuvole
e
nothing except
clouds
pub
It cannot
che
altro
cosa
esse
re
altro
che
be otherwise
e
Whateyer
and
conveys
tence
sen-
the
otherwise:
vedeva
niuna
negatire
a
,
altro
cosa
or
He
followed
V altro
the
article
or
ec.
and
sea.
utile;
than
^
veda'a,
mare
one
useful.
and
the
other,
prepositionmay
be
94
PRONOUNS.
witb
employed
be
must
uno,
witb
repeated
altro.'
of botb;
I
speak
I
speak against
Parlo
contro
L*uno
c
tbe
rerb
L'uno
I'altrOf in
tbe
one
and
c
coniro
the
delVaUro.
e
tbe
otber
;
Vallro.
nominatiye,
hare
may
singubir :
I'altro
c
Botb
tbe
Vuno
in tbe
delPuno
parlo
merit
and
one
a
tbe
considerazione
otber
;
considera-
merit
tion.
8. JVe
y
I'uno
Non
baye
speak
tbe
neitber
ne
delVuno
of
one
nor
ne
delV
:
as,
verrd
of tbem
V altro
placed
will
ne
come.
;
otber.
tbe
altro;
of tbem.
of neitber
neitber
ni
I'uno
tbe
nor
before
placed
I' altrojneiiher
parlo
For
one
verrdt^^non
V altro
voglio ne
I will
wben
not
ne
ni
Vuno
Non
tbe
I'alirOyneitber
but
yerb,
a
iVe
I
n^
requires a negative particlewben
otber
after
Vuno
tbem^
ne
Vuno
per
nS
per
V altro.
V
9. L'un
used
tbe
altro,
accusatiyel
genitive
9
Eteocle
e
Eteocles
or
J
only
altro
a
Polynices slew
Vun
Tbey
against eacb
contro
anotber,
is
sometimes
in
preposition:
si uccisero
Agiscono
act
witb
one
y
governed by
Polinice
and
otber,
eacb
Vun
one
V altro,
otber
;
V altro
anotber.
;
gS
PRONOUNS.
Those
brothers
two
distrust
Quel duefratelli
O
lo.
each
Vuno
have
;
Vuno
lutti
Take
di
per
uno,
:
quest i libri, ma
due;
e
other
or
one
deiraltro.
other;
notice
to
Valtro
o
otber;
Vun
or
one
peculiarity
o
non
difjidano
Valtroy
o
no
Prendete
si
eacli
of
these
books
but
not
,
both.
Ho
questi facchini
a
promesso
due
lire
per
uno;
I haye
and
gender
I
be
may
to
the
ysltj
the
referred
and
Indians
liyres
two
altrOj
uno,
according
they
the
saw
porters
senses,
number
which
to
res
these
all
In
these
promised
each.
their
substanti-
:
both
Americans;
warlike;
are
f^idi
gli
gVIndiani
altri
I hare
gli Americani;
e
gli
uni
e
but
I
bellicosi,
sono
the
received
tables
and
chairs
,
do
Ho
like
not
either
ricevuto
le
piacciono
n^
Vuno
Jnabile
tavole
le
Both
of
them
e
to
unable
le
ni
une
(masc.)^
(referring
them;
of
sedie^
le alt
Valtra
different
from
ma
mi
re,
{{em,)
sexes,)
age.
non
per
eta.
90
PRONOUNS.
XVII.
LESSOir
PRONOUNS
INDEFINITE
OOVTIVUBD.
Fem.
Masc.
AlcunOy alcuni; Alcuna
y
Some,
alcune,
any.
rSome
Qaalcheduno
Qualcuno
Qualcbeduna
Qualcuna
NessuDo
Nessuna
Nissuno
Nissuna
Niuno
Niuna
Veruno
Veruna
NuUo
Nulla
N^
pur
Vi
un
one.
^ Somebody.
\,Any body.
\
Nobody,
f/fone.
Not
una
pur
one.
IRVARIABLB.
Some
Qualche
Nulla
\
Niente
j
the
All
Some
an
antecedent
of
pronouns
9
11.
one
J
are
confined
the
first.
excepting
some,
which
plurality,are
any
is
^
coUectiye, or
rendered
visitato
gli uffiziali,e
qualcuno /crito
;
ve
expressi-
by qualcuno
by
,
the
to
reference
having
(fualcheduno in the singular, or
the
the
plural, agreeing with
gender:
Ho
any.
Nothing,
aboye
singular number
to
,
,
alcuno
antecedent
ne
ho
troyato
or
in
in
PAONoims.
some
of
some
of
seen
wounded.
them
Hare
delle
Ai^eie
I have
guides?
guide ? Ne
any
you
Did
officers ^ and
yisited the
I hare
9*7
qualcuna.
merchants
the
see
you
ho
some.
I
?
saw
them.
i
vedulo
Avete
negozianti?
veduti
ho
Ne
al-
cuni.
The
11.
with
connexion
in
of
noun
a
genitire:
cogliendo alcunif or qualcuni
Stasia
rami
ad
I shall
speak
SotnCf
substantire
de* vostri
alcun
to
any
of the
some
J
know
you
Prendete
Take
See^
2
9
some
amici;
of your
one
any
alcune
or
pere
^
or
qualche
but
when
pera
;
pears.
20;
page 32, art.
page
other modes
of some,
any,
the
;
news.
i4* NessunOy nissuno, niuno,
not
novitd
alcuna
in
require
friends.
coupled adjectiyelyvith a
nature
are
same
expressed
"
by i/ualchejor alcuno;
Se sapete qualche
j
If
questi
branches.
of these
gatheringsome
was
i3.
di
;
Parlerb
art.
equally employed
pluralityfollowing
in the
them
I
are
pronouns
same
negative
/lo/i,
when
they precede the
69;
end
of
mdloy
verunOf
they follow,
yerl):
7
9^
paoNOUHs.
mi
Nessuno
JVessun
conosce
;
nobody
mai
campofu
knows
me.
ubertoso
tantp
quanta
il mio;
field
No
JVon
was
conosco
fertile
so
erer
mine.
as
I do
nessuno;
know
not
any
body.
1
5. These
oi.any bodjTy any
of any
kind
Del
quale
Of
figliuolo;
remained.
profittoveruno;
bringing any profit.
recare
Unworthy
The
di
ottener
obtain
to
same
doubtful
in
patto;
verun
compact.
any
used
pronouns
negative,
a
body,
child
any
Immerite\^ole
without
ce
negative senten-
a
nullo
rimase
non
not
Without
16
jin
fication
signi-
:
whom
Senza
the
necessarilytake
pronouns
after
a
rerb,
phrases expressing
mething
so-
conditional, signifyany
or
any:
Auete
veduio
have
nessuno?
seen
you
any
body?
17.
a
JVi pur
jiegative
placed
unoy
but
not
when
after
the verb,
before
it :
,
abbiamo
Non
We
found
Nepur
18.
uno
Niente
trovato
not
one
venne;
and
nepur
of your
not
nulla
one
come
uno
as
de'
requires
,
vostri;
friends.
came.
under
the
same
PRONOUNS.
lOO
(Some
body.
one
Taluna
faluno
Some
Plural.
Sin{"ul.ir.
Tutti
Tutto
J
(m.)
,
1
whole.
All
J
(f.) J
Tutta
Tutte
Quanto
Quanta
Quanti,
Tanto
Tantij (m.)
,
much
(m.)
Quante, (f.)
{As
As
much
{So
,
Tanta
Xante
many.
Altrettanto
Altrettanta
Altrettantiy (m.) f-^*
AltrettantCy ^f.)\As
many
much.
Alquanto
Alquanta
Alquantiy (ui.)I
Alquante^ (f.) J
Of
Quah ,.
Qualsisia
QualsiyogUa
(f.)
,
Some.
Genders.
both
^
y
as,
many
So
,
as
rFVhaisoei^er,
f
.
.
siano
SI
^
QuaUsiTOgUano^^^-^;;^;;
Tale
Tali
Such.
Co tale
Cotali
Such
as.
Altrettale
Altrettali
Such
other.
Invariable.
Each
Ogni
J
Chiunque
Cliicchessia
Chi
che
Cb^cchessia
C
"^
"-
-
-
-\
Whoever
y^Any person
J
S What
1
J
y
TVhosoever
"*
Cbecche
every.
lAny
,
whatever.
rywhal soever
thing whatever.
eve
Qualunque
Whatever.
Quantunque
Whatsoever.
y
PRONOUNS.
like
is used
Tutio
31.
in tbe
all
Tulti
the
article,
of a^et^
,
body
tutli; he said
a
It is used
a.
pronoun
a
cosi; all think
pensano
diceva
Lo
as
sense
9
101
the
to
so
the
of
sense
itself,
:
thus.
all.
and
suhstantirelj,with
in
by
without
whole
every
j
thing:
il tutto;
So
I know
the
Iddioconoice
tutto;
Farb
di
per
I will
do
Tutti
All
quel
noi
adjective with
thing.
personal
plural :
vol
tuttiy
tutti, tutti
all of you,
the
In
erery
satisfyyou.
to
an
noi
or
knows
compiacervi;
of us,
singular
it is
loro;
all of them.
joined with
cid
che,
che:
Ditcmi
Tell
all that
me
quel
All that
Ecco
he
tutto
This
aid che
tutto
Tutto
5.
as
in the
pronouns
God
thing
eyerj
It is used
3.
4"
tutto
whole.
che
Tutto
is
quel
che
like
All the
lo studio
study
done.
approved
so
;
;
of.
;
I hnow.
a//,
substantives, having
Tutto
have
^ approvato
does
y
fatto
you
fa
is all that
avete
e
and
is used
the
tutte
article
adjectiyelywith
placed after it:
le opere;
all the
works.
PRONOUNS.
102
article
6. The
after
tuttOy
in the
howeyer
well
as
the
employed
so
entire
willi
^
.*
j
giorno
Tutto
a//, when
as
of the whole
sense
dispensed
be
may
all
notte;
tutta
e
and
day
all
night.
In
Corfu
tutto
and
all Corfu,
In
Era
f
agreeing
She
all
was
like all, is used
Tutto
with
entirely,
te,
Malta
tutta
it in
with
participle
a
gender
all alone.
solo; he
was
Ella
era
tutta
pallida
;
He
is all
8.
Tutto
to
of the
one
Tutti
one
she
ella
all
quant
persons
i
tutto
Here
is every
10.
quanto
things in question:
or
perished.
ne
morsel
posseggo
I possess
;
of it.
expletively
after
all three.
tre;
T'li^^o is
phrases:
lieta;
o
conjunction c is put
tutti, coupled with a numeral:
e
pale.
joyful.
The
Tutti
tutta
all
perirono;
of them
Ecco
9.
was
joined with it by way of
exception, every
signifyall without
quant
Every
and
sad,
has
emphasis,
ed
she
qui^
adjective,
or
number:
tutto
mestOy
of
sense
and
era
i tutto
joy.
in the
Egli
Egli
;
in all Malta.
gioja ;
tutta
7.
in
e
employed
as,
in
a
variety of
bial
adver-
lo3
PRONOUNS.
Al
del
tuUOj
totally:per
tutto;
tut
to;
erery
where.
CiascunOj each, every one, is
ciaschedunOy without
any other
32.
from
them.
to
persons
only ;
regina
licenzib
La
The
dismissed
queen
Comandb
che
;
n'andasse
se
each
that
fers
re-
one.
every
ciascuno
commanded
He
ciascheduno
distinction
itself it
employed hy
When
between
ahhreviated
a
should
go
casa.
away
home.
It is
applied adjectivelyboth
to
persons
and
things:
soldato; each
Ciaschedun
Ciascheduna
Ciascun
23.
each
donna;
Ciaicuna
prato
Ogni
is
only: Ogni
day.
every
each
;
lady.
each
cosa;
soldier.
thing.
meadow.
applied properly
uotno;
man.
every
the
to
Ogni
singular
giorno;
to admit
followingexpressions it seems
exceptions in being applied to the plural; but
In the
of
spazio di,
space
of
is to
be
understood:
,
day ; ogni due giorni.
Every third day ; ogni tre giorni.
Every fortnight;ogni quindici giorni*
Every
other
^4* Ognuno
apply
to
,
persons,
chiunque y
and
are
chi
ckicchessia
y
used
chc,
substantively:
I04
PRONOUI^S.
Every ]"odj praises him;
I hare
one
is
at o
di
every
pari
Ho
Whoever
vol
mi
Whoever
he
W^hoevcr
you
he
to
any
sivoglia or
;
chiunque egli sia.
;
che
voi
si ate.
whatever
(jualsisiaor
things; they
suhstanti
a
chi
person
qualvogliasi
and
;
;
chicchessia.
a
Qualunquey
Any
sorelle^ed
vostre
speak
he
may
male
Nonfate
with
^
pub parlare.
may
harm
persons
U
tulle
a
may
vide
Chiunque
i5.
and
sisters
jour
pleased ;
nie
saw
no
all
to
you
^ contcnta.
ognuna
Do
of
spoken
lo loda,
ognuno
ve
qualsiasiy qual^
ai'e
properly
more
than
hoth
applied
are
^
alone
used
to
pled
cou-
:
whatever;
person
Qualsisia
persona
^
qualurufue
qualsivoglia persona.
feel
Whatever
pain you
persona
is merited
^
by
or
your
imprudence.
voi provate
Qualunque pena
vostra
imprudenza;
26.
Checchessiaj checcki^
without
a
,
Checchi
sifaccia
chessia
il
ht
Whatever
say,
substantive
and
suo
may
e
are
e
doi^uta
alia
by
selves
them-
used
:
si dica
checchS
di segno
do,
whatsoever
e
chisc-
,
,
nol
y
and
euro;
whatever
be his
design^I
he
cai'C
may
not.
PRONOUNS
5
I O
much
Quantunque is an indeclinable
pronoun
used by the early writers
to
signify^Aa-
tevtr^
whatioes^tr^ how
27.
Tra
whatever
Quantunque
many:
leggiadre donne;
quantunque
Amongst
how
much^
y
graceful ladies.
pub
how
naiura;
much
nature
can.
This
pronominal
obsolete
and
of quantunque
use
it is
has
me
beco-
employed only
conjunction signifyinghowei^erf although,
;
now
as
a
9
Tale
28.
J
diridual
itself
by
signifies
one^
individuals
or
known
or
,
Tal
che
rite
some^
unknown.
dopo picciol tempo pi anse
One
laughed who after a
Tale
venne
injigura del
del re d* Inghilterra ;
little time
One
the
in the
came
one
Tali
Some
in that
of the
refused
Tale
reference
Talefu
is used
to
some
mia
Francia^
king
tale
of France
^
accontentirono
a
;
relative pronoun
preceding statement
cruda
wept.
consented.
some
as
di
;
king of England.
rifiutaronOftali
9
2.
figureof
re
in-
an
sorte;
such
was
^
having
:
my
cruel
lot.
3.
It is often
joined with another
proqoun,
and
iaid:
tigai"esparticular same^
or
said persons.
Quelle tali penone
; those
,
1
06
PRONOUNS.
tali
Cotesti
Such
folks
s* immaginano
those
as
imagine.
in
yocabolo
Otie
quel
Ricevere
;
quclla
tale
n-
gnificazione ;
To
particular word
such
receiTe
such
in
ticular
par-
signification.
4- It
like the
phrases
eke
Scrive
He
writes
5.
Tale
Tale
tal
un
that
,
or
of
ho
Oggi
To-day
Disse^
a
as
to
It is used
sono
brought.
me.
in
mary
sum-
tution
in substi-
do
tali eose^
e
such
and
such
things.
tale, guardate:
7.
tale
tali
to
said; Mistress
A
see
particular thing, or
fare
He
being always
:
:
Madonna
dolorCy
now
you
a
I haye
such
sort
any
adjectiyely,like iuch^
name
da
doctor.
vedete;
mi
a
is used
allusion
in
y
tity
coming together^ signifyidenof
Precisely such
Tale
certain
term
medice;
certain
a
quale
quale
English
following:
resemblance
or
6.
the
to
answers
such
a
alone, having
as
casOy
take
one,
case;
a
heed.
substantive
affanno,
affliction; something
derstood,
un-
tion;
tribula-
disastrous
meant:
giunto;
to
such
(plight) I
am
I
Od
PRONOUNS.
Insuliai^a
insulted
He
as
sono
sono
miseri
many
how
2.
(females) as
many
feliciJ
Quanii
How
venivano;
quante
a
in
ultima
who
in
in old
adjectivelywith
quanti
!
died
miserable
are
It is used
infasce!
vecchiezza
happy
are
many
morti
came.
infancy!
age !
substantives
of
kind:
any
Quante
quantifiumi
How
3.
how
employed by
It is
having
the
Quanta
So long
and
la vita
as
mi
durerd
^
the
singular,
time,
tood:
unders-
last.
employed in like manner
d\j days, understood, ad
with
much
9
;
Quanta vi piace; as long as
Quanta ^ chc siete qua ?
How
long is it that you are
4* It
how
waters
tempo
life shall
my
!
itself in
substantiye
mare^
separate us!
riyers
many
9
quanta
acqucj
ci separano
mountains
many
sea
ed
montagne
you
please.
here ?
in the
is
plural,
sometimes
anni,
years:
A
quanti
What
siamo
day
33. Tanta
tively:as,
of the
is
del
mese?
month
employed
is it ?
for
the most
part
adjec-
PRONOUNS.
Tanto
It
used
18
Vi
to
There
make
persons
che
were
so
09
iuperbo;
will
tanti
erano
d
proud.
me
occasionallyhy
referring
9
far
honor
So much
1.
mi
onor
1
itself in
the
ral
plu-
:
non
posso
that
many
nominarli
I cannot
tutli
;
them
name
all.
3. It is used
kind
any
substantiyelyto
4* Both
quanta
in
^
in
a
dard
mi
shall
If heaven
5.
give me
and
tanto
so
are
i^ita;
much
of life.
employed
bially
adver-
varietyof significations.
The
them
as
is shown
correlatives
in
J\i.
page
16.
34* Alquanto^
and
di
tanto
employment of
forming a comparison ^
art.
of
extent
:
il cielo
Se
denote
the
article
some,
is used
9
compounded
by
itself in
of
quanio
reference
to
persons:
Ne
uccisero
alcjuanti; they
slew
of
some
them.
Di
alquante dirb;
of
some
(females)I
will
say.
2.
It is
applied adjectivelyto things as
persops
well
:
Dopo alquanto spazio; after
some
space.
as
PRONOUNS.
no
industry of
The
3. It is used
quantity
Con
portion
A
A.
from
many
much
and
FirenzCj
di
e
Florence,
from
went
and
etd;
aitrettanta
corresponding
adverbially
to
age.
signify
welly
as
as
.*
altrettanto;
Altrifaranno
Others
36.
used
a
Bologna.
di
donna
used
signify
altro
of
di
andarono
knights
is
It
him.
much:
as
hundred
of
riconfortb;
refreshed
compounded
altrettanti;
lady
il
adverbially to
Bologna
Una
he
manyj
cavalieri
as
small
a
somewhat.
as
signifies
Cento
of
sense
vino
wine
is used
AltrettantOy
tanto,
singular^having
in the
buon
good
some
while,
35.
the
:
di
alquanto
4. Alquanto
littlt
men.
understood,
or
With
some
adjectivelyin
substantive
a
alquanti uomini;
di
industria
L*
do
will
another
CotantOy
as
a
pronominal
of greater
fu
Cotanla
Such
Cotanto
was
just the
just as much,
force
la
his
is also
sua
of
compound
same.
tanto,
adjective, having
than
its
primitive:
che
ajfflizione
affliction
thing
some-
that
he
morl;
ne
died
of it.
employed adverbially.
is
PRONOUNS.
1 1
I
REMARKS.
Several
ried
use
tewed
y
belong
to
seem
languages
being employed
9
tliat,
80
all
in
pronouns
under
which
is
;
Besides
them
the
foregoing
Distributive
of
designate parts
show
that
Degli
qual
ro;
arditOy
uomini
Of
buono^
e
tal
^
there
men
others
some
that
,
used
to
distributire
a
which
tence,
sen-
to
serre
may
applicable
that
to
"
i avventurato
i
chi
^
mise^
si
tutto
the
are
good,
are
to
love
some
questi
part
and
bad;
^
tutto
hate
complaining.
the
;
tunate;
unfor-
several
this
too
da-
another
weeps
one
,
ever
di
una
lagna;*^
fortunate
timid;
troppo
e
piange^
uno
odia:
altri
tal
malvagio;
timido;
troppo
t/uegli di
laughs ;
of
tion
denomina-
when
are
qual
ama^
part
ring,
chi
the
,
English:
in
nouns.
pro-
j
ride; altri
pagOf
in
portions
than
in
divisions
general
pronouns
in Italian
use
larly
particu-
^
following
more
tLey
^
abundant
so
Partitive
or
or
the
in
as
and
distinguished by
are
some
9
aspects
classes
ya-
relations;
,
Italian
in
different
different
to
different
in
of
are
^
is
ever
tented
con-
113
XIX.
LESSON
VERB.
verb
A
1.
is
elistingyacting
Vivere^
Esser
part of speech which
a
,
live; recare^
to
Verbs
and
Passive
Active
includes
The
of three
called
The
V allievo
ammonisce
^
active, expressing the
passive
sufferingof
the
that
agent
upon
;
but
the
a
is the
preposition :
agent
aS;
agent
is the
of the
the
as,
the
is the
is put
into
minative
no-
verb
action.
receiving
also
the
and
object and
object that
an
object becomes
the
verb:
admonishes,
expresses
and
and
tion.
ac-
pupil.
action, and
some
acts,
verb, and
this
by
verb
the
nature
the
allievo;
pupil ,
the
,
accusative:
of the
V
master,
y
nominative,
accusative
admonishes
the
maestro
A
termed
object of
an
the
ammonisce
master
;
is called
the
// maestro
4*
kinds;
something acted,
expresses
agent and
an
agent
objectis
//
VERBS.
Neuter.
active
verb
A
which
OF
,
J
3.
bring;
to
KINDS
therefore
are
as,
brought.
be
to
recatOy
DIFFERENT
2.
action:
sustaining an
or
signifies
infers
is
nominative
the
or
an
acted
of
ablative,
pupil is admoniiBhed
The
Thas
actiye is turned
an
object of
tbe
making
instead
natiTe
Tcrb
5. A
which
the
agent:
aS|
of the
neuter
to
such
placed
but
which
from
monish
y
do
verb
di"rence
the
other:
thing J to
sleepis a neuter
person
7. In
take the
all
Vivere
Ire
un
passes
in the
word
over
una
the
to
ter
neu-
former
an
from
the
latter there
is not
of action.
Every
person
for instance
thing
or
verb^
nor
,
a
to
languages;
the
doy
to
a
verb:
to
its
and
to
can
to
say
whereas
,
cannot
we
ad"
say
to
to
sleep a thing.
however
,
of
noun
verbs
neuter
corresponding
as,
vitafolice;to
yiaggio lungo;
we
person;
because
yet
of
^
as
^
because
verbs
admonish
accusative
meaning with
in
object;
does not admit
of either ; by
it is easy to distinguishthe one
active
are
a
sleepa
in the
after it in the accusative
neater
a
the
being
transitive;and
passing over
or
admits
active rerb
be
or
^
of
is confined
because
;
object and
transfer
a
the nomi-
as
state
a
called
are
transferred
an
by
sleep.
to
,
is
action
passiveverb
a
stand
the verb
intransitive
verbs
into
expresses
verbs
tlie master.
agent.
subjectof
6. Actiye
maestro;
by
action
Dormire;
agent
dal
i ammoniio
L* allievo
3
f 1
YKI115.
to
live
go
a
happy life.
long journey.
a
8
Il4
8.
YVMMS.
the
Wben
agent
Qorotnattye
or
the
to
Terb
in a moral
objectof action whether
of the pronoun
accnsatiye
an
or
physicalsense
is attached
to
corresponding to the nominatire
is also the
y
y
the
yerb, which
is then
called
reflected
a
yerb:
as^
lo
mi
pent
Catone
Both
si
repent mjself.
uccise; Cato
and
actiye
I
o;
9.
their
are
form
than
inflected
other
any
inoods, tenses,
of
signifydifferent
to
and
numbers
VERB.
part of speech , being
as
so
A
greater yariations
subject to
modlBed
or
OF
PARTS
Verbs
reflected.
y^rbs beoome
neuter
DIFFERENT
himself.
slew
^
persons.
MOODS.
The
10.
the
moods
which
yerb, by
different
1 1.
A
verb
has
The
the
its
four
of
is declared
in
the
moods;
serves
to
indicatiye,the
the
indicate
infinitiye.
its
certainly:
Aeco,
a
modiflcations
meaning
subjunctiye,and
indicatiye
ning directlyand
being
different
manners.
imperative,
12.
are
I
bring;
positivedeclaration, is
in this mood.
mear
ii6
YERBa
Imperfect.
Reca\^ay I
past
a
Preterite.
Reeaiy
to
Future.
act
be
past and
Recherd,
I will
tention
Condi
I
bringing;
represents
during its performance.
brought; denotes the act
was
of
bring; signifies
an
acting at
signifiesthe
intent
have
Present,
brought
;
time
f
A^^eva
or
recato,
an
act
antecedent
to
by
a
of the
Ebbi
Preterite.
the
period
I had
act
an
at
or
an
I
cently
re-
minate
indeter-
unfinished.
brought;
other
some
preterite,or
at
a
presses
ex-
time
time
the
pressed
expound
com-
present.
recato
more
fied
speci-
a
ffo recato,
completed
^
but
in
expresses
completed,
Imperfect.
lity
practicabi-
or
TENSES.
the
of
bring;
(i)
COMPOUND
Compound
in-
time.
could
or
acting hereafter
case,
20.
future
a
I would
TIONAL./iccAcrei,
of
finished.
same
I had
as
notes
brought; dethe imperfect,
as
definitely
to
time.
(x) According to rigid grammarians, this tense, recherei, belongs
that
properlyto the subjunctiveor conditional mood; but the facility
of the indicative,
to the future
is given to the learner by placing it oezt
to
which
to
it has
so
great
depart from
an
aflSnityhas
,
induced
grammatical rigour in that
many
modem
particijar.
chers
tea-
VERBS.
(i) Avrb
FuTURS.
I shall
recatOj
denotes
ght;
future
a
another
to
hare
after
Avrei
brou*
action
be
to
it.
I should
recaio
could
,
brought; signiGesthe
possibilitjof
done
cedent
ante-
action
,
haye
7
^
performed
Conditional.
I 1
time
some
in
ago
or
been
haying
act
an
intent
specified
a
ease*
The
I.
a
fewer
other
tenses
compound
compound.
;
Each
a2.
the
:
the
tense;
donna
has
imperatiye
subjunctiye,two
the
infinitiye
has
tense
cant
a
only
simple
one
,
the
^
in
require
two
single and
one
responding
plural,cor-
nouns
:
sings; is
woman
ple
sim-
one
and
singular and
a
numbers
those
to
La
moods, by their nature,
in
the
singular number.
donne
Le
the
cantano
,
is in the
sing;
Women
plural number.
a3. Each
number
corresponding
yerned
in
of
tenie
it
by
the
the
expressed or
"i) Tlus
Future,
each
those
called
pronoun,
either
to
in
lome
a
tense
of
has
three
and
pronouns,
three
by
nominatiye
persons,
some
to
is gonoun
the
or
yerb,
understood:
gnnmariaDi
called the
Preterite
of the
ii8
VERBS.
Plural.
Singular.
lo
f
Pers.
First
11
Nouns
singest.
understood
only
which
gerund, (i)
(2) as
tied,
with
pie present
they
,
as
performs
(2) Although
often
,
ple,
partici-
hoth
are
meaning
quaiiyerbs
by
hand
performs \he
office of
participle
present
the
in
of
the Latin
nature
become
participle
present
form
of that
has
not
snbtlantiTes
entirely
been
or
has been
equaUy
employed as both): for instance, cafftoAle,doesnot
participle
tinging $ but th" substantive singer g ammnU,
the
for the
hut
the substantive
^
fore been
useless
participleloving
thought right not
and
,
sake
erroneous
of
a
addition
yery few
general disuse.
to
burden
of
a
this Grammar
lover.
have
expreu
does not
It has
with
participlepresent
exceptionswhich
preserved
so| for
adjectives,
(many
are
express
partici'
English
gerund.
form
the
in it have
words
of them
its
,
of
son
per-
connected.
are
,
the
in Itidian
the
on
or
modifications, the
their
in
other
the
ihrid
in the
which
in Italian somelimes
that
expressed
singing; and
sung;
y
gerund
( x) The
the
cantando,
^^
cantata
which
other
two
determined
or
persons
impersonal yerbs.
has
A. yerb
26.
the
in
second
pronouns
employed
are
called
are
sing.
theirs.
for
i5. Verbs
cantano.
nominatiyes
first and
person
must
ate
sing.
They
as
enly : the
necessarily haye
third
cant
Ellcno
a,
stand
can
sing,
Yuo
{Ella
She sings,
24*
We
y
cant
Third,
cantiamo
Voi
caniij
\ Thou
,
Not
J
sing,
Tu
\
Second
canto
to
a
there-
pedantic,
every
verb
survived
accidentally
VERBS*
17. The
latter
tbe
but
different
rariatioii la its form;
no
varies
its termination
and
genders like
numbers
partakes of
and
suffers
former
tbe
1[)
1
of
nature
to
adjective^
an
otber
in
one
express
re-:
spects.
SCantatOfrxuksc.
SSnff
S
\%\^^\
Cantati
masc"
^
fem.
CONJUGATIOfiJS.
ad.
language^ verbs
In most
termed
classes
divided
are
conjugations
wbicb
difference
by
guished
distin-
are
"
,
of termination
into
in tbe
nitive
infi-
mood.
Tbe
ItaUon
Tbe
29.
three
firsfj
second
"
the
from
3i.
are
of
verb
a
and
called
bear.
variations
are
of its infinitive which
9
be its root
parts of
effected
believe,
to
j
tbe
by
tbe
esserey
to
is
primitive form.
or
is to inflect it
moods, tenses, numbers,
Some
have,
which
inflexions
love,
to
,
credere
ere;
\
conjugatea verb,
its several
are
; amare
Lire;sentire, to
to
To"
32.
in
tennination
considered
TCrb
ending
All the
30.
a"njugations;
Tare
J
third
to
bas
and
trough
persons.
conjugation of
aid of two
others,
be, which
for
auxiliaryverbs
they are employed are
;
and
the
called
every
avert
that
tenses
j
son
rea-
in
compound
i'^O
VERBS.
in
tenses,
wbicli
participleof
the
These
33.
with
the
auxiliaries,therefore, entering
formation
the
they are associated
verb
conjugated.
of
all
verbs,
the
are
first to
into
be
learnt.
34*
The
greater number
uniformly, according
sereral
those
to
conjugations, are
that
deyiate
in
in their
regular rerbs;
the
from
way
cted
infle-
being
model
one
called
any
called
established,are
yerbs
of
model
irregular yerbs.
xions
following tables exhibit all the infleof the
seyeral
.conjugationsboth of the
ficulty
regular and irregular yerbs, by which eyery difThe
35*
on
this hiead
AFERE,
to
INFINITIVE
f
Gerund,
Compound
of the ,
have,
MOOD.
Present
Participle
remoyed.
will be
to
Ayendo,
hailing.
Avuto
had.
,
,
JPresent
jGerund,
jkyere
avuto,
Avendo
INDICATIVE
avuto,
MOOD.
Simple Tense,^^Present.
Singular.
/ have.
lo ho
,
Tu
thpu
hai
,
kai^e.
Ayere,
hast.
to
haye,had.
having had*
121
YBRBS*
^ !*-
^l
\^'
Ella
Plaral.
Noi
abbiamO;
Voi ayete,
\^^^^y
EUeno
have,
4V6
Compound
you
hai^e,
they
ha\^e.
^*^P
Tense
resent.
Siogolar.
lo bo
Tu
/ have
aruto
hai
thou
aTuto
Egli ba
had.
9
had.
hast
y
he
avutOi
had.
has
Plural.
Noi abbiamo
Vol
ayete
EgUno
amtOy
avato,
hanno
aruto
have
we
had.
have
you
had.
have
they
,
had.
Simple Tense.^-^Imperfect.
Singular.
lo
or
ayeya
Tu
I had.
(1)
thou
ayeyiy
Egli ayeya
(I) Though
ia
ayeyo^
a
tad
he
hadst.
had.
j
the
firit person
in 0, tbt tMpunalion
siDgnlarof
in
a
this
if considered
termioatci
teaso
to
be
both
preferable.
1^2
ySRBS.
Plaral.
Noi
Voi
avevate,
Eglino
had*,
we
arevamo,
had,
you
had.
they
ayevano;
Compound
Tense.'^Imperfece.
Singular.
lo
Ta
I had
avuto,
ayeva
ayeyi
thou
ayuto,
"gli ayeya
had,
he
ayuto,
hadst
had
had.
had.
Floral.
Noi
ayeyamo
Voi
ayeyate
Eglino
ayato,
ayuto^
you
Simple
Tense.
had.
had
they
ayuto,
ayeyano
had
we
had,
had
had.
^^Preterite,
Singular.
/ had.
lo ebbi
9
Tu
thou
ayesti,
Egliebbe,
hadst.
he had,
Plaral.
Noi
Voi
ayemmo
ayeste
Eglino
we
,
had.
you
,
ebbero
y
they
had,
had^
I2l4
YEHBS.
Plural.
Noi
ayremo
Voi
arrete
Eglino
aruto^
arutoy
ayuto^
ayranno
Simple
"-Conditional.
Tense*
Singular.
"
!""""""
Tu
f / should^ could,
}
OT
might hai"e.
.
would,
ayresti,
"gli ayrebbcy
Pl^ral.
Noi
Voi
ayremmo
,
ayreste
Eglino
,
ayrebbero
,
Tensci^-^Conditional,
Compound
SingaUr,
T
lo
Tu
S I ^^ould.
\
.
arm
aruto
ayresti
Egli ayrebbe
,
^
ayato;
ayuto^
Plural.
Noi
ayremmo
Voi
ayreste
ayato,
ayuto
Eglino ayrebbero
,
ayuto
^
^
could
.^^;
^^^^
y
would,
^^
itkS
VERBS.
MOOD.
IMPSIUTIVE
SiDgulax.
Abbi
hai^e
ttt.
thou.
let him
have^
let htr
have.
Plural.
AbbiaxQO
Abblate
let
noi,
have
roi^
ino,
\ ^.P/
Elleno,
Abbiano
has^e,
us
ye
y
let them
SUBJUNCTIVE
ox
you.
have*
MOOD.
Tente^^^Present
Simple
SingoUnr.
Cbe
io abbia,
Che
tu
that
abbi^ or abbia^ (i) that
Ch'egli abbia,
that
I may
have,
thou
he
have.
mayst
have.
may
Plural.
Che
noi
abbiamo;
that
Che
Toi
abbiate,
that
you
that
they
Ch'eglino abbiano
,
Tense^f^P
Compound
we
have,
may
have,
may
may
have.
resent.
Singular.
Che
io abbia
that
aruto
y
Che
tu
abbi
ayuto^
Ch'egliabbia
(i) Abbi
is
more
avuto^
elegant.
I may
have
had.
1
1
26
VERBS.
Plaral.
Che
noi abbiamo
Che
yoi ahbiate
ayuto,
ayuto
Ch'eglino ahbiano
Simple
,
ayuto,
Tense.
Imperfect,
"
SinguUr.
rthat
Che
10
Che
tu
ayessi
"
,
ayessi
I had,
mighty could
{^shouldhav^e.
that
I
y
would.
9
Ch'egliayesse.
Plaral.
ayessimo^
Che
noi
Che
yoi ayeste,
Ch'eglino ayessero.
Imperfect,
Tense."
Compound
Singular.
rthat
Che
10
Che
tu
ayessi
ayessi
ayuto
,
k
ayuto,
Plaral.
Che
noi ayessi
Che
yoi ayeste
mo
Ch'eglino ayessero
had.
might,could
{^should have had.
that
ayuto,
Ch'egli ayesse
I had
ayuto,
ayuto,
ayuto,
I
j
would,
*
VERBS.
137
ESSEREytobe.
MOOD.
INFINITIVE
Present,
Essere.
Gerund
Essendo.
J
Participle
State.
Compound i Present^ Essere
ofthe
IGerund, Essendo
INDICATIVE
Simple
(1)
f
itato^
to
stato^
have
having
been,
been.
MOOD.
-^Present.
Tense.
Siogalar.
lo 8ono,
lam.
Tu
thou
seiy
he
Egli i,
art.
is.
Plural.
I9oi siamo
we
j
Voi
siete
are.
are.
you
,
Eglino sono^
they
Compound
Tense.
are.
Present,
"
Sinfjular.
lo
Tu
/ have
stato
gone
sei stato,
Egli ^
\i)
Stato
(a man)
Noi
stato
sono
(women)
been.
,
thou
he
hast
has
been.
;
in
agrees
lo
stato
,
siamo
gender
and
(a woman)
state.
number
sono
stata
been.
with
t
Noi
tlie nominaliirei
(men)
siamo
fo
"t"ti j
Compound
Tense.'-Imperfect,
Singular.
lo
Tu
I had
stato,
era
eri stato,
Egli
thou
stato
era
been,
he
,
hadst
had
been,
been.
Plural.
Noi
eravamo
stati
,
Voi
erayate
Eglino
erano
stati,
stati,
we
had
you
(hey
had
had
been,
been,
been.
1^9
VEABa*
Simple
Tense
.-^Preterite.
Sinjpilar.
lo
Tu
fuiy
thou
fosti
wast,
y
he
Eglifu,
was.
PloraL
Noi
fummo
wc
y
Voi foste
were,
you
,
Eglino furonoy
were,
they:were.
Tense, *^Preierite.
Compound
Singular.
lofui stato^
Tu
/ had
fosti stato
Eglifu
thou
hadst
j
he
stato
been,
had
been,
been.
9
Plaral.
Noi fammo
Voi
stati,
foste
we
stati
you
j
Eglinofurono
they
static
Simple
had
Tense.
been,
had
been,
been.
had
-^Future.
Singalar.
lo
I shall
saro
,
Tu
or
will
be.
sarai
,
Eglisarii;
9
i3o
ysiUBs.
Plural.
Noi
saremoy
Voi
sarete^
Eglino
saraimo;
Tense^^^Future.
Compound
Siogular.
lo
Ta
/ ihall
statoy
flaro
or
haye been,
will
sarai stato^
Egli sari s%a\o,
Plural.
Noi
saremo
Voi
sarete
Eglino
stati,
stati,
stati,
saranno
Simple
Tense.
^^Conditional.
Singularr
I
losam,
Ta
could
J I should
1 might be.
,
J
saresti
,
Egli sarebbe^
Plural.
Noi
saremmo
Voi
sareste^
,
Eglino sarebbero;
,
would
,
or
1
3a
YEKBS.
Plural.
Che
noi
that
siamo
we
,
Che voi siate,
that
you
Ch'eglinosiano^or sieno,
that
they
Compound
Tense.
be.
may
may
be.
be.
may
--^Present.
Singular.
io sia stato
Che
Che
tu
That
,
sii stato
I may
ha^e
been}
^
Ch'egli sia stato,
Plaral.
Che
Che
noi
voi
siamo
stati,
siate stati
,
Ch'
eglino siano, ort
sieno
\
stati,
Simple
Tense.
^Imperfect.
Singular.
Che
Che
10
tu
{^^^^
fossi
,
i
^
could,
'^^''^
would
Plaral.
Che
Ch'
noi fossimo
Toi
^ should
f
or
might
be.
"
,
1
i
fossi,
Ch'egli fosse,
Che
'^^^
"
,
foste,
eglinofossero,
f
1
VERBS.
Compound
1
Tense.
33
^Imperfect.
Singular.
I had
rthat
Che
io fossi stato^
should
"
tu
could
^
Lmight
Che
been; that
j
have
I
would,
or
been.
fossi stato
,
Ch'eglifosse
stato
^
Plural.
Che
noi
fossimo
Che
Yoi
foste
Ch'
stati,
static
eglino fossero
stati.
EXPLANATIONS
Relating
I.
that
the
The
the
to
the
letter
tense
R
andavij
andavano.
regular ;
:
it is
placed
indicative
be
mood
so
and
denotes
R
like
the
at
andare,
formed
will show
andai^a,
of
F'erbs.
is formed
for instance^ the
ijing that tense to
the regular inflexions
va,
of Irregular
means
where
regular yerhs
of the
Tables
perfect
im-
signl-
table
the
of
,
it to
andavamo,
be
anda-
andas^ate^
1
34
VERBS*
The
2.
solere
letter
has
in
third
is
use
yerh
of
these
with
the
that
tense
from
the
third
the
infinitive:
cendeste
other
only
it
to
as
in
is
given, all
the
preterite of
lar,
singu-
numbers
three
med
forof
persons
of inflexion
in accendere
y*^^
accendemmo
y
,
ac-
from
primitives
follow
their
restare
these
from
applies
than
more
all the
persons
one
ved
derietc.
tables.
verbs
which
dijSfer from
but
not
those
primitives:for instance, rianare
,
general principlesof
mentioned;
are
This
bes^iyetc. bcOy beiy
in the
compound
mode.
is
lar
singu-
derived
are
there
have
y
first person
persons
when
is noted
4. The
and
tense.
first person
the
regular
both, bevo
deviation
inflexion
dare
the
bevOj beoy which
Any
which
to
formation
from
their
where
tenses,
according
each
algercj
accesero.
,
In
the
other
accese
,
y
of
in that
of both
example
accendesti
Accesi
the
instance
regular manner
the
follow
the
,
the
persons
it; while
from
for
have
verhs
ked.
mar-
,
persons
irregular in
indicative
the
other
no
so
is defectiye
indicative
the
singular of
for instance,
tenses
tense
a
specified; as,
having
3. Most
in several
part of
any
person
that
defectiye:
means
inflexions
no
When
part
0
noticed
as
differingfrom
1
TBRBS.
35
contraffarej disfare,
rifarcy being conjugated like Jare throughout,
and
andare
noticed.
not
are
considerable
number
of their
terminations
some
poetry,
in
ita-
Lucere,
caggio,
6. A
to
distinguishedby being printed
are
as
confined
inflexions
receiyed
haying
Ucs,
being wholly poeticaliand
yerbs
5. Some
these
but
stare;
inflected
in
of
yerbs
and
infinitiye,
haye
in
are
two
quence
conse-
conjugations:for
two
stance
in-
"
Applaudercj
The
former
is
applaudire^
iico)in
the
third,
Adempiere
compire^
of
y
the
in which
it is most
adempircy
and
fulfil; compter
to
the
take
of the
cond
se-
used.
third
Cj
xions
infle-
regular
the
conjugation,from
second
termination,
in the
regularly inflected (in
is
complete;
to
applaud:
defectiye
irregular and
conjugation; but
to
(inisco)from
one
the
other.
"
Amongst
third
the
yerbs
conjugation,it
tire has
chuse,
its inflexions
elect
J
or
like sentircp when
share
taking
is to
be
in isco
both
by lot;
used in
a
that
obseryed
when
it
and
of
forms
the
sor^
to
signifies
is
inflected
military sense
:
1
36
/
VKRB8.
nemici
The
The
conjugations
according
nitiye
to
of
different
io
in
termination
of
some
isco
in
"uniting.
third
inflexion
of
infi-
their
of
these
pre-
and
modes
combinations
us.
in
second
the
different
assume
against
out
those
verbs
irregular
7.
nois
inflexions
and
conyersation"
in
sally
cong1i:^ts
to
di
contra
frecp"ently
enemy
TossirCj
Tail
souenie
soriono
haying
several
,
verbs
each
belonging
them
to
inflected
difibrentlf
from
other.
A
here
of
view
the
with
given
of
whole
a
these
combinations
verb
corresponding
is
of
,
inflexion;
variety
of
k)wing
Tables*
by
way
of
index
to
the
every
fol-
i38
VttBS.
IRREGULAR
OF
TERMINATIONS
VERBS.
COKJUGATIOV
SBCOSD
GOHTIHUSD.
chieclere
^ascondere
^
ledere
fiedere
tee"
Ondere
see^fondere
^ riedere
lereie
"
"
fierere
.
Iggere
*-
figgere
/'comprimsre
Orgere
dirimere
S esimere
"
Indere
logeie
Ignere
"
Onere
i
I
"
lovere
"
"
Istere
^_^cporre
Iponere
see
Ogliere
Orrere
Bcindere
Oscere
"
.
I
lagnere
stringere
Otere
"
Ovcre
"
distinguere
Uadere
piovere
XJcere
"
Uggere
iiere
Orre
"
arrogere
"
ccogliere
i
Ugnere
Olcere
molcere
"
Olere
Istmggere
TlDgere
TJlgere
"
Umere
"
icolere
dolersi
allndere
see
icorre
i
doyeftt
suggere
(godere'
crodere
potere
rlacere
Udere
Odere
coaoscere
\ rilucere
{ficrivere
vivere
Ivere
correre
snadere
assistere
"
Ogere
porgere
"
I
Tincere
___ccingere
I
mordere
"
Owe
Orre
torcere
"
Ordere
^^redimere
Incere
assorbcKC
"~.
dirigere
lesigere
J
Imere
Orbere
Orcere
(
Igeie
'rispondeK
Ungere
i
Uguere
)
"
ffnlgere
" mdlgere
(rlfdlgere
aMumere
giimgere
solere
Olgere
"
"olere
Uocere
volgere
TJoCere
Tassolvere
I risolvere
Olyere
Qmpere
"
.
I caocere
"
tniiooere
"
"~-
Uovere
TJrgere
I solvere
TJrre
i
Vvolvepe
Ucere
)
roinpere
Bcnotere
"
muovere
"
surgere
addnrre
"
XJtere
"
difcatere
1
VERBS.
TERMINATIONS
OF
THISD
IRREGULAR
39
VERBS.
COHXUGATlOir.
aebeniire
tee
ATYertire
"
idire
gire
ire
olire
"
boUire
"
"
compire
"
aprire
"
morire
"
(
conatmire
Icostruire
udire
^
if
uggire
_^
I
muggire
uicire
"
i4o
nUUEGULAA
*
RiMndaro,
to
again
go
is
,
VERBS
irregular
like
JUandare
andaro.
to
examios,
u
,
,
regular.
(I) JVbfe.
"
The
Terb
is
siaro
also
used
,
habitation.
"
Exp
:
Where
do
you
liTe?
Dove
to
express
staU
yoif
the
place
of
abode
"
,
i4i
OF
t*Bistare,
to
FIRST
THE
stop
,
irregular " like
CONJUGATION
stare.
Hectare,
to
remain
"
regular.
l43
UtREGCLAK
VERBS
Indicative
PreseDt
Mood.
of the
Present.
InfinitiTe.
;
Iraperf.
Preterite.
acoesi
hindie.
lo
Condit.
Fntpre.
"
i"
addossi
.
'
addaresti
addosse
'
addnrrci
addnrro
addoccTa
addacemmo
^
adduceste
aUedge.
to
.
addnssero
ALGBRB
to
1st
ulm.^^"''.
"
1
pers.
sing,alsi
3d pers. sing, tdse
allusi
to
tUbide,
2d
p. sing.
applandesti
"id p. sing.
to
applause
p. plur,
applaudeste
3"f p. plur,
applausero
2d
applaud.
arsi
to
l"um.
3d
ARROGBRB,
to
pers.sing.
arrosi
arrogeva
add.
arrogg
also, its
dipendertt propendere, are regular, like
participle
impeso and impenduto excepted. All other
nation,
as
"
Prtnderg^
tendere,
difendere,
etc.
are
irregular,like
credere;
verbs
aeeendere.
impen^
of this
toau*
1
Ot
THE
43
CONJUGATION.
SECOND
arso
arroto
t Tka
infinitive
mott
thov^h
tennination
ueere,
of their ii^fiexionsare
in
derived
this and
from
it.
other
verbi
,
obi.
ia obaolete, aL
43
1
IRBEGULAE
*
Prtnder^y
dipenderet propendert,
also, its participle
impeso and
nation
,
as
VERBS
tendert,
are
regular, like
impenduto excepted. All
di/endere,
etc.
arc
irregular,like
other
credere
terbt
j
impendtr*
of this tanki-
acctndere,
\
1
*
44
Except
lABEGYJLAR
in the
preteriteand
TERBS
assidersi
participle
,
is not
used; but
sedere.
OP
THE
BKOSO
145
COITJVGATION.
10
i4G
IRREGULAR
VSRBS
In^catiTe
Prefcnt
Mood.
of the
InBnilive.
ioyUid.
chero
cheri
CHERBRKf
to
ash.
chert
3d p.
pint.
cherono
I
"CB
cbiMi
to
ask.
fCOrOKBSf
ciasa
to
gird.
colgo,coglio
cogli
coglie
COCLl
to
i.
cogUeTa
coglianio
gather. cogliete
colgono or
coglioDO
cogiiero
colli
"
or
\vorship.
compreui
compress
"j
conocssi
to
*
t
For
or
cooD"llci
connet.
Richiedere
verbs
has
the
ending
cogrlierei
^
correi
cmtvaoi
to
or
corro
COLhw,
to
.
participleHchieduto
in
tringere,
see
and
richiesto.
stringere.
OF
""
Qme^ttn
if
TBI
SECOND
CONJUGATION.
1
47
i" in
anUqoaled : ewieepirt , wich if regubr VSuJlntn,
n"e.
1
48
IRIUBGULAR
Indicative
Present
*
YCRBS
Stridere
,
to
shriek^
is
regular.
Mood.
OF
THE
SECOND
tiO
CONJUGATION.
Subjuoclive Mood.
ImperatiTe.
Gernocl.
Present.
Particip.
Imperf.
cona-
sciuto
corse
a
cresciuto
cuoca
cooct
cuoca
cnoca
cuoca
cociamo
cociamo
cocela
cociate
coocano
cuocano
coceui
cocendo
cotto
decUo
a
diretto
R
discusto
A
disd'iilo
ID.
i5o
lARKGULAR
VERBS
l52
IRREGULAR
VERBS
"rmAivGsiiE,
*
verhs
Other
ending
in
iggere make
only
issi
hut afftggere^crocifiggere,
pre/iggeremake
participle:
f
**
and
See
Its
uso
genu/lettereand
compounds
in
the
have
in tfat
UUt
preterite,
their participle
in iMfc
in the
riflettere.
only
participle.
the
irregulartermiBaVioi^s^^
'^^ ^
pTCUpla"
OF
SECOND
THE
l53
CONJUGATION.
SulijunrliveMood.
Imporalive.
Prcicnt.
/tra
3d
p.
3d
p.
fera
sing,fera
plu./rroAO
fera
3d p. plur.
ferano
"
"!"
fitto
fiito
fifO
flesto
fuso
B
foodulD
frank)
n
^naflaMo
% Angtrty
lodicaiive.
to
griere, bat
Present
j
and
no
inflnion
is confined
to
except tffi^, 3d
pert.
sio^. of
poetry.
feUow genufleUertt rtflsUerMdijSTen.
II ClrwnjltiUr* and tnjtettert
ibe
l52
IRREGULAR
VERBS
Ifusi
or
B
melL
to
fuudei
I
I
to
fransi
B
mAGHE-
or
break.
FDLGERE,
to
shine.
|] GBinjto
bend
the
knee.
"
Tcrls
other
ending
in iggere make
only isst
in the
prtfiggeremake
participle:hut affiggere,crocifiggere
,
and
rifUttere.
f See genuflettere
""
and
Its
uso
in
the
have
only
participle.
compound*
the
preterite,tuo
their
termifiationsml
irregular
participlein
In Ihe
in tia
is$^
pi"l|pit^
OF
SECOND
THE
i53
CONJUGATION.
Subjunctive Mood.
Iniporative.
Gfruod.
Prcicnt.
Impcrf.
Particip.
',
/era
3d
p.
3d
p.
g'lng.
/era
plu./eroAO
/era
/era
3d
/eruto
plur.
/erano
p.
"^t^mi
fine
fisto
g Angertj
to
ffriere,hat
lodicaiive. Present*!and
no
inflnioo
is confined
II OroenflttUr* and in/UUtn
to
except tfngv, 3d
pert. sio^. of lb"
poetry.
fellow genuJleUerer rifletUn iiibn*
i54
IRREGULAR
VERBS
Indicaltve Mood.
Present
of the
Infinitive
i
Present.
Imperf.
Preterite.
Condit.
Future.
giaccio
giaci
ttiACBBB
giace
9
to
B
giacqui
giacciaroo
giacete
giacciono
toliedown.
'
tnjoy.
ClUGHBBXi
godero
godro
or
goderei or
godrei
giunsi
to
omVe.
to
invade.
I
iavasi
3d p.
to
sing.
lece^
(obsolete)
be
lawful. (itis lawful)
to
offend.
lesi
letsi
to read.
Verbs
follows
"
as
ending
,
in
giungere
un^ere
or
may
transpose tli# g* and
n"
wliea
m
"
giugnerej giunge or giugne, giungi or giugni.
or
aa
i
OF
t JUlucer" if
THK
employedip
SECOND
proie.
CONJUGATION.
1
55
i56
IRREGULiiR
VERBS
Indicative
Present
Mood.
of the
Present.
InBnilive.
| Iroperf.
Preterite.
misi,
to
put.
2d
MOLCERE,
to
U
p.
siog.
"
^^f^.
3^1 p
assuage.
^^^/^g
Future.
Coadit
or
meliei,
linfre-
meski
)qucut.
molceva
^^f^^i
molceva
morsi
Mle.
muovo
mossi
muovi
movesti
I
mosse
muove
motero
: oioTeTa
nioviamo
to
moTerei
movemmo
.
move.
.movele
moveste
.muovono
mossero
ooccro
oocerea
parro
panel
n
R
I
Go
laREGtJLAR
TERBS
OF
THE
SECOND
iGl
CONJUGATION.
11
i6:3
"
Prescindere
IRREGULAR
is
regular;dlscindere
VERBS
,
rescindere
are
irregular.
OF
IiDperaUvtf.
aappi
asppia
aappiaino
sappiaU
sappiaoo
'
acegUa
seegliamo
aceUa,
elieU
acMiieta
acelgaoo
,
acegliaoo
THE
SECOND
CONJUGATION.
G3
1
64
*
X
was
The
maEGVLAR
simple
lenses
wanting,
are
\Tont,/ui solitoj I shall be wont,
yZBBS
aad
supplied by participle
sard tolitOgetc*
at"
ansiliaffy:
OF
SECOfTD
THE
l65
CONJUGATION.
SabjttocUveMood.
ImperatiTC.
Geniod*
Present
Partictp.
Imperf.
"erpa
"er(Ni
"erpa
serpiaaio
3dp, pi, terpano
icrpiamo
amrpmao
foglia
"oglia
toglia
toglbmo
SOI
lito
logliate
M^liano
,^,m^^mmtmmmmm^tmmm^"mm*m
sdttto
"^iMi"i"aH"Mi
speoga,//Mf/r"
tptfoga
,
spegna
spenga,
sp^niamo
"p"gaeie
"peogaoo
jp"y"",
poeC.
sp^niamo
tpegniale
,
sprgnano
,
poet.
fpenganof
"r
fp"gnflDO
K
stret
%i..
lu
iG4
IRREGULAR
VERBS;'
''
Indictt?
PreseDt
J^oo^-
of the
to
Inperf.
Present.
InBnitiTe.
creep.
serpo
serpeva
terpi
serpevi
serpe
seqMTa
Coadit.
Future.
^ente.
"S1
3p p. pL
serpono
serr
fveUi
\ftvellesti
sojiio
tyelse
SUoIi
.1
"uole,
sogliamr
be wont.
to
sof
/''*
/emr
.'^/*r
"T";iM"
svellero
svellerri
Iprro
lenrct
sTcUeramo
""ellcste
iveUero
so
/
ro
foo
V
suast
v^^^f
sursi
leoDi
O
I
hill
torsi
*
dtsvetleret disverrty divegherCt diperrep
Disvegfierie
f
convelUre
U
is
makes
regular
.
tbc
fultow
convelicij the participleconyulsoj
preterite
"
t%"dUre:
in olber part"
i66
*
YEKBS
Disvegfiere, disvef/ere, disverre, divegHere^ diverre^
convel/ere
it is
lUUSfitLAA
makes
rc(||uUr.
the
conrellcij the
preterite
follow
st"e/lere.'
convui*oj in other
participle,
parts
OF
SSCOMO
THS
167
CQMJUOATION.
Hood.
SubjoDdiTf
Geraod*
Imperative.
Partidp.
Jmparf.
Pcweol.
struUo
"
sTella
,
I
sTelga
svelg^
tvelB
"T"lla
""alia, svelga
flTella,
trelffi
dftdliaoio
freDjamo
""ellete
ivelliale
""ellaoo, stalgaao
svellano
i "'
II' I
,
I
Jl"^!
,
svelleisi
fv^lendo
ivelto
iTelgano
mimm^m^^mf
T'""-T
suaso
StttlO
""1"
tenga
tenga
tMm
tMiiaiDO
tenianao
1"DeU
lamata
UDgano
teogano
tetiulo
tesio
'
I
pocti
;",
'J
t ib;^s"nf(bllowf^/yicnf.
'.
-
i66
"
laBEGtJLAR
irSRBS
disvel/ere, disverre, diyegfiere, diperrOf
Disifeg/iere
f
convel/ere
it is
X
makes
rr^lar.
the
follow
CQWultoj
preteriteconreilcij the parlici2"le,
Si*eilere.'
in olber
parts
OF
SECOND
THE
1C7
CQfilJUaATlON.
SubjuDCliTf Mood.
Gernnd.
Inpentive.
Partidp.
Iff"p"rf.
PceMD^
"IruUo
""
I
"""
1
1
'W"
I-
sTelIa"sTelga
flvella,
iTelga
svelletii
tTl4l"lldo
ffeUJamo
tTelto
svelliale
""dleU
svellano
trelgano
,
^'
1^
'
p
""
w
pH"l
"
""
"
l"I^H
suaso
lutlo
"
JV
II III
tenga
tenga
teo|t.
temamo
temano
teneto
leniate
tengano
tasgano
"rsr
tesiuto
teiio
i
'
pOflti
."
t S9rgtr0kXkw"porgtr9*
"
.
i66
"
msaBS
Disvegfiere,disvef/eref disverret divegfieret diverrtf
convellere
it is
l"RBGtLAR
makes
rr^Iar.
ibc
convellci s
preterite
the
follow
participleCQiwultcj
"
st^etlere:
in other
parts
OF
CQMJUOATION.
3ECOM0
THE
1
67
Moodf
SubjoDcUTf
Gernnd.
Inip"raUt".
Partkip.
Inpflrf.
Pr"f"nt.
"IruUo
I
svella
I
I
inn
?elga
svelg^
"vella, trelga
f
,
flT"lla,
""dB
tvelletti
tvMleDdo
iveltc
"ve])i"ino
STcllete
svelliate
STellaoo, tTcl
svellaoo
^'
1^
,
tvelgano
"I"I"|IH
p
"uaso
surio
"
U
I
P
IPl
tenga
tanga
temiino
taoianoo
teneto
laniate
tengano
tcDgane
rrjr
teisulo
lesto
"
r
pOflti
|k
.' .
tJ
.1
foUowf
t tSbf^gwrf
;wyY"rt.
^"
..
"
66
*
is
YKRta
Disvegfiere, disveffere, dist^erre, divegHere^ diverre^
convellere
U
IBBBGtlLAR
makes
rr^lar.
Ibe
follow
conyuUoj
conveiicij the participle
preterite
"
M%*ellere:
in other
parts
68
1
IRREGULAR
VKRB9
Indicative
Pretcnt
Mood.
of the
Preterite.
Imperf.
Present.
laSniliTe.
Fntnre.
Condit.
traggo
to
drtnv.
irai, tnggi
traui
irae,
traetti
trag|;e
traiamo,
traggiaiao
traste
tnera
trarro
traete
traeste
traggoDO,
trassero
trarrei
trauio
"II
m
I
""
Talgo,vaglio
vak
Tale
Yaliamo
to
TBlai
varr6
ndi
vedio
"arm
bewortk.
"alete
TalgtNIO,
"aglioDO
"edo, T^so,
Teggto
T"'
or
"edi
,
Tede
"ediamo.
to
"edeto
Tcdono,
Teg"
gonOfYeg'
giono
\"-
"msi
tOIHUUfldsh.
"
*
dr^s
TiTTo
JMkf9ief^
the
"iTefior
"
TiTercter
TttSI
toUv.
othw
mtf^edtrsti Hiftdtn
of
conpoitfidi
^oder$s
mak*
i3m
in erd
9
fatnr* In d!rd" Um
cnl.
,Tin"i
conditknil
OF
THE
SECOND
CONJUGATION.
169
IAE"GUUUl
170
VEftB^
Mood.
IjidicaliTe
Present
ufthe
lofinitife
to
be
fvoLmiy
to
*
poetry
mm.
VM
if
for
that
Ibe
proper
of
voUr$.
praiBiite
ot
ten
9cl"mfi
Im*
^cft
v
"
"
/
r
OF
SECOND
THE
CONJUGATION.
171
"olio
t
tnvoiifere,
dtvtt^trt
maka
(ba
participla
,
tvoiver"p
travoher9,
make
riy^Uo,
wolto,
IravoUo,
InvbTuh,
det^cfuht
rivofvtre,
I '72
IRREGULAR
VERBS
IiidicatiT" Mood.
Prcfent
of the
loBnitive.
appariflco
apparisci
apparisce,
appare
'AAim,
to
appear,
to
open.
'
appariamo
apparite
apparisrono,
appajono i
'
apro
*
I
avTerto,
AwnrrmBi
to
avvertisco
I
warn.
convert",
to
"
a"
convert.
deficiencies ot artttre may
Tlie
not
,
|
\ convertisco
ofinmo
,
anicnte
,
belong
or
abbiamo
lo
ardere,
Ije
supplied l"josartt
ardimento
,
to
baro.
we
dare,
or
jtrdiamo,
avere
ardimento:
ardiafe
,
ardendo,
173
OF
THI
THIRD
CONJUGATION.
174
*
Costruiref
t Emplsret
cond
VERBS
IRHEGCLAR
istmire
to
are
preferredto
fiU|rkmpier^,
conjagBtion.
to
constntfre,
instniire,
both regularly
declined
refill;
are
in
the
fe-
176
*
IRREGULAR
Saliamo
,
boing
an
iuflexion
of ja/are"
TCRBS
to
salt ,
u
used
for
sagliamo, improperly.
Of
THIIID
the
COHVVGATION.
77
Kood.
8iil*f"iicUte
Gorand.
IflifMrttive.
Prtfeat.
"""i*
"
noora
mmon
inaora
,
maoja
,
muoja
muora
maoja
mitoia
noriamo, iDoo|aoio^ moriamo, muojamo
iDaora
,
,
moriate
BHMrite
mnoniio*
,
mnojano
poet.
offerifci , ofTri
^MmM^aMkKBM^^BaV
profiffiaci
"""
Bill
h
II
morttr
muojate
moujaDo
niDggisca
no^gisci
muggt,
lUttorano,
Particip.
Imperf.
mugga,pott.
ofieriaca,oflVa
offerto
M"ki
*
profi"rifca
profierito
profferto
ii
saiga salifta
,
sail,faliatri
ialgat laKsca
"agliaoio
fafile
taiga salisra
saiga salisca
,
,
sagliamo
talpoo, saligcano
s"gUate
salgano taliscano
Kbenifcty tcbcrD"
tehenUeat tcli"ro"
,
y
IS
178
*
re,
Its
and
IMtlGOLAft
eomponnds
,
eonseguire,
regularly like /Aire/
,
etc
are
TEBB8
eoDjogated
tkis laltar OMdea
u
both
irregularly like segtiipraferable.
,
OF
THE
THUD
CORJVGATION.
"79
i8o
VERBS.
IRREGULAR
OF
Those
tables
hare
to
of
shown,
to
COBJUGATIOV.
numerous,
may
be
they
may
as
the
foregoing
ced
considerably reduvariety, hy observing that, amongst
there
is uniformity in their
them,
irregularity,so
these
8BC0HD
verbs, though
as
many
THB
VERBS
that
rules; of which
the
be
classed
ding
accor-
general
most
ar
four.
I. Such
indicative
of them
as
present
in ggo,
and
in the
preterite,
in the
following:
"
have
into
the 6rst person
change
tt
in the
the
gg
o"the
into
ss
participle,as
id
VERBS.
The
following, though
like the
their
IL
mode
of variation
Such
verbs
indicative
d,)
m
make
$0:
preceding,
"
as
present
the
the
preserre
cted
constru-
analogy
of
;"
have
in
exactly
not
I
the
first persons
doy (with
preteritein
#i,
and
a
vowel
the
of
the
before
participle
1
82
yBKBS.
Deviation
Chiedo
III.
that
the
the
Participle.
cliiesi
Those
tense
in
in
wLich
endoy
participlein
sOy
chiesto
Laye
make
the
the
first person
of
preteritein siy and
dropping the
ft.*f"
"
1
84
IV*
TXRIS.
IjityPy
and
baring
Verbs
before
tense^ make
ticiplein
tOy
tbe
tbe
of
one
last
tbese
three
syllablein
tbat
preteritein sijand
retainingsucb
liquid:
"
liquids,
person
tbe
par*
i85
^ome
Tlie
the
tew
in
mo
take
following are
participle:"*
tlds formation
exceptions with
:"
regard
to
86
1
VERBS.
both
Exceptions
preteriteand
in
participle.'r-
Rimango
rimasi
rimasto
Pongo
posi
posto
tenni
Tengo
(and their compounds
Other
would
rules
require
student
they
mode
better
manner.)
being
yerhs
reduction
any
much
rather
of them
to
and
minuteness
pear
ap-
,
be
to
of
therefore
may
where
Tables
the
general ;
complicated
too
the
in like
of those
Tariations
peculiar than
tenuto
adequate
be
benefit
referred
and
are
exposed
of
becoming
die
to
to
nse^
,
familiar
as
with
them.
LESSON
XIX
CONTINUED.
PERSONS
I
verb
A
.
regard
Francis
a.
agreeing
plural,
person
The
//
nire.
and
out;
goes
pupils
went
there
are
When
in
the
its nominatire
governed by
number
to
The
is
VERBS.
OF
verb
Francesco
uscirono.
than
nominatives
more
is put
esce.
gli scolari
whether
person,
as,
person:
out;
in
with
in
the
the
one
singular
plural
of
or
that
:
mason
muratorc
and
ed
shoemaker
il
cannot
calzolajo
non
come
possono
.*
ve-
:
VERBS.
Iiere
noininatiyes
The
singalar
person
third
if the
rent
persons
first
or
yerb
the
nominatiyes
in
the
second
if
the'dstabilished
and
and
I shall
4* When
plebe
in
the
;
II
in the
yerb
all
of
poi
;
egli
go
is
in
the
one
first person
be
of
first: this
;
the
being
languages:
io andremo.
ed
ed
io andremo.
eglino andrete,
i^oi ed
;
diffe*
first,if
should
nominatiye
is
singular
noun
a
esercito; crowd, folia; mob,
army,
generally put
popolo
Eat
being
in
the
singular
person
thou
not
an
but
singular
meat;
ellipticalmode
ti pregOj
mangiar
came.
is used
neyer
non
hospitable;
are
"5 ospitale.
qiicsto paese
negatiye,
a
comandOf
non
di
country
infinitiye mood
second
of the
yrith
of this
people
5. The
di
third
Italian:
The
ti
as
;
will
the
coUectiye,
go
go
thej
of the
of the
one
order
I shall
and
You
no
either
in the
of them
one
and
person,
be
of
are
put
plural;
should
,
He
is then
person
the
You
nominatiyes
,
of
'cond
the
put
,
seyeral
second
.
of
is therefore
yerb
the
both
being
87
plural.
person
3. But
1
in Italian instead
of the
without:
as
mangiar
in which
imperative
^
^
carne;
is understood
,
ti esorto,
or
li
consiglio,
88
1
TEAIIS.
HOOD.
INDICATIVE
continued
progressiye or
A
I.
Englisliby tbe
is expressed in
dare
verb
Italian
tbe
witb
lo
sio
scriyendo;
lo
sto
leggendo;
vo
To
slava
I
I
If tbe
io andava
I
an^
or
cercando,-
looking for.
was
andare
if it does
stare
stare^
looking for.
am
implies motion,
used, and
verbs
,
reading.
am
leggendo ^
act
participlein ing
writing.
am
reading,
was
the
in
as,
I
I
cercando;
Jo
bj
gerund:
J
and
be
to
expressed
act;
is most
not,
perly
pro-
in tbe
as
ex*
amples giyen.
Tbe
a.
imperfect implies continuance
of action
;
tbcrefore
wbenever
Englisb may be turned into
in ingy or into usedy it
tbe
imperfect
in Italian
tense
I looked
alteringtbe meaning,
ged
I^was
into
it may
be
For
looking for
rendered
tbe
same
lo
be
is to
y
:
tbe
by
if, witboat
tbus
,
used
in
ciple
parti-
rendered
for may
or
yerb
tbe
and
^vas,
ration
reite-
or
to
be
cban-
look
for
cercava*
reasons,
in
speaking
of
moral
or
properties of tbings no
qualitiesof persons,
tbe
longer existing,tbe imperfect is used, wben
of tbeir
continuance
of is considered
Cesare
era
existence
at
tbe
time
spoken
:
clemente;
Qesar
was
merciful.
y
VERBS.
Cariagine
ifenti
citid
una
di
miglia
tre
Carthage
But
era
was
miles
when
it is intended
our
ricea^
ed
89
as^eva
circuUo;
rich
a
three
in
1
had
city, and
twenty
in circumrerence.
days,
own
indicate their
to
the
istence
non-ex-
he
preterite must
used:
Cesarefu
Caesar
3. The
was
preterite(which
is also termed
definite)expresses
determinate
a
great warrior.
a
perfect or
at
guerriero;
gran
time,
time
or
the simple
action
an
beyond
a
done
lar
particu-
period:
Avanti
jeri
I wrote
to
Troja
a
of Helen
the
Was
of
compound
done
at
period not
I* ho
lo
di
of the
cause
siege
Troy.
4* The
action
day before yesterday.
fu cagione delC assedio
;
rape
of
the
you
d* Elena
// ratio
The
scrissi;
w
the
present
indeterminate
an
an
signifies
time
,
finished
veduto
or
within
:
oggi
y
questo
mese^
questo
anno;
I
have
seen
him
to-day,
this
year.
A\^ete
Hare
{^eduto
you
seen
il mio
my
carojlglio,
dear
son?
month,
this
TSHBS.
IQO
5* Tbe
tHe
conjunctions comey
preteriteis used
subito
as;
chcy
after
as
when;
che^ hardly; quandoy
append
as;
of the
compound
soon
dopo
chcj after:
6. In
it is
common
future
time
to
a
the
he
perrete
come
you
simple
ceneremo
piU
shall
we
,
When
spoken.
yerh
a
ring
refer-
present
I haye
done
Italian
or
,
one
it is
compound:
or
pat
..
tempo;
per
earlier.
sup
avrbjinito di
Quando
had
the
in
in
tense
future
,
If
for
conjunctions;hut
of those
he
SideT
;
present tense, preceded hy
of the
compound
Se
parlato
English,
to
into
ebbe
che
Dopo
ui ascoiiero;
scrwcre^
shall
I
writing
listen
to
you.
Lofarb
7. The
the
of
and
to
Italians
future
with
hope
make
potrb;
se
with
yerhs
to
of the
Forse
gli
Perhaps
Credo
belieye
has
detto
di
told
sard
;
when
of the
compound
avrd
he
che
ahle.
am
commonly use the compound
the adyerhybr^c,
perhaps,
,
use
it if I
denoting uncertainty,as
credere
;
I will do
him
non
not
arrivato;
the
I
English
present:
uscire
to
sperare^
go
think
as,
;
out.
he
is
ar-
riyed.
8.
did
Do
y
expressed
J
etc,
in Italian:
used
as,
as
auxiliaries, are
not
iQl
TERBS.
XX.
LESSON
MOOD.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Verbs
1.
expressing
doubt
J
tlie
require
^
of tbe
nominatives)
persons
: as
che
tbe
second
venga
is put
tbe
verb
tbe
Temo
che
present,
I fear
be
so
abbia
may
come.
j
is tbe
same^
die.
to
tbe
in
tbe
subjunctive
preceding verb in
first verb
tbe
requires
if
be
sent
pre-
subjunctive
tense,
to
past
a
is in tbe
be
time
if
a
in tbe
re
futupound
com-
actr
or
come.
may
ch'egli vii^a;
wisb
always
che
verb
I fear
;
ma
^
of
it
sempre
Temo
I wisb
signified
; and
venga
Bramerb
I sball
diilere^at
to
verbs
simple present
be
act
or
be
tbis
wben
future
of tbe
I know
:
be in tbe
time
Non
tbat
to
,
to
the
infinitive:
tbe
of
tense
indicative
or
I wish
morire;
conform
must
;
in tbe
Desidero
Tbe
refer
subject of both
tbe
wben
in
subjects(tbat is^the
verbs
two
be
to
;
Desidero
But
tbe
y
treaty
suspicioHyen-
yerb
following
sidfjunctis^moody when
de^
,
willj permission^ command,
sire
2.
surprise f ear
^
tbat
be
perduto
bave
lost
I* abbiate
che
voi
not
wbetlier
you
molti
mucb
live.
may
quattrini;
money.
inteso;
may
bave
beard
it.
f93
VEABft
this first verb
3. When
tenses^
yerb
re
according
the
past
the
subjanctiimperfect simple or compound
it refers
as
of
one
conditional,then
be in the
must
"
the
in the
or
is in
the
to
future
or
past:
fosse
I
venisse
;^che
y
,
venutos'^
was
fearing
1
might
'^
che
iemerei
temei
Temevaj
come
I should
1 feared
;
"
that
fear
that
he
was
"^
EallTneeetiario
V ^^
10,
^
J
Occorrere,
to
he
9
,
come*
needful
be necessary
JEssere
espedientCj
to be
Essere
megliOy
to
be
better
Essere
to
be
possible
Essere
possibile
impossibile
to
be
impossible
Essere
giustOj ingm-)\o
expedient
be
just,unjust,
stOfbuonOfprobabilef]
good, probable
require the following rerb
ctive
mood
pronoun
to
in Italian, with
in terrenes
che^
however
,
be
in the
when
a
subjuft'^
noun
expressed
:
It is better
L
meglio
It is better
E
for jou
che
voi
for him
meglio cVegli
speak ;
parliate.
to
to
sene
go away
;
vada.
13
in
or
glish
En-
ig4
VERBS.
I mast
Thou
He
must
The
J
r
go /
5. Credere
in the
firm
persuasion^ admits
in the
he
it to
tu
indicative
the
vada
it
andiamo
voi
andiate
eg lino vadano
conyiction
that
yerh
follo^rs
the
suhjunctiye
to fancy
or
y
he
is sick.
mood;
when
being required only
ch
*
of ahsolute
tense
f
or
che
che
bisogna
^
bisogna
1
go
ust
m
io vada
che noi
f-pressedSbisogna
go
must
che
fare e^-^jbisogna
ch'egli s^ada
go
must
You
i
go
must
We
(bisogna
i bisogna
\
go
means
suspect,
there
I beKeve
Credo
I
6.
vi k
che
credo
Jo
che
is
in
J
doubt
y
a
of
phrase
require tlie second
the subjunctii^e
niunoy nulla^
veruno,
nessunoy
desire,
or
;
is, I suspect
helieye^ that
niente
God.
a
ammalato
sia
Chiy alcuno,
Dio;
un
negation
and
followed
verb
of the
condition
j
^
by
a
sentence
relative,
to
be
in
.-
ifi^ alcuno
IVon
There
Se
vi
is
e
If there
f^i
e
Desidero
I wish
nobody
alcuno
any
che
there
be
che
conosea;
knows
mi
conosea;
any
body
mi
me.
that
knows
me.
conosea?
who
body
vi sia
may
mi
that
che
should
alcuno
Is there
che
be
knows
alcuno
?
me
che
somebody
mi
who
conosea
knows
;
me.
195
TEMS.
it follows
Cke^ when
7.
chicchessia^ checches^
slay checch^j requiresthe following verb
eubjunctiye:
as
you
chicchessia
Of
whomsoever
TVhoj
with
which
me
Mandatemi
is,but
what
(i); and
language
Per
the
be
may
pot
have
(that
poted
che
ere
be
9
of
as
,
;
siafedele.
expressing
require
not
tive
subjunc-
the
rendering them
in
lian
Ita-
the
idioms
of
the
little there
be.
of
one
;
however
whatever
abbia;
power
che
poco
pud
o
possa
pud
o
possa
etsere:
he
subjunctiveis
piu
The
(1) Called by
ricco
richest
some
che
man
per
avere,)
also used
after
a
:
II
,
:
che
The
sia
che
\Sy per
potere
mode
carrying
condition,
:
poco
Per
10.
che
whatever
may
as
:
is faithful
,
what
may
Italian
uomo
and
when
pro\^isOj or
who
un
However
9.
of
man
a
thatj
y
idea
;
speak.
may
you
subjunctivein
the
Send
par Hate
che
J
an
;
say.
may
whom
them
require
dictate
che
Di
8.
the
y
Checchessia
Whatever
in
io
conosca
;
I know.
in
gramiiMriaDSihe potential
(his
tense.
lative
super-
196
VERBS.
In
II.
Italian
9
other
in
as
languages ,
tbere
the
particular conjunctions wbich
goyem
refer to that part of
subjunctive ; for these we
are
speech.
1
LESSON
XXI.
INFINITIVE
MOOD.
verbs
Some
goyem
.
mood
in6nitiye
following yerb
a
without
yerbs
other
a
,
the
after
preposition;
a
y
in
preposition is required
with
the
depending
upon
do*
infinitive.
following or
Infinitives
2.
to
i/ere,
be
incumbent;
able; bisognare,
be
vedere,
feel; and
to
when
do
take
I
ought
require
Egli
to
means
to
speak
permit:
to
leave
me
to
did not
lascib
di
parlare
leave oif
ire,
to
behold;
;
speaking.
to
as,
you.
lasciarey
as,
speak.
ojf'ythey
as,
non
ling;
wil-
preposition:
after
one
y
listen; inten-
to
no
parlare; allow
preposition di:
He
etc.
to
to
re
be
to
sent
mirare,
y
it
hear;
to
as,
allow
to
means
when
not
volere^
ascoltarey
parlarvi;
Lasciatemi
But
;
understand;
They
it
look
io
udire,
do; pole
to
need;
to
verbs,
y
Io debbo
3.
see;
similar
guardare
dere,
to
y"re,
take
the
VERBS.
do
4* They
wlien
it
how:
as
lo
able,
leggere
so
how
when
sapere
read and
follows
dif
if it has
minatiye
of such
denj haying
lo nego
lo
of the
6. An
the
be
"
sition
prepo-
hist
sense
narrare^
others,
some
suhjector
the
to
and
if to
a
no*
ferent
dif-
preposition:as,
a
it
io
(myself).
il
padrone
done
has
master
innocente
essere
be
;
it.
;
innocent.
voi innocente;
to
you
may
innocente*
that
essere
I know
which
done
(myself)to
so
and
take
averlofatto
d*
1 know
dire^
negarcy
not
in-
d*aiferl0fatto;
nego
so
(in the
,
preceding yerh,
subject;does
deny
sapere
reference
a
rejectsa
or
conoscere,
^
the
know,
to
rule.
next
after
affermarcj
provarcj
lo
know
write.
it takes
the
to
9) credere
mentioned
I
skilledy to
simply
means
infiuitire
5. An
I
be
to
sapere^
scrivere;
e
to
according
lo
after
one
9
finitiye which
take
be
to
I know
But
require
not
means
igj
be
innocent
r
so che
equally eipressedt^-^/o
so
che
voi
siete
innocent
sono
e*^"iXiA
so
rest.
infinitiye
of
the
with
mind;
a
as
yerb
expressing an
desiderarcj
to
fection
af-
desire.
1
98
VERBS.
place re
to
to
J
hope;
please, godere,
vergognarsi
ashamed
be
to
enjoy;
fear; increscere^
to
iemere,
to
to
takes
etc.
sperare,
regret,
di before
^
f
it: aSy
Temo
I
dispiacervi,-
afraid
to
displeaseyou.
after
Infinitives
7.
di:
am
di
the
following
verbs
take
"
AccadeJre
to
happen
Accennare
to
beckon
Accordare
to
to
Ammonire
|to
grant
warn
admonish
refrain
Astenersi
to
Avvertire
to
warn
Cessare
to
cease
Xurarsi
to
care
Comandare
to
command
Concedere
to
grant
Concludere
to
conclude
Convenire
to
agree
Degnarsi
to
Dimandare
to
Dimenticarsi
Dubitare
to
Immagi-
i
narsi
j
to
mind
imagine
Impedire
Imporre
Ingegnarsi
to
hinder
to
bid
to
strive
Intendere
to
intend
to
flatter
one's
self
to
meditate
deign
Minaeciafe
to
menace
ask
Mostrare
to
show
Osare
to
dare
Parere
to
appear
doubt
Pentii'si
to
repent
ayoid
Pexmettere
to
permit
Presumere
to
presume
Pretendere
to
pretend
Procurare
to
endeavour
Proibire
to
prohibit
Proporre
to
propose
favor
to pretend
to feign
tofinish
tofix
Fissare
Guardarsi
in
Meditare
Favorire
Finire
to
tofail
to
Fingere
Gloriarsi
fudge
glory
Mancare
Evitare
to
to
Lusingarsi
to/or get
to
|Giudicare
300
VERBS.
GonsigUare
to
advise
Esortare
to
exhort
Esser
to be
|
\ accustomed
so-
lito
Obbligare
\^oofferone's
Pensare
jJ^'!'\''^^
f to intend
Persnadere
oblige.
to
Offrirsi
persuade
supplicate
to
Snpplicare to
qffro a guidarvi di notte e di giorno/
and by day.
I offer myself to guide
you by nigbt
Si oJfrXdi difenderla da ogni pericolo ;
To
mi
He
offered
bimself
ber
defend
to
from
erery
peril.
Per
qual cagione
For
wbat
do
reason
To vi consiglio
Essere
10.
and
I
a
Ai^ere
infinitive
F'oi
:
before
a
tbey
io.sto
a
:
as
it.
tbe
a
express
of action
or
do
lowing
folpro-
,
cenare;
molio
baye
Dare
Vol
mi
You
make
Datemi
requires
a
da
or
tbe
before
next
as,
avete
Ifou
12.
cenarcy
to
quiet?
supping.
am
11.
wbieb
of
be
you
require
stare
zitto?
stare
to
me
I adyise
continuance
jgressionor
sono
advise
you
afarlo;
infinitiye
lo
consigliate di
mi
a
a
great
fare
deal
requires a
dale
me
da
^
to
credere
a
believe
bere
;
do.
da:
or
as.
molte
a
great
give me
fare;
da
or
cose;
many
tbings.
sometbing
to
drink.
20
VERBS.
1
the
witli
the
a
as
a
govern
cannot
former
the
that
its nature
the
same
a
in the
but
be
of
much
always
can
latter
the
which
sentence
as
it is to
so
it
such
as
the
in
manner
preserves
that
verb,
noun
English ;
in
Italian,
employed
,
participlepresent
observed
,
:
// {sincere
The
le
difficult the
this
and
is the
governs
as
a
the
difficult,and
preserving
it
sincere
the
as
to
accusative
case
more
things
being
nominative
is also
nominative
the
of
,
which
consen^arCf
be
would
instance,
used, stands
vinte;
cose
conquering
In
difficile,c piii difficileil
sarebbe
conservare
il
in
substantive
in
mood
is
prefixed,
article
of
nature
tlie infinitire
in
A. verb
3.
1
quered.
con-
vely
substanti-
sarehbe;
to
used,
substantively
sarehbe
by
understood,
virtue
of its nature
verb.
// sollevare
i
poveri i un' opera
da
buon
CH^
stiano;
The
relievingof
the poor
is
work
a
for
a
good
Christian.
Lafama
cese
The
delV
approssimarsi
Vesercito
Fran^
the
French
;
news
of
the
approaching
of
army.
U"re
approssimarsi
takes
the
genitiveas
a
sub-
VERBS.
202
gorerned by
stantiye
as
it goyerns
yerb,
a
i4" The
as
tbe
noun
accusatiye
of
with
masculine,
used
Piu
used
article
wben
an
preceding
with
nouns:
affaticarsi per
The
,
noun
a
ming
co-
subject to tbe
example,
the
than
more
che
:
of
molesting
fatiguingof
is
rules
same
il molestarlo
e
mitigarlo
and
terrifying
in6nitives
tbese
gios^a lo spaventarlo
V
while
,
it.
after
always
a
him
profits
self to
one's
gate
miti-
him.
infinitiye
i5. The
is
generally used
is used
present
L'
di
ora
Dopo
let to;
aver
di
Desirous
For
She
J
Senza
6. An
in
hour
for
eating.
having read.
haying
for
it
fatto
averlo
per
,
sapere
;
done
vegghiare{\)
watching with
;
;
he
without
infinitiye
(1) Vegliare,
:
the
after
fabbricare
commonly
participle
gratifyinghim.
from
came
the
compiacergli ;
yenis^ada
Spese
da
lo
doing
Ella
1
of
far
English
in
preposition,
a
Italian,where
mangiare;
Desideroso
Per
in
with
mood,
takes
spent
una
con
a
s^icina;
neighbour.
in
fabricating.
knowing.
goyerned
a
it.
by
the
passive sense:
preposition
aoi
VBRBS.
da
JVon
era
IVon
i da
Non
ne
I
not
am
17.
credere
Infinitires
riprendere,
Italian
in
expressed
Sajingy
il
se
ell a;
ma
but
she.
govcmed
by
for
it
,
are
^
palafreno
he
that
Rupondevaj
had
the
in
as
an
answered
the
dover
non
Enrico
But
subito
ought
disse^
suddenly
Henry
palfre,y.
dubitare;
he
that
vinto;
aver
won
,
Ma
belieyed.
understood
or
ted.
doub-
language:
DicendOf
He
be
to
be
to
not
was
reprehended
be
to
it
it is not
;
io da
son
accusative
Latin
dubitare;
im
not
to
port
are
that
said^
doubt.
poco;
it
imported
little.
18. These
inGnitiyes
writers,
of each
what
il
la
aggiungersi
They
certo
;
"
considered
;
added
"
of
spoken
Consideravano
dersi
Latin
clause
been
has
the
after
that
;
the
that
also
are
or
re
a
employed
by
at
the
manner,
statement;
lian
Itaginning
be-
detailing
conceiyed:
essere
carestia
poco
capace^^;
de*danarh
"
; re/i-
etc.
that
the
king
scarcity of
they
were
to
was
money
make
little capable^
to
was
sure
"
be
etc.
ao4
VERBS.
LESSON
XXII.
GERUND.
It is used
absolutely(thatis, "without being
ce
governed by another
word), but haying referento some
preceding
subject or nominative
I.
:
Egli
mandd
Sono
stato
I have
//
pregando
been
in
thief, hearing
Hearing
2*
or
la
mi
a
he
before
with
is
it in
,
Not
disse
osservazioncy
connected
nominative, which
and
pericolo;
;
said.
,
It is often
Italian
gran
noise, fled.
a
observation
my
praying.
strepitoy/uggl ;
udendo
udendo
in
sent,
great perilgoing.
,
Egliy
he
camminando
ladro
The
;
udendo
il
J
a
separate subject
always placed after
English :
dichiarammo
popolo
it in
;
,
people hearing we declared.
/o, dormendo
egliyaprii la porta;
He sleeping, I opened the door.
The
,
3. It governs
words
inflexion
other
derived
the
verb
it like
on
from
which
any
it is
:
Accusative*
//
of
dependent
Confortandolo
"
quale
y
her.
riconoscendola
;
comforting
;
who,
him.
sing
recogni-
:3o5
VERBSF.
il
Chiamando
di
notne
Giovan
Galeazzo
,
alzando
c
le
the
Proclaiming
raising bis
Genitive
bandierf;
sue
of John
name
and
banners.
delle
Ricordandosi
"
Galeazzo,
ingiurie
che
gli
avevafattes
Recollecting tbe
injuriestbat
be
bad
done
bim.
Datiue^^Restandogli
JVon
attendtnda
Not
attending
Mood
Indicative
;
remaining
I pare
a
the
to
re
to
d*
opinion
Alfonso;
of Alfonso.
Jffirmando
"
bim.
che
tra^^
era
dito.
Affirming tbat be
Subjunctive Jl Papa
"
ncziani
sbould
desiderando
do
il medesimo
desiring
7
tbe
che
tbat
tbe
;
Venetians
same.
-^Stimando
importare assai;
Infinitive
Deeming it to import mucb.
volendo
JVon potendo a non
andare
Being unable or unwilling to go.
4*
and
Tbe
gerunds
re
esse
are
tbe
of
often
nature
by
tbe
a
number
of tbe
or
noun
and
Latin
to
tbem
gender :
used
avere
and
tbe
y
alone
,
ablative
pronoun
;
auxiliary verbs
elegantlyomitted
participles belonging
tbe
i Ve~
^
facessero
Pope
Tbe
betrayed.
was
of
absolute
wbicb
(in
wed
,)follo-
tbey
take
I
ao6
VERBS.
of avendo
Cid detto, parti,(instead
departed,{instead o/ haTing
said, he
That
ciddetto);
said that).
essendo
pioggiay (insteadof
pioggia);
rain haying ceased.
la
Finita
la
The
finiia
PARTICIPLE.
for
of a verh haying avere
participle
that is,unvaried;
auxitiarymay he used absolutely,
5. The
with
agree
may
or
with
connected
the accusative
it:
Egli
ci ha
Ecco
I
Here
are
Ho
yeduto
datteri
or
ho col
che
voi m*
for
essere
nominatiye
Ella
e
hy
Noi
They
seen
us.
colli;
or
gathered.
mangiate le susine, che
mandato
avevate
the
or
mandate;
plums
which
you
had
of a verh conjugatedwith
participle
with its
its auxiliaryalways agrees
:
stimata
da
tntti; she
is esteemed
all.
ci siamo
Elleno
to
he has
me.
The
6.
or
alreadyeaten
sent
;
the dates that I have
gid mangiato
I have
veduti
sono
have
pentiti;we
cadute
nelle
fallen into the
have
mani
repented.
del
tiranno;
tyrant'shands.
208
VERBS.
with
bat
pasftiyeverb;
a
tenses:
in
vengo
itimato;
Hato
stimaio;
compauiid
as,
lo
I
stimatOj
sono
or
esteemed.
am
sono
iDTariabIjr.^10
But
its
nerer
hare
I
esteemed.
been
In
instances, but
some
of andare
tenses
: as
in tbe
employed
are
same
ner
man-
,
Jo i^ado
I
yemed
dalle
y
alia
soggetto
tbe
subject to
am
Tbe
2.
rarely,tbe simple
more
of
podagra;
gout.
is
verb
generallygo"
hj da, dalj dalloy dalla, daiy dagU,
and seldom
hj per.- as,
agent
^
Egli
passive
a
rispettato da
leiy
dagli
e
amid
/lo-
8tri;
He
is
respected by ber,
3. One
y
nominative
tely as
are
people^ they
in
rendered
si, witb
to
Italian
tbe
if tbere
,
an
be
verb
^
and
we,
indefini-
neuter
verb,
in
or
tbe
tbe
accusative
no
employed
active
by
friends.
our
conjunctivepronoun
tbird
:
as
,
One
believes; people, tbey believe;
One
says
One
;
people
,
they
say
; si
a
phrase
of the
third
of this
kind,
persons
in
si crede.
dice.
sleeps; people, they sleep;si
4. If , in
gular
sin-
person
dorme.
tbere
be
an
English "it
cusative
ac-
be-
26g
VERBS.
in Italian
tlie nominatiye
comes
conforms
it in number
to
They
They
a
see
ten
the
5. Sbould
ased
but
us
of
,
witb
the
in the
yerb
y
Uno
(because
i
as
8. When
in
creduto*
people ^
as^
of
this
the
sort
si
of it, etc. occurs,
conjunctiye
is changed into
,
They
a
uno:
sono
people repent:
be said.)
pente cannot
phrase
a
ne,
pronoun
nan
si pente;
si si
7* If in
biasimato.
is
expressed by
be
personalpronoun
passive voice :
sarb puniio.
reflected^one;
are
cond
se-
sucb
6. When
yerb
or
si cannot
you;
me;
^^Xi
"e
io
,
They will punish me;
People blame me , sono
People do not belieye
the
uomini,
be of the first
theej
me,
nominatiye
tbe
died
,
accusatiye
as
person,
uomo*
un
si vedono
men
tlie rerb
^
; si "ede
man
see
as
:
and
^
do not
to
of it;
tene^ cene,
meney
phrase, the
order
speak
yerb
ayoid
is used
non
vene
in the
sene
parla.
occur
in such
passiye yoice,
the inconyenient
They
will
Mene
saranno
They
will
giye me
Mene
sard
data
giye me
two
date
They spoke
to
due
one
una
us
junctionof
pounds of it;
libbre.
pound^ofit ;
libbra.
of it; cene
fu parlato.
14
sit
YERBS.
2IO
9. All rerhs
witli
The
compound
of
spoken
them
joined to
si
in the
essere
hare
J
Imving
jugated
con-
tensest
i
si
you;
are
di
parlato
voi:
Or
we
may
the
to
stato
si
Mi
w^
had
It is
10.
to
spoken
to
oione
those
believe
dicCy
si
crede,
allowed
si
y
or
the
Thus
11.
te
be
to
voi.
voi;
it
said,
was
it
expressions equiyalent
belies^esjpeople
rendered
in
the
say^
same
:
Si
mi
one
di
of you.
other
saysj
participle
preferably,
or
^
are
manner
di
me
etc.
y
voiy
it is believed
saidy
beliesfed,and
was
di
the
parlato
stato
9
parlato
stato
era
They
i
phrase: as
parlato
era
add
siy and
suppress
proibiscey
mi
phrases I
vien
or
mi
permesso
di
I.
TAKING
Active
tenses
Ho
are
with
avere:
incoraggiato
I have
am
si
permet^
restare.
XXIVf
AUXILIARIES.
DIFFERENT
verbs
J
y
expressed in Italian,
iproibito; mi
U"SSOTi
VERBS
si credeva.
forbidden
am
be
remain, may
to
diceva^
si
conjugated
in the
as,
il
popolo
;
encouraged the people.
pound
com-
VSBB8.
Reflected s^erbs
Mi
E
:
I liave
yerbs
take
is
as^
rained.
difficulty
attending the
the employment
of essere
some
to
as
repented.
essere,*
pio^^uto;it lias
3. There
s^erbs
essere
pent it o;
sono
Impersonal
a.
take
311
ter
neuor
avere.
Neuter
place
i^erbs
(i) take
y
Sono
to
E
andato
4"
AH
in
to
or
take
Egli
^
that
become^
he is gone
may
and
ammagrito;
a
because
ffo
a
well.
Norvegia;
an
in
he
to
Norway.
be
Englished by
adjective or participle
goyems
although
the
thin.
is grown
verb
neuter
requiresavere,
actiye
to
essere:
5. When
essere:
or
pozzo;
verbs
neuter
,
it
nel
from
as^
fallen into the
grow,
ye^
essere:
caduto
I hare
indicatingmotion
former
accusati-
an
it otherwise
takes
it becomes
case
:
passato
il
ponte^
sono
or
sul
passato
ponte;
I haye
(l)
not
Bnt
passed the bridge^
eammlnart,
iocluded
in thii
paiteggiare,
mi*,
and
take
to
or
oyer
the
walfcj baltare,
avere
io tbcir
to
bridge.
dance
}
coropovod (ensea.
art
VEBBS.
212
Neuter
VERBS
Piovigginare to
Dim
cohjugated
drizzle
o] are
Digbiacciare
to
thaw
ESSERE.
Giacere
to
lie do^vn
Biuscire
to succeed
Uianguidire
to
languish
Cadere
Didiacciare
Lampeggiare
Folgorare
Aggiomarsi
with
to
lighten
^^
^^
I
to/all
Cascare
fall
Tomare
to
Tombolare
side
Accadere
to
happen
to
devolve
-_
Annottare
day-light
^^
\
Annottarsi
I
\
dark
grow
Scadere
tofall
be
to
to
necessary
to
pas
to
care
Sorvenire
Importare
to
concern
Bincrescere
to
be
Bastare
sorry
to
suffice
to
go
come
Sopravve-
Gire
upon
tofall out
to happen
to happen
Addiyenire
Andare
ire
to
com^
Ayrenire
Bisognare
Calere
unexpect-
edly
nire
y
Venire
up-
down
to
come
come
upon
.
to
Rivenire
to
come
again
be
Convenire
Uscire
to
go
Entrare
to
enter
Stare
to
be
Diyenire
Bistare
to
stop
Diyentare
Bestare
to
stay
Syenire
Bimanere
to
remain
I
agree
to
to
to
J
proper
lobe
out
to
sary
neces-
become
faint
to
be
to
to
spring
perish
to
vanish
to
appear
born
Nascere
Scaturire
to
to
Piacere
to
Dispiacere
to
spring
issue
Perire
Syanire
please
displease Apparire
y
2l3
TERBS.
/
Gompaiire
to
appear
}before
gohjugatbd
ESSERE
to
Correre
to
run
to
grow
to
to
up
to
recoi^er
I
Fassare
to
Partire
I Pascere
f
Bisolyere
part
depart
tofeed
be
skilled
Vivere
go
to
descend
lis^e
to
die
to
kill
to
return
Tomare
to
Balenare
to
lighten
Spruzzolare
to
drizzle
to
to
happen
Tonare
to
alight
Nevicare
to
go
down
Fioccare
Kacciare
tofreeze
be
day-light
up
follow
out
to
Aggiornare
to
GUacciare
dispatch
resolve
Scendere
Smontare
to
ted
sally
worth
Ritornare
Salire
Seguire
elect
be
pas$
to
to
to
Jo
to
to
make
to
Morire
(
to
gush
flee
cure
be. allot
to
shun
to
Gnarire
to
issue
Valere
,
both
Spicciare \to
Fuggire
to
belong
to
AVERE,
Sortire
bring
)
with
sink
* Grescere
I
AHD
Affondare
.
/ disappear
Appartenere
verbs
^^
,
{judge
Neutbr
|
Sparire
the
to
thunder
snow
Graudinare
to
hail
Piovere
to
rain
2l4
y"KBS.
LESSON
VERBS
I
Some
i
in
Verbs
goyern
the
CASES.
genitwe
case*
Italian^ whatever
and
tbey
always governing
tbe
may
genitive:
""
to
Bammen-
to
remembery
Arrossire
blush
call
Conoscersi
be
mind
Giovarsi
tarsi
Kicordarsi
to
Sovvenirsi
recollect
Hallegrarsi
rejoice
Accendersi
be
avail
versed
one's
self
Approfittarsiprofit
i** ^^"^'^
Ibe piqued
pretend
OfFendersi
inflamed
Piccarsi
be
Innamorarsi
some
Englisli.
in
govern
DIFFERENT
GOTBunsG
verbs
dative
tbe
XXV#
Confidarsi
enamoured
trust
los^e Curarsi
Invagbirsi
Accorgersi
fall
Avvedersi
perceive
Empiere
Attristarsi
grieve
Caricare
load
Beffarsi
make
Adornare
adorn
Bidersi
laugh
Incolpare
inculpate
Crucciarsi
be angry
be
in
abound
Abbondare
aware
game
at
Maravigliarsi ^vonder
fill
furmsh
Fornire
.
Adagiare
Contentarsi
be content
Cibarsi
Fentirsi
repent
be ashamed
Nutrirsi
Yergognarsi
care
accommodait
feed
live
Pascersi
3l6
TERBS.
Fldarsi
confide
to
j
Godere
to
9
Kascere
genitiFe or dative,
genitiye or accasatiTC.
j
enjoy
,
be born
to
9
,
Partirsi
to
depart
XJscire
to
go
out,
Ubbidire^ to obey,
Soddisfare^ to satisfy,
datire
RibelLarsi^ to rebel,
datiye
Fuggire
flee,
to
10
mind
Abbattersi,
|
)to
wait
\ to
light upon,
ablatiye.
ci abbattemmo
in
lui;
IS
J Prepo8rt.on
-we
...
met
with
him.
that
verbs
and
in
them
sometimes.
compounded
of
a
preposition
prepositionprefixed,have that same
repeated after, for the government
connected
witb
m.-
/-ta^iefraor tra
generally;
J
^
observable
the
take
]
to
Inframmettersi^ \
rintermeddle,\
Trammettersi,
L
Intrammettersi;J
It
ablatire.
or
\
\to meet
vi^ith,
Incoutr^vsi,]
to/all in with,
Frammettersi,
or
for, accusatiye.
Ayyenirsi,
JVoi
accusatiye.
Idatiye.
,
Attendere^
or
gen.y acc.9
attend,
to
ablative.
genitiyeor
of
a
noun
:
place.
Congratularsi con uno; to congratulate one.
into danger.
in un pericolo; to run
Incorrere
kAdurre
ad
un
Frdimmeltersi
To
luogo;
fra due
interposebetween
This, however,
to
convey
to
a
rivali;
two
rivals.
is
though frequently,
far frosui
2
VERBS.
1
7
"beinginTaiiablydone: tlie principal exception
the case
arises from
being often regulated solely
primitiye verb,
the
by
the
of
different;supersedes that
when
*
which,
its annexed
*
preposition:
Dipendo
A
of
government
da
yoi; I
depend
you.
upon
XXYI.
LESSON
ADVERB.
1.
of
with
adverb
An
is
verb,
a
an
regard to
Word
that
the meanqualifies
ing
adverb,
adjective,or another
a
place, or
manner,
time*
Many Italian adverbs are formed from adjectives
to them, as in English by
by adding mente
mode
from
or
manner:
Ijr,signifying
as,
Prudente;
prudent. Prudentemente
;
dently.
pru2.
3. If
by
an
adjectiveend
a
vowel, the final
is annexed
:
Facile;
as
easy.
Particolarmente
In
e
/e,
is cut
in
or
re,
off when
ded
precemente
,
Parlicolare;
4*
in
Facilmente;
easily.
particular.
;
particularly.
adjectiveshaving
a
different
termination
:ai8
ADVERBS.
the
gender,
eacli
for
feminine
termination
adopted in forming the adverb: as,
Savioj (mas.) sas^ia^(fem.)wise;
is
from
sanamente,
wisely.
5. Adyerbs
the
degree by changing
into
]^ositive
Ones
the
6. Should
A
in
iOy io
is chasi-
as^
;
very
wisely.-
most
or
and
that
go,
also before
take
issima-^
as,
;
Rich,
ricchissimamente
very
or
most
following adverbial
8. The
viz.
^^ne,well;
little, pochissimo
both
has
often,
mente
honestly.
most
or
wise.
Ricco
poco^
tive
adjec-
as^
Adjectivesendiqg in co
in the plural,require it
mente:
stiperiatiTe
of the
yowel
adjectiveend
Savissimamente
an
very,
;
issimamente:
Savio,
7.
last
the
honest.
to;
into
in
issimamente:
Onestissimamente
ged
formed
be
may
y
very
richly.
are
superlatives
regular;
ir-
benissimo^ very well;
little; spessoy
very
,
spessissimo
and
spessissima-
often.
Note, ihaLt pocOy
are
;
used
pochissimOf
adjectivelyas
spessOy
well
as
simo,
spessisbially.
adver-
2
ADV"fiBS.
ADVERBS,
4n"
Appunto
1' appunto
Per
I
\
Adesso
Anticamente
Innanzi
Anzi
r addietro
addietro
In
ayyenire
1' avyenire
Appresso
|
In
|
appresso
AUora
in
D'allora
bell'
"
formily
]
for
time
the
past
henceforth
for the future
afterguards
time
that
at
,
qua
that
since
slowly
at
agio
,
gently
leisure
also, likewise, yet,
Ancora
Anehe
j
Altresi j
,
D'assai
Tolte
altronde
Affatto
Appieno
much,
hyfar
very,
many
times
,
I
j
from
sufficiently
else
elsewhere, besides
quite, entirely
fully
still
even
elsewhere, somewhere
Altrove
Altronde
likewise
also
Assai
D'
|
then
Adagio
Assai
f
behind
In
A
this
my faith
instant
rather
no
Addietro
Per
upon
f
J
Avanti
che
exactly
so,
actually
in times
of yore
of old
on
forward,
hereafter, before
rather, on the contrary
Attttalmente
Per
just
now
Anzi
9
EXPRESSIONS.
ADYEEBIAL
faith
Affd
1
"DV"RBS"t
220
Abbastanza
I
enough
sufficienzaj
Almeno
|
Almauco
j
A
sufficiently
y
least
at
Alqaanto
somewhat
Altrimenti
otherwise
a
y
or
,
Avyertitameiite
Aryertentemente
|
j
openly
}
D' attomo
In alto
above
Bene
well
bene
entirely y
breye
Breyemente
breye
Fra
Bel
I
briefly
j
shortly
'
in
bello
A
boccal
A
voce
about
y
below
In
round
about
Abbasso
Ben
else
advisedlyy warily
Apertamente
Attomo
little
a
short
very
minutely
time
softly
by word
of mouth
J
REMARKS.
Alia
Francese
all*
Inglese y
alia
SpagnuO'
la; etc.y after tlie Frencb, English,Spanish manner
bial
or
fashion, etc. The adjectiyein such adverphrases is always used in the feminine.
y
When
rather
precedes
an
ciplepasty it is expressed by
the adjectiyemay
be placed
che
no:
as.
adjective or parti-^
anzi
between
che
noy
anzi
and
and
221
ADVERBS.
che
acerbeeta
i anzi
Ella
Slie is rather
ella
^
is to
say
or
ami
sby.
XXVII.
LESSON
Certamente
certainly
surely
truly
Certo
certo
Di
^
acerbetta;
cheno
Per
no
certo
that
Cioi
Ciod
dire
a
to
is
that
wt
y
Grca
,
incirca
Air
Di
thereabout
nearly
Incirca
shortly
corto
Continuamente
Al
ceasing
without
continuo
Del
Di
continually
continuo
continuo
Costl
thercy
Costi
in that
place
CoU
Di
contra
Di
contro
opposite
from
Dianzi
a
dianzi
Fur
qui
innanzi
Da
qua
in ayanti
Da
quell'ora
Da
^uel punto
poi
little while
ago
be/ore
Dinanzi
Da
oppositeside
shortly y before
dianzi
Poco
the
hereafter for
the
y
in
from
that
time,
future
since
Dentro
Di
dentro
within
Entro
Per
entro
Addentro
within, far
Eziandio
also,
Egualmente
equally alike
frankly plainly
Francamente
in
even
,
,
In fatti
really, in effect
Di f atto
Forse
Di
perhaps
recently newly
fresco
,
Frattanto
in
the
mean
Finora
Fino
ad
ora
Tnfino ad
till
now
ora
Frequentemente
Di freqaeote
frequently
time
,
lately
2^4
in
Intaato
Imraantinente
f
Incontanente
y
the
while
mean
immediately
Interrottamente
interruptedly
Ivi
there
Intorno
i
D'intorno
i
about
round
J
Inoltre
besides
moreover
Jeri
Jer
I'altro
Jer
mattina
about
y
yesterday
the day beforeyesterday
yesterday morning
yesterday evening
last night
Jersera
Jernotte
LassA
tJiere
above
Laggiii
there
below
Lentamente
Lungamente
A lungo
A dilungo
I
slowly
at
large
for a long
at large
time
Li
,
there
I
L^
Di
hence
qua
hiter
,
thence
thither
y
Lontano
I
LuDgi
Da
Da
Da
Di
un
far
lato
qaesto lato
quel lato
gran lunga
side
on
one
on
this side
on
that
side
by far
Meno
less
Senza
meno
Senz'
altro
\
without
Mica
i
not
Wiga
]
not
fail
i
at
all
used
only with a
\negatireparticle
2:25
^VBRB8.
Mentre
while
che
Mentre
quel
In
mentre
.
thereupon^Just
Molto
much,
Mai
never
Blanco
less
ogni modo
Ad
Senza
modo
Senza
misura
Oltre
misura
very
J
then
great deal
a
ever
y
by all
means
excessively
Medesimamente
likewise
Male
badly
badly cruelly
very badly
not
Malamente
well
,
,
Malissimo
No
no,
Non
Per
niente
Per
nulla
for nothing
Miente
affatto
Nulla
del tutto
m
pure
Vi
manco
Ni
meno
Di
nascosto
or
not
nothing
at
all
neppure
not
even
secretly, under
Nascostamente
hand
Celatamente
A
destra^
mano
or
dritta
A
mano
manca;
sinistra
A
destra
A
dritta
A
sinistra
A
manca
on
the
right hand
on
the
lefthand
or
on,
or
to
the
right
on,
or
to
the
left
15
^^6
ADYERBS.
REMARKS.
Gid
indeed:
to
indeed
and
used
before
it
that
phrase
No
Non
;
other
See
at
the
cases
non
io che
Never.
a
negatiw
pray
he
phrases, they
see
you
him.
negative, placed in
beginning
is used
or
end
of
;
you.
rimarrd
worked
or
o
;
remain.
it does
hofatigato
if I have
mean
negative: as,
a
shall not
piace^ no;
se
mai;
ti prego;
quello non
for that
F'edete
vado
non
the
as
it is I who
mi
gentleman?
vedete; if ever
lo
son
;
question,
a
ignore? Mai;
without
manner
,* in
S
doubtful
or
JVo ; per
No
go ;
employed
IVo;
answering
verb, they require
a
never
mai
detached
for it.
sorry
in
that
employed
is
am
,
conditional
No
I
quel
seen
vith
as
:
I
Se
generallyeqaiyafent
as,
yoa
When
if
for the
dispiaccia;
ne
me
veduto
Have
every
it is
giammaiy
never:
Jvete
In
che
gid
Not
Maif
expletiye,
an
as,
JVon
means
as
empliasis,wben
of
sake
used
is sometimes
not
no;
no.
pleaseme,
no*
a
a
ADVEBBS.
verbs
the
After
s\ take
227
dire, rispondere^
etc.
and
wo
di:
/
Egli
disse
di
Ella
rispose
forbidding,
their
of
eke
1 fear
that
is
i^ietd che
hindered
He
Dubitav
They
denying,
is
wo/i
pleonasticall^
negation
or
gid smarrito;
si
non
che
suspected
astray.
gone
il petto
passasse
from
forte
fearing,
:
already
him
an
yes.
effecting any
sia
he
answered
,
purport
non
no.
doubting,
without
Temo
Gli
si; she
di
preventing
or
introduced,
alteration
no;
of
rerbs
After
said
he
stabbing
;
himself.
gl'ingannasse
non
strongly
that
he
;
deceived
them.
This
phraseology,
and
books
critical
it to
;
be
and
examples
di
che
apprehend
might,
three
with
all
as
fear
presto
that
first
both
common
not'
the
in
approved
best
by
in
the
show-
writers
f
seguitati;
essere
in
were
Dubito
the
:
unnecessary
They
In
is
conversation,
Temei^ano
I
though
being followed.
of
la
perderei;
I should
soon
lose
examples, therefore,
propriety,
be
omitted.
it.
the
non
228
ADVERBS.
XXIX"
LESSON
Or
now
Ora
Or
Just now,
ora
Ora.
..
"
Or.
"
.
ora
presently
sometimes
.
.
.
sometimes
or
always
Ognora
Omai
now
Orraai
at
this time
Oggimai
at
last
Oggidl
Oggi a
Onde
to^ay
now-a^^ays
this day se^nnight
whence, therefore
Donde
vi^hence
Ore
where
Oltremodo
very
Oltre
otto
much^
excessii"ely
cio
besides
Oltraccio
moreover^
Ottimamente
perfectly
AU'opposto
on
Piuttosto
^
Pi"
\
presto
the
well
contrary
rather
y
sooner
Prima
before firstssooner
Peggio
worse
y
Pessimamente
badly
very
^most
Parimente
Al
Del
A
likewise
pari
pari
posta
A bella posta
I
on
j
with
purpose
a
design
wretchedly
ADVERBS.
di
Faor
K
In
In
proposito
proposito
palese
pubblico
Paiesemente
23y
preposterously,improperly
to
time
in
(he purpose,
openly, publicly ,
etc.
Pubblicamente
properly
precisely, exactly
at
all, a hit, not^
Fropriamente
Precisamente
Punto
A
dipresso
an
Presso
poco
a
|
|
Pressocbe
Presentemente
kl
|
\
presente
Poco
poco
fa
Poc'
anzi
Qnalcbe
Alcun
A
at
present
I
{
|
I
poco
poco
poco
poco
a
io
passato
Qoando
in
a
a
little while
a
little while
little and
by
the
time
informer
short
time
ago
little
past
,
days
almost
iwhen
che
Quindi
Qiiind
In
as
near
shortly,
Quasi
In
,
possible
almost, nearly
as
or
Per
thereabout
nearly,
little
Poco
Fra
no
questo
questa
quello
In qiiella
IKpiJi
sia
Isome
it is time,
day or other
thence, afterwards
hence
thereupon, during this,
during this time
In
at
that
time
besides, moreosfer
:3o
ADVERBS.
Foscia
Poi
tkertyajlerwards
Dipoi
Dappoi
Presto
quickly,
Prestamente
softly low
softly,
very
gently
Piano
Plan
y
piano
Passo
passo
AlpiJi
at
iat
Per
lo
pi"
II
piikdelle
A
parte
In
Da
una
Per
In
Da
Da
In
a
y
apart
,
parte
on
la
piu parte
la maggior parte
etc
side
one
\ mostly
J
\for the most part
partly
from me, thee, etc.
from
somewhere
when
Quando
whenever
,
sometimes
Quando...
quando
!
now
quando
Qualvolta
Ogni Tolta
Di
Qui
Qua
Quiyi
Quassu
Quaggiii
by
through
parte
parte
parte mia, tua,
parte di
qualcbe parte
party mostly
most
times
most
disparte
parte
slowly
mosty
Ifor the
volte
very
most
aside
Da
Per
soon
in
che
quando
now
sometimes
.
.
.
.
"
.
y
now
and
then
^vhenever
here'
there
here
above
y
here
below
up
here
ADVERBS.
Spesso
Spesse fiate
Spesse Yolte
ses^eral
times
Soyente
Sempre
always ,
every for es^er^
continually
quickly
not
just now
long
J
Mai
sempre
Sempre mai
n"
Speditamente
Teste
ago
Tostamente
Tosto
soon
J
quick
Tantosto
Tardi
late
Tuttora
incessantly^stillyalways
Tuttayia
Di
tratto
Di
taoto
in tratto
in tanto
and
now
Talora
then^
sometimes
Talyolta
Per
tntto
Da
per
Tanto
Troppo
A mio, taoy
where
every
tntto
much
so
muchy
too
sno^
etc.
according
talento
etc.
Sxx
ydown
exceedingly
immediately
Soyercliio
SoYcrcIiiamente
Smisnratamente
Al tutto
Del
wish
under
Sotto
tutto
too
I
j
Snfficientemente
myjthy,hisy
to
above
upf
Sopra
too
to
the bottom
,
y
much
entirely J
all
together
enough, sufficiently
a33
ADTUBS.
Solo
only
Soltanto
Solamente
Scarsameute
scarcely f sparingly
Siccome
as
Similmente
likewise
A
bello
Alia
Di
^
studio
on
purpose
y
openly
secretly
by stealth
sccperta
under
y
soppiatto
wilfully
hand,
Veramente
In Yerit"
In
in truth
truly y
vero
Una
yolta
Una
Gata
AUe
volte
once
times
tat
Qualcbe yolta
Ogni yolta
Pa
y
sometimes
Cilery time , whenever
several
times
often
volte
y
Unquemai
Unqaanco
I
Ultimamente
never
lately y
Per ultimo
at
In ultimo
Da vicino
Volentieri
Mai
volentieri
voglia
volentieri
Di mala
voglia
Adverbs
close
just by
only, singularly
Unicamente
Di buona
last
at
last
neary
Qui vicino
Ben
ever
y
willingly
willingly ,
much
with
pleasure
!very
willingly
unwillingly
i
with
y
ill will
denoting localityin
a
manner
cokre-
2^4
ADYCUBS*
spooding
pronouns
ye
GUm.
Second
Where
ipeaker
the
Where
or
"^
Qasf.
Pint
classes of demonstratU
the three
with
the person ad-
writer it.
G)stl
,
Here
Distant
ii
dressed
Qui
Qaas.
Thiid
cotesti
There
'
a
both.
coli
Uj
j
{referring to
from
spe^
cificplace)
G"st^y cotestA
Qu"
Here
lets determi^
(in a
verbs
grammarians are of opinion that
of place , II, qui, cosii,conyey a
should
former
town
kingdom
attended
;
be
used
and
etc.
9
but
in
common
to
in
speaking of
the
this
etc.:
cosld:
Id, fjua,
than
meaning
lage,
There
sense)
naie
Some
00I"
Uk^
latter
of
distinction
a
a
the ad^
mited
li-
more
the
that
house, yil-
proyince,
is not
much
conyersation.
XXXI.
LESSON
PREPOSITION.
A
I.
has
the
parts
also
prepositionis an
of
to
power
speech
connect
of
indeclinable word, which
varying
to
which
words
the
meaning
of other
it is
applied:
it
with
one
senres
another,
and
235
PIUBP08ITI0NS.
/?a^ before the words
its
as
it is
Italian
some
deviate
from
position,being placed
after
allowed
are
of
rule
which
ly
common-
joined
,
however^
are^
which
tions
with
It is
denotes.
name
There
a.
them.
between
relation
tbe
show
to
and
in poetry
they goyern,
preposi**
the general
the
in elevated
nouns
style in
prose.
3.
Prepositionsare
the
employed principallyin
of
cases
the infinitives of verbs
of them
with
and
nouns
adjectives many
and
pronouns
and, by the
;
verning
go-
,
association
adverbial
modes
^
of
speech
4* The
effected.
are
and
signification
of the Italian
but
such
be
prepositions may
there
da
two,
are
variety and
of
employment
and
per^
most
red:
easilyacquiwhich
in theirs,as
peculiarity
have
demand
explication.
some
DA.
1.
or
Sono
I have
Una
A
like
is used
Da
agency
:
deceived
been
lettera
da
da
ingannato
stato
scritta
letter written
Ferito
tality
instrumenby^iox signifying
una
by
saelta
by
da
lui;
him.
lei;
her.
;
wounded
by
an
arrow.
2
36
p"EPOsiTions.
It is used
2.
separation
or
rence^
La
to
likey/'oi7",
marina
The
da
sera
Da
morte
Siete
a
Tortosa
from
evening
from
sulla
to
momiDg.
life.
to
lui;
different
giace
Gaeta.
to
death
da
assai
dUEe-
Gaeta;
a
vita; from
yery
are
;
tenn^
sort:
Keggio
mattina
a
diverse
You
Reggio
from
sea-coast
Da
of any
denote
him.
casta
^
nove
miglia
nine
miles
da
Tripoli;
Tortosa
the
lies apon
coast
from
^
TripoU.
3. It is used
Noi
prendemmo
We
took
Fu
tenuto
He
Was
4.
cient
ahout
in
kept
It is used
or
Dated
da
venti
in
died
da
prigione
prison
prigionieri;
prboners.
twenty
in
signifyabout:
to
ahout
mesi;
which
signifyingthat
enough
5. It is much
in
suffi^
question
is
:
supper.
in casa;
mangiare
is
months.
ten
requisitefor the purpose
da cena;
gire us some
F'i k da
There
numerals
with
to
eat
employed
the
tude^ capahility,
in the
house.
signifyfitness^aptiinfinitive of/are or of some
equivalentverh being
Quel signore " uomo
That
gentleman is a
to
understood
da
man
:
molto:
of
ability.
^237
PREPOSITIONS.
Egli
He
i
uomo
a
man
non
is not
da
fit for that
tiene
Questa signora
This
lady
lias two
6. It is used
per
which
and
Si
comportb
He
behaved
not
as
I
to
I tell
you
the
and
in protestation
a
brother.
soldier.
bensl
ma
da
vo"
;
as
a
physician,
but
ly
mere-
friend.
I
uomo
am
;
honest
an
man.
d^onore;
uomo
faith
the
natura
contro
medico
galant'
upon
like
valiant
a
y
gli accident
Tutti
incidents
e
of
a
i di
questa
da
romanzo;
of this
of honor.
man
play
commedia
are
sono
unnatural
romantic.
7. Used
or
da
good
as
in
valoroso;
like
yon
you
da
dico
All
da
giuro
swear
Vi
answer
your
mentioned;
him
I lore
soldato
amico
pro*
:
himself
buon
stro
F^i
da
rispondo
vi
Non
becomings
frequent employment
dafratello;
amo
is
character
the
averments
V
I do
duefiglie da maritani;
marriageable daughters*
to
it has
sense
appointment.
signifywhat
to
peculiar
or
J
quell*impiego;
with
it signifies
infinitives^
expediency
or
duty:
necessity
9 propriety
La
gratitudine i sommamente
da
dare;
Gratitude
is
highly
to
be commended.
commen-'
38
3
PBSPOSITIQNS.
*$"/credeva
believed
He
himself
with
8. It is used
of another
person
cavalcare
be
to
for
stout
primitive
signifyalone
to
da
forte
essere
the
thing :
or
venni;
did
not
come.
,
Molte
malattie
Many
maladies
9. It is used
To
his house
To
her
house
To
our
house
your
their
:
house
house
dal senatore,
I shall go
to
Jndremo
daUo
maestro
"
me
(da
habitation,
me,
or
mi
casa
a
be
without
a
a
tua
sua
sua
nostra
nostra
loro
*
the ablatire article n
pronomi
,
date,
the
(that is^
del senatores)
easa
a
senator's.
zio
del mio
maestro
,
(that is" a
casa
del zio
del mio
J
shall go
The
f
the
(i)
"
Jndrb
We
to
i
If ibe substantive
as
motion
father's,
my
\da te, or a casa
\da lui,or a casa
I are
Jda lei,or a casa
" expres( sed by Ida noi,or a casa
\da voiyora casa
\
\daloroyor a casa
j
thy
nsed
a
to
house
To
(I)
is
go
\
my
To
padre;
or
as,
person:
a
house
To
To
of
sS/
per
brevityat, in^
signifywith
mio
there
When
da
themselves.
by
cure
to
da
Jndate
sense.
guariscono
habitation
the
to
in this
is added
per
nouns
pro-
intervention
y
Egli risposeyda nie non
He replied by myself I
Sometimes
riding.
personal
or
without
;
mode
etc.
to
of
is
my
master's
uncle's.
signifyingto
not
to be
used
my
on
house
^
to
thy
house
all occasions,
^
etc.
by
"*f
indiscriminately,
a4o
PBXPOsiTioiirs.
PER.
is used
Per
I.
to
signifymotire, end,
infinitlyes :
particular!
J with
Fard
quanta potrdper contentarvi
or
ject
ob-
;
I will do
much
as
I
as
;
in order
can
to
content
you.
Servird
It will
F'i
dar
per
giye
to
serTe
sample.
a
ricordo
dicoquesto per
tliis for the
I tell you
and
saggic
un
nonperconsiglio;
e
of recollection
purpose
of adyice.
not
Employed with an infinitiye after esse re or
it signifies
si are
something to be impending or
:
expected intended or threatened
Stoperdir\felo; I am going to tell it you.
Egli si a per cadere; he is in danger of falling.
Egliistatoper morirejhe has been near d^ng.
justgoing.
Eglifu per andare; he was
1.
y
,
Quella signora
That
lady
is about
3. It is used
Divenne
He
quasi
per
le
di
cinli
cause
per
,
or
means
vergogna
:
;
for shame.
era
che
ri tarsi;
married.
mute
Catone
cose
ma
be
mutolo
almost
gloria
to
denote
to
became
La
std per
non
quella
celebre
meno
di
Cesare
per
le militari;
The
glory of
famed
than
Cato
for civil affairs
that of Caesar for
was
not
military.
less
2^1
PREPOSlTlOns.
Impazzisce per gelosia;
of jealouay.
He is gettingmad
out
Per le continue
pioggie , ogni rii^o e
unfiume;
By the continued
t
^
is used in the
loro
meno
manner
same
instrumentalityor
Apparecchieranno le
I
rivulet
every
me
is beco-
river.
a
4" Per
rains
divenuio
agency
noting
in de-
da
as
:
che
i^hande
per
Par-
imposte;
saranno
the
They will prepare
required of them
victuals
that
shall
by Parmeno.
Le iue ossafurono sepolteper Ottas^iano;
buried
His bones
were
by Octavian.
si potrebbe muo^^ere
non
Que St o sasso
per
This stone
could
5. It is used
of
or
not
with
be
moved
six. horses.
signify space
to
nouns
by
of
me,
ti-
place:
piu
dl dimorando
Remaining there
Per un
giorno
nore
Let
sei
Hi;
cava
Per
be
quiifi
;
for many
days.
s'attribuisca
a
/'o-
ciascuno
;
honor
the
be
attributed
to
each
for
one
day.
E
per
mare
e
per
terra
^
tultopien
e
di
peri--
COlO;
Both
by land and by
sea^
all is full of
16
peril.
2^^
PREPOSITIONS.
Passeremo
shall
We
6. It
has
Se
non
a^esse
If he
not
Essendo
for
per
moglie
a
dama
una
prudent lady for
a
stato
morte
been
Sbagliano
had
for
il vizi
mistake
o
for
in
in
man
Per
V
di
Dio;
Ti
prego
thee
I pray
8. It is
,
of any
accident
Per
minuto;
Per
the
that
love
e;
by
abjurations:
love
che
God.
of
ti
which
joined with various
to signifythe mode
thing :
Per
Per
for
quell'aniore
by
life, in death
virtue.
supplications and
per
in
virtii;
in
amor
vita^
saint.
a
per
vice
wife.
uomo
is used
7. It
way
pru'
santo;
per
very
a
reputed
is
pessimo
un
riputato
e
Haying
They
cheat.
him
;
had
he
character
or
truff'atore;
per
exposed
dente
nature
things :
palesato
He
Pisa.
by
or
signifythe
to
and
of persons
/
through,
pass
serves
L'ha
Pisa
per
porto;
I bear
nouns
in
bial
adver-
an
method
,
thee.
,
or
ner
man-
accident.
by detail.
vicenda; by turn.
giorno; daily.
9. It takes
the
sense
of
however
y
^luiteverj
243
PREPOSITIONS.
with
sobstantiyes
adjectiyes^and
or
yerb
a
in
subjunctiyemood:
the
Per
pochi
Per
potere ch'ella
che
Whateyer
Ni
Nor
for
that
he
tears
in the
faces-
ducati
uomo;
per
ducats
ten
him.
loose
of distribution:
sense
died
she
would
make^
receiyed
They
che
lamentations
or
groans,
;
could
Riceverono
lamenti
o
sciogliere;
any
It is used
10.
gemitiy
,
lo voile
se,
haye,
she
lacrime
be.
they
abbia;
power
per
few
howeyer
sieno;
a
man.
PREPOSITIONS,
WITH
The
THE
first
case
THEt
CASES
GOVERV.
specifiedis
the
most
one
rally
gene-
used.
Accanto
near-by
Dallato
near,
by^
Addosso*!^":
Addosso
'^P^'^
I
fronte
A
"
ncj
about
and
,
denart
eipr""sionfas,
elr.
me,
ihe
at
the
^^^^^
Non
being nodcrstood).
of
tbe terond
tio denarl
D.
^^^^'l-n
i^against
o^^er
I
carry
turned
addosso
D.
mon"yai"out mcj
personal pronoun
preposition {addosso)
addostoj
side
at
opposite,
tocb
In
about,
goyernstheD.
j
into
is
an
G.
I have
suppressed
adviirb:
(thai is, addosso
m,
a
no
mo-
in
I Lilian
Jo porta
me,
a
me
344
PREPOSITIONS*
^^
K
j
modo
soUj
before
Apple
at
^PP^
I
the
Dayanti
Innanzi
Dinanzi
Prima
Attorno
comparison,
|
D'intorno
/
elegant 9
in
pronoun
D.
G"
j
of J}.
of Ji.
AccG-.
tiye, and
mi
F'oi
gli
You
are
of
Instead
a
considered
language
be
sometimes
sta
turned
being
pronoun
goyemed
Egli
the
to
preposition goyerning a personal
the datiye, with a yerb neuter
in the
Italian,the
all
Ace.
next
D.
a
phrase, may
to
,
peculiarityof
a
But
by
near
jAccir.
to
\
Intorno
torno
G.
foot
before,in the presence
beforeyinthe presence
|before,
) in the presence of
before
Ayanti
in
Ace.
with,
Appresso
be
\
)
Anzi
Bj
compared
to,
by
the
appresso;
siete
attorno
about
him
egli sta
into
he
appresso
stays
il
whole
a
adyerb
conjunc-
as,
tutlo
the
made
then
yerb:
an
near
me.
giorno;
day:
me;^voi
siete
at^
lui.
this sort
of
transposition is
prepositions
-,
for instance
not
applicable
rimaneva
^-.^^gli
245
PRKPOSITIONS.
ambaiciadore
dor
to
lui; he remained
appo
him
rimaneva
be
";annot
:""
ambasciatore
strange and
ambasBa*
transposed
appoj
to
-wieb
egii gli
would
be
improper.
LESSON
XXXII.
PREPOSITIONS
covTiyrtD.
about
Circa
Contro
Contra
!concerning
(against
against
f
Dietro
behind
Dentro
within
Dili
on
that
Di
on
this side
qa"
Dopo
far
after
Entro
within
Discosto
f G.
Ace.
AbL
side
in
J
Eccetto
but
except
J
Sino
Insino
until
^till,
f
Fino
as
far
to
as,
Infino
beside
Foori
i
out
besides
outside
y
except
Infuori
except
Inverso
j
,
Paorcbi
Incontro
D.
over
against
Ace.
but
excepted
opposite
Abl.
f
f
f
about
towards
,
D.
A
cc.
G.
!l4^
PREPOSITIONS.
i tQ^^^^g
nirer,
In
Acc.G.
(i)J
ver
Lontano
j
\far
Lungi
)
Lunge
Lungo
along y
hun^liessoaiongf
Abl.D.
G.
Acc.D.
near
Ace.
it
near
REMARKS.
placed after the case it
t re
infuori; e^ceft three.
is
Infuori
Da
Lohianoanddiscosto
and
to
Sianio
(prep.) dalla
lontano
(adj.)dalla
far from
are
the
become
:
as
:
an
substantiye
the
reference
it has
which
lontani
We
with
agree
each
may
goyems
or
as,
jective,
adnoun
pro-
,
torre,
or
iiamo
torre;
tower.
XXXIII.
LESSON
PREPOSITIONS
C0HT15UCD.
within
v
Tra
{between
I
Infra
\ besides
\
Intra
\
A
1
Fra
In
Da
f
mezzo
mezzo
mezzo
(I) CootracUon
the
i*^
p^*
J
among
|in
)
govern
i
the
middle
Ace.
JD.
I Ace.
of invcrso^
G.
Aco.
a^S
PREPOSITIONS.
is declinable
Satvo
Perdemmo
tut to
salvia
la
Soyra
See
is
-page
La
itimaj
[nostra
or
thing
but
your
esteem.
poetical.
joinedwith
the
cle"
arti-
27.
may
declinable:
be
" vicina
nave
as.
al portOy
or
la
i
nave
w-
al porto;
cino
The
la
stima;
preposition Su
tbe
Vicino
saho
j
nostra
lost eyery
We
also: as,
ship
is
near
harbour.
the
XXXIV*
LESSON
CONJUNCTION.
conjunctionis an indeclinable
stands
abridged expression which
words
two
or
phrases.
word
A
E
and
O
or,
Oyyero,
o
Oppure,
Ossia, o
",
Non
o
sia
.
.
a
link
either
^^^^
'
)
or
\not
che
.
pure
aft
or
)
S not
,
Nonche
vero
,
onlvy
not
merely.
'
only
but
,
not
except
an
tween
be-
^49
CONJUNCTIONS.
Non
"
"
"
Ifon.
"
.
se
.
altro
clie
altra
cosa
"
Non
"
.
non
"
.
I
nothing
nothing
but
j
but
else
che
Pare
Nondimeno
NuUadimeno
ho'wever
Nientedimeno
nei^ertheleis
notwithstanding
for all thaty yet
^
Nonpertanto
Con
Ci6
ci6
tutto
ostante
non
Tattaria
m
noFf
Adunqne
Dunque
then
therefore
consequently
In conseguente
Per
neither
conseguenza
Posciaclid
\since
after
y
PoichA
since
Giacchi
since
!Jrom
Dacchd
y
the
from
the
timcj
moment
but
Ma
Laonde
I
therefore
for which
Pereii
Per
la
qual
cosa
reason
Pertanto
Perciocchd
because
Perocchi
^for
Perch*
Non
Peri
prima
che
no
sooner
....
however^
than
""
.
.
therefore
l5o
CONJUNCTIONS.
REMARKS.
E
before
rowel
a
lo ed
anciently it
O
took
take
may
lo od
IVon
ma
is
I and
Antonio;
d
in
expressed
he.
or
affirmative
an
of different
mattina
One
in the
walk
in
the
but
e
di
tanta
is of such
only
tender
the
On
which
when
ffo
hope
there
at
la
piu alio;
any
but
women
not
only
hour
the
of
comforts
has
it
is
i
vinto
donne;
le tenere
stoutest
che
non
ha
conquered
men.
applied
that
to
considerable
of different circumstances,
the
is
di
ma
che
che
that
power
sentence
negative:
gli conforta
speranza
posa
shade
non
contrary,
is most
Nulla
era
even
che
nan
il sole
potenza
fortissiniiuomini
not
ombray
higher.
Uamore
Love
rable
conside-
is least
adduced:
all*
qualora
morning,
was
sun
its correlative,
circumstances
ma
might
for
which
andare
poleva
81
having
sentence,
understood
or
applied to sigulfythat
Vi
Anthony:
vowel:
before'^'a
egli; I
chCf
as"
t,
a
a
letter d:
the
take
may
minor
respite
them
:
mai
non
che
di
pena;
or
even
(farfrom
of
the
less
pain
ever
hope of respi-
25
CONJUNCTIONS.
te^ not
of
Se
much
so
pain
di
Nkj
if
Io
n^
neither
pensai;
non
eyes of many,
(I should
not
eyen
^
to
I
belieyey
only
not
hare
ved).
belie-
rerb^ requiresanother
the
you
lui
n^
voi
;
him.
nor
nor
did
I think*
expletively,giveselegantemphasis
phrase: as,
Dite
quel
pur
what
Say, now
Andate
pure;
Pure, followed
Lo
crederlo,
it: as^
amo
Pure, used
but
di mol^
say,
JVe io
a
the
it :
but
written
before
I love
to
write
placed after
non
we
di
occhi
ventured
have
hardly
hare
by
seen
still less to
negative
But
heen
not
should
not
mitigation
a
scriverlo;
If it had
and
dagli
io ardissi
eke
tif appena
che
veduto
stato
of
hope
them).
comforts
erer
fosse
non
the
as
1
too
so
che
voleie;
will.
you
do
go.
by troppo,
too
means
4ve//,
well:
pur
troppo;
I know
it but
too
well.
252
CONJUNCTIONS.
LESSON
XXXV.
CONJUNCTIONS
GOTBRnSG
TOB
fUBJUKCTlTB
MOOD.
Quantunque
Ancorchi
AyyegDachi^
Comechd
although
Sebbene
Bencbd
che
Prima
che
Innanzi
sooner
than
cbe
Ayanti
Senza
before y
clie
Che
without
that
order
in
that
J
end
Aceioccli"
to
Affinchd
in
order
that
PercU
in
order
that, although
Se
i/yalthoughySincCyAvhether
the
that
Purche
Solo
clie
Qaalora
Quando
provided^ if
providedyify^^henever^when
ifypros^ided
Doye
ify provided
Oye
Dopo
Subito
Tosto
clie
after
cbe
cbe
as
soon
as
InfinattaDtochi
InsiDattaDtochd
che
Infino
}till,until
Insinoche
Insinchi
Finche
Sinchd
Posto
che
Posto
il
Date
il
^^Pf^'^
che
caso
I
'"
che
case
P"^
^
^^'^'
.
,
'^
,
^^'^
REMARKS.
Sebbene
benchi
and
sometimes^
also
may
heing applied
to
tive
indica-
the
take
of
matter
a
cer-
tainty: as,
Benche
ta
id
tu
delta
thoa
below
of
the
not
be
he
both
in
,
,
:
us
of it.
piu $orda;
no
longer
la
deaf
to
pace^
che);
peace
fearing
or
deprive
may
guages
lan-
expressed; particularly
in Italian
negation y
sia
is
doubting
si conchiudesse
innanzi
Before
of
fear
mi
Pray (tliat)she
Innanzi
and
rerb
a
ceneprM;!
non
degradest thyself
thou
man^
conjunction 9
a
sentence
Pregate
tot-
beast.
as
after
Temo
a
understood
often
a
art
a
C^Ae, that,
in
di
al
degradi
bestia;
Altliough
and
ti
uomo^pur
should
be
concluded*
me.
(instead
of
^54
coNJimcTioNs*
requires the
Se
according
When
tbe
to
indicative
sense
it goes
to
or
tlie
subjunctiy^
in wliich
it is
employed.
express
tbe yerbs
expected circumstance,
it
are
always
Se
andatCj
in tbe
present
voi
(or i^erro) con
If
you
with
If you
Se
io
like, I stay,
when
resterd;
or
will stay.
or
agreeable
se
refers
to
to
I will
go.
you,
contingency altogether
a
imaginary, or merely possiblebut
9
not
or
easy
to
following it
of the
that
avessi
If I had
Sefossi
If I
Se
is
conditional
leale^
wings
ricco
were
conoscessi
put
the
the
into
verb
the
doubtful
rerb
mediatel
im-
imperfect
connected
with
:
volerei;
I would
,
fly.
yjabbricherei
rich,
Tcrj
effect, then
subjunctiye,and
into the
Se
I will
,
andro'.
If it will be
remote
i^engo
campagna^
;
to,
res
J
vorrete,
But
with
you.
vol etc
Se
or
indicatiTC:
{or will go) into tbe country
go
go
in
connected
future
or
(or andrete)
natural,
sure,
a
I would
build
un
a
bel
palazzo
fine
palace.
quel signore, gli
chiederei
;
un
favore;
If I knew
favour.
that
gentleman
I would
,
ask
him
a
a56
CONJUNCTIONS.
che
Subito
soon
tlie
as
giftswere
che
Subito
king
doni
molti
arriyedy
was
fu^
soon
as
will be
a
great many
distributed.
arrivij
subito
or
tlie
che
molti
si distribuiranno
re,
As
fu arrivatOj
re
distribuiti;
rono
As
il
arriverd
ii
doni,-
king arrives, a great manj^
gifts
distributed.
XXXYI.
LESSON
INTEEJECTION.
An
an
interjectioois
emotion
of tbe
an
exclamation
soul*
ah!
Ab!
prompted
ha!
oh!
ho
Abi!
Aime!
!
Abime
Oime
Obime
alas
!
!
Bene
well
Ebbene
Bravo
bravo
J
Gosi
\fery veil
thus
Deb!
alas
,
Eb!
Ecco
loy behold
Gnai
Ob!
prithee ,
oh
pray
by
257
(abbreviatedfrom
Lasso
as
even
lassi!
the
lassato) is declinable
^^-tbus
interjection
according to the gender
an
persons
^
the
whom
from
A/
lassa!
and
number
a
ahi
of
exclamation
may
proceed.
ADDITION
Tbe
rule
20
will be
J
the
more
ARTICLE.
THE
respecting the
according to
art.
ON
Partitii^e
ven
gi-
;
method
common
clear
article
,
and
Zi
page
j
complete by
the
followingexplication.
The
genitive article del^
etc.
before
17
a
noun
258
INTl"RJ^CTIOMS.
withoat
which
would
article
after
ye
yerh
yerb
a
actiye" is
passiye,
Englished
part; porzione, portion;
the
nominati-
accusatiye
or
some
or
any
after
.'
word
some
or
in Italian
being understood
kind
he
y
y
to
a
parte,
of
the
that
goyern
genitiye.
LESSON
XXXVII.
EXPRESSIONS,
IDIOMATIC
sete
[ thirsty
x
fame
I hungry
I
\cold
I persons
jfreddo
jcaldo
g
"^ (ashamed
JJ /vergogna
Jpaura
"
\afraid
"^
Iduey tre,
Itwo^threCySix
years
sei anni
fin
ragione
torto
Ayer
Ayer
Ay
\
yoglia
Averla
ere
per
Clie avete?
ha?
Che
genio
l.^
V"
male
alle mani
,
ai
piedi,etc.
z.
'"*"
s
is the matter
Fare
umido
to
hands
^
be
Jbr
my
thy
with
feet
cold
\
one
-^"
what
^ my
etc,
*"""*
is the matters
caldo
'
mind^'wishy
what
(freddo
u/
wrong
he angry
ivith
to be in a humour
di
etc.
freddo
a
old
right
to
male
a
Ayere
Ho
o
yena^
the
in the
haue
to
uno
con
to
/
jwarm
4,
applied
(cold
\warm
I damp
i bel tempo
I fine weather
Vcattiyo tempo
\bad
weather
,
etc,
ou?
him?
an
IDIOMATIC
25c)
EXPRESSIONS.
ihsxt/arefreddo, caldo^ umido,
said
In speaking of
only of the weatber.
thing else essere
only is used; as,
Note,
are
any
,
La
ifredda^
came
Essere
Jggj^trt
Essere
ridotto
mi-
Essere
di
Essere
padrone
Essere
bene
/ con
Essere
male
^
Essere
pace
"*
i to
be
reduced
\di
i
pari
una
become
to
be
welcome
to
be
in
to
to
cosa
to
/
cannone
circumstances
%ood
to
} to
uno
is cold.
to
dis^
great
Iress
di
or
,
su
in
Essere
^^
'
seria
Essere
^^
I
in
tlie meat
of
good terms'\\vitk
J one
be out
be
to
{at
ei^en
one*s
apply
be within
play)
selfto a thing
gun-shot pis,
^
tiro^di
a
pistola,etc" tol,
Siete
voi?
is it you?
Sono
10
it is I
c'e?
Cbe
what
Andarne
la rita,
(A
Andar
A ndare
Questo
Battersi
\
*""S^"
|
#a
genio
'
non
Addossarsi
d'un
11'
for dorersi)
ya
la
detto
it
to
go and
to
please
^
to
a0are
le guance
be
take
care
di
^/
to
/
be
to
not
or
io
upon
of
repent
an
a
slake"
"
,
to
,
'
at
a
honour
call
right
this is
to
cura
?^
'
^
^
A ndare
matter?
//"/"
*{/^9
"/^' honour
i to have life
J
%
-,:""
't'
uno
per
is the
^
i*onore,etc.
/,i"ii..
1 ii'
shot
etc,
at
slake
one
like
proper
be said
one's
self the
afj'air
:26o
IDIOMATIC
Darla
testa^ sulle
suUa
He,
spa
di
Dar
etc.
piglioa
tor to
^
ragione
J
/il buon
^
g
o
S
I
"^
to
,
capo
\il buon
il ben
Darsi
buon
d
flo lay
the
\to
say
one
j
^.,^
^^
giorno
to
wish
to
bid
yenuto
jOrbel tempo
^o
nel
Dar
on
blame
dttole la testa
on
right
is
^
^
^^^
one
welcome
one
live
a
life
merry
trouble
one's
to
incline
to
self about
*^'*
{ "'^ '"'M ''^*":""^/
pain
in
i
-
arsi
I
Far
capitale
ad
Farla
to
d'uno
f
to
step towards
to
rely
1
uno
Accocargliela
con
Eassarsela
^"^
Luna
giro
passeggiata
alle scale
'^
*
J
converse
to
say
to
take
a
turn
to
take
a
walk
to
come
]"nthi"^
company
to
'""^^
Affrjciarsil
i'""
Bnest^ra
Farsi
'""^*t
"
""^
V^ keep
motto
Faref
"#
^'"^
one
one
upon
uno
\
Far
y
\j
Uo*e."goorf/erm5J
uno
con
etc.
s
)'^
,
Farla
approach
".
uno
yerso
*
head
my
Midolgonoglioccbiietc./iix
eyes ache,
r
^
good morning
a
to
I
T?
one
'^'^^
pensiero di
Darsi
hold
lay
J
anno
Dare
m
io
yinta
Dare
Dar
seek/or a drunken
t/uarrd
to yield^^ogive up the dispute
the headyshoulto strike on
,
\ dersy etc,
il pel neiruoyo
Cercare
Dar
EXPRESSIONS.
^vord
a
^"^
^/'^^
upon
w"W(hv
the stairs
IDIOMATIC
Farsiallaporta,airu8cioto go
-I
rapugni
^^y^
Fare
1
Fa
alle
tu
se
2G1
EXPIIESSIONS.
the door
to
J
pugna
sai
do your
in
"PJ'^Vjg
toempfxiUel/]
ivorst
^^
Far
focc
di
f Tista
-p
^^
I
Fare
a
Venir
1/0
pretend
j
make
di
sembiante
to
to
go
halves
fatto
to
happen
/o"ow
''^'
^YaTla^' '''''^'*''
}^^'^^^^
il denaro
Talere
Far
Insidiare
alia
ta
la vi-
a
^*
a
Insidiare
onore
-.
Mancar
/ un
S tomake
to have
1 uomo^
i
f
\to have
j^**^
j
alF
'
di
,.
di
\
,
parola
Mancare
al
Mancare
alia lezione
II denaro
Le
Non
forze
the money
to turn
to
good
use
attempts
i
upon
a
designs
i
man^slife
suo
mi
mi
si puo
designs upon
importa
one's
honour
I
f
to
break
one*s
word
|^^disappoint
dorere
y
to
neglect onc*s duty
to
miss
manca
Jam
mancano
my
fare
1
scrivere
Ithere
the
letrson
short
of money
strength/ails
me
I doing
is
no
parlare '
Non
^^^^'^
/
Insidiare
onore
^'^^'^ '"^"^^
\
Tita di
Insidiare
if^
believe
meti
Th^r}^^"**^
at
Jwriting
'speaking
it does
not
signify
2G2
Clie
IDIOMATIC
importa
Che
monta
Che
vi fa?
a
voi?
|
voi ? etc.
a
phrases
What
is it to
you
tavola
a
vada
cloth
to
sit down
to
to
sell
Mettere
hottega
to
set
Mettere
in
c
far
r"on
conto
cale
to
^^^ cervello
) to
'a
S
del
to
1 sesto
Dar
Jcosa
ad
jto
una
ad
una
cosa
le
mani
fuoco
Morir
di
neglect
^
force
right
be
do
to
one
\vhat
is
loser
a
put
thing
a
Morir
di fame
Morir
di sete
sul
"
find
^ to
swear
K to
take
^
,
in
order
,
^
remedy for
a
oath
an
long for
to
starve
thing
a
it
to
to
with
it
on
hunger
"
\'^
.
di sete
^
{to
voglia
Struggersi
care
,
J
sesto
Metterne
to
|
sesto
Porre
Trovar
partito
suo
in
Mettere
shop
a
up
K
tt
Metter
auction
^
i f^ot
\
M
by
table
-^
1
j"
di
1.
?
to
aU'incanto
t^
cold?
there
Mcttere
non
suhjunctive
depart
lay the
to
la tavola
Mettersi
yoiu?
to
XXXVIIf.
in cammino
IVIetter
the
if I go
LESSON
Mettersi
is that
govern
ch'io
V* importa
Che
!what
'
last
These
EXPRESSIONS.
,
^^
,
,
.
"^hoahng with
.
,
,
.
thirst
26J\.
dal
Tenere
servitik
sacro
cbe
to
UDO
COD
mi
poco
\
fonle
Lerare
have
1/
teogo
I
DOD
Appena
Ir
"*
clie
noD
Saper
di
did
bn-ihe
si tcDoe
I
I
smoky,
taste
|
sweet
d'agro^etc.
)
sour
,
etc.
j
thejiddle
|the flute
1 the guitar
\
\
il flauto
Ito
la chitarra
)
play
upon
]
carte
f-
j
till
| to
til
*
^^opV^^^^
not
fumo,
di dolce,
yiolino
n
^/tl^esttb-
_
I point
EgH poD
.-i
#i.^verbin
..
P^'?'/!?
to
not.
one
-^i^
to
.-
^
or
\
great
a
mind
I
che
tenni
mi
god'-father,
godmother to
with
be acquainted
stand
ito
battesimo
Tenerea
Per
EX.PRESSIONS.
idiomatic
t
cards
Ialle
"'^ccSUplayatUhess
a
i
onare
.j t^^j^jj^,^
il
Toccare
^draughts
dama
^^
colj.
Cielo
j'^
dito
sul
Toccare
la
Toccare
Toccare,
Tocca
\
^^
y
a
sta
or
me^
a
Itti etc.
_
a
'^"^*
*
^
shake
ad uDO/o
maDO
i.^"^
,',^
^"''^ ^^'W^
orl
vivo
nel
te
yivo,
,
*^
drum
^^
^^^
*r
^^^
s
^^
hands
"
with
i drii^e
1
.
one
ismy^thy^histurnorduSy
\it belongs to me,thee,him^ic.
( it
9
,1
t
^"'^*
o/i
1
,
.
IDIOMATIC
Torre
)
-r""
}
I.
i.
( /o bear
.
di
nno
'jSpXnnbastimento
I
I
'
|
suspect
or
to
borrow
to
hire
a
H
casa
ad
ne,
pigio-j
a
yeder
Tora
mill* anni
Venir
alle mani
Venire
Venire
a
be angry
to
laugh ai, not to value
long, to be anxious,
impatient
to
come
to
incur
in mente
Venire
a
Venire
Venir
Venir
e
sano
a
salyo
^
\ safely,
|to
arrive
\
to
thrive
^^
*"'''
\
^^
I da
Vdl
grande
signore
per
di
/
^^^^
to
be
live
i
)
\
safe
or
sound
""*
^^^P^^'
convenient
mouth
water
one's
I estate,
to
j
i.
^'"'^
'
and
( upon
I
alia
*""
one's
make
"N
\
Viyere
*
'"'"
^
tunity,
j
8UO
*
come
^"
*'''^''''""''
to
Wa
displeasure oj
|to
\
|
rdel
the
j
bene
destro
destro
one
blows
to
*
'^
salyamento
with
'""""'
s^
Arriyare
^
}
cuore
Cadere
one
to
|
disgraziadi
in
j^^^^
jto
Parer
one,
.
(
amtto
con
nno
Pigliarsela
Pigliarea gabbo
Non
to
vessel
a
nolo
una
grudge
^
^
a
I
mira
Pighare j
"ad imprestito
V
Q"
2G5
EXPRESSIONS.
or
own
income
nobly
f like
\from
Vorrei
cbe
/ wish
that
Vorrei
potere
/ wish
J could
a
gentleman
hand
to
mouth
2
66
EXPRESSIONS.
IDIOMATIC
Volerebenea
male
Volere
dire
Voler
_-
a
Voler
(fordorersi)
ir cauti
VuoUi
to
hate
one
to
wish
to
^i^^eaten
to
be
relates
as
tbe
to
say
to
,
mean
rain
rain
to
right or proper
ought to be cautious,
we
grammatical
weii
one
(fit would
as
^^
COLLOCATION
The
to
^
j
piovere
Volersi
love
\to look
.
-
wish
to
WORDS.
op
of
eonstraction
of
goyemment
words,
them
as
with
far
spect
re-
gender, number, case, time, etc. has
several
in the
been
already shown
parts of
speech so fullj, that nothing essential of that
to
kind
remains
few
A
explanation.
collocation
however,
may,
and
of words,
Conjunctive Pronouns,
of the
which
dative,
or
(accusative ,) in which
much
the
most
they
frequently, the
two
a
matter
In
Varchi's
of the
conjanclive
desire
never
work, L*"jto/ano,
philological
to
learn
yet been
prononns;
concerning
and
them
completelyreduced
after
to
an
all, much
is not
former
there.
rules of
is
of the
reverse
is
gether
to-
occur
cases
being justthe
usually placed first,
have
is
two
one
would
particularly
gether,
tocome
conjunctive pronouns
serving for an oblique case, (genitive,
ablative,) the other for the objective,
When
.
(l)
added
be
nicety.( i)
some
I
for
observations
the
upon
of
,
extensive
that
a
lysis
ana-
student
Perhaps they
position.
position they commonly
English.
of
treating
take
when
this
have
of
Examples
which
to
pronoans;
267
WORDS.
OF
COLLOCATION
expressed
appeared in
the
following
be added:
may
Mi
si
He
threw
Non
gtitto ai piedi
himself
Every
at
feet.
my
bring himself
not
Ognuno
;
indun^isi;
sapea
He could
la concede
s^e
to
it.
;
yieldsit to you.
Concedaglisi ; be it granted to him.
IVon
ci si \"orrd piUfar rimprovero
No
one
will
more
Cassio
aimed
in
occur
as
the
of
in these
Veniva
He
order
us.
it.
;
in
from
rule
which
harshness
it.
of
position
it is altered
,
ayoiding
vedermivi
a
to
Innanzi
3.
from
general
cases
to
ambiguity:
or
instances^
came
Before
this
to
few
sake
made
dissuadinghim
at
some
be
;
;
dissuadernelo
a
Exceptions
1.
him
averted
Mirava
He
reproach
lo dislraeva
ne
Cassius
for
in
agli
his
in
me
see
occhi
eyes he
Without
any
is sometimes
licence:
aS;
;
se
it, (in that
place)
gli preseniava
presented himself
such
"
;
to
expediency, the
inverted
by poeticalor
him.
usual
torical
rhe-
208
COLLOCATION
disse
Lo
mi
Lo
gli diede;
Instead
of,
deviations
;
OF
he
said it to
he
j
But
and
confined
to
is found
in
are
sucb
diction.
elevated
4* A. general exception
the
him:
glieio diede.
frequent;
not
arc
me.
it to
gave
lo disse
me
^ORDS"
oi
placing
after
ne
adjunctsof
the
the rule
to
and
le,
passive,
other
neuter,
nal
pronomireflected
or
verb:
Se
ne
lay
par
for both
happen
5. It may
the
renders
which
verb
is then
51
pronoun
il
Mediante
6.
which
It
to
oblique
them
Le
Nel
In
la si
one
learn
may
for
together
come
be
ne
parlai;
placed
che
caso
any
for
it.
Cke
te
I
two
both
nepare;
ted
reflecjunctive
con-
;
conjunctive
serving in the
the
instances
thus
ear
directs
:
spoke
altri
one
si
it.
,
to
the
other
pud imparare
happen
also
or
in
,
in which
case
case
as
quale
means
may
pronouns
:
the
preceded by
Le
being
one
case,
passive, neuter,.
,
By
levar-
to
pronouns
accusative
objectiveor
that
viene^
ne
se
etc.
seney
the
vadoy
ne
me
her
to
gliene
should
how
of it.
desse
biasimo;
attach
blame
appears
it to
to
you?
him
COLLOCATION
By
7.
of
of those
one
language9
from
taken
OF
369
WORDS.
peculiaritiestermed
conjunctirepronoun
a
tlie verb
wliicli
idioms
is sometimes
it
longs
properly beand placed before a preceding yerb :
I
io piacere^ mifarebbe diletto;
Credendovi
light.
deThinking to please you it would give me
di
Mostrb
uolersi
seemed
He
be
to
to
lei vendicare;
di
willing to
himself
revenge
of
her.
order
The
period"
or
rather
arrangement
or
rhetoric
to
be
it may
wholly
far
as
Tn Italian
than
the words
the
sometimes
of
idiom.
force
9
therefore
are
,
or
them
I.
prose
in
common
writers
familiar
The
or
verb
;
leave
to
less
neverthe-
the
subject
sometimes
sentence
direct
order; and
the
the
of the
nature
expedient
often
are
dom
free-
fluency of diction, and
speaking
regulatethem
grammatical rule; a few
best
to
From
To
writing.
of
a
inversions
these
clearness
,
positionsapproaching
of the Latin
for
tence
sen-
a
arbitrary belongs
grammar
and
simple
most
take
language y
to
in
here.
^
preserve
it is
as
acceptablenot
unnoticed
of words
is
as
well
beyond
examples
will, however,
help
as
reach
the
from
to
in
the
render
the student.
bject
frequently put before its sunominative, in any part of a period.
is
COLLOCATION
370
the
At
Soileyarono
These
;
gli gli animi
const
di
Guicciardini.
"
stirred
counsels
new
WORDS.
beginning.
ffuestinuoui
Italia
tutta
OF
the
minds
all
of
Italy.
Diede
il
to.
di
conto
re
qui
Thus
Jn
il mio
service
libri
The
e
divisa
objectireor
the
before
opera-
tlie end.
correre
puo
far my
tre
1.
a^eva
Sarpi.
"
At
Fin
che
quelle
verb
accusative
intoppi che
iraversano
,"*"
had
They
quest*opera,
le
tutte
Corticelli.
is often
put
:
la strada
dai
duris-
imprese
umane
at-
Monti.
the
already cleared
which
obstacles
"
case
it refers
gid sgombrata
j4veifano
simi
extend.
may
which
to
servigio;^-MontL
way
of
the
lent
vio-
all human
oppose
en-
terprizes.
satebbe
Non
vol
It
medesimo
would
show
to
reasonable
precede
"
should
you
yourself.
the
verb
are
also
it:
Delia
;
to
intendo
leggiadrianon
Tasso.
gracefulness
I intend
not
a
J'^Tslsso.
that
governed by
cases
gionare
Of
be
not
Genitive."-
%'oi dissimile
che
vi dimostriate
yourself dissimilar
3. Other
made
ragionevole
to
argue.
di
ra^
COLLOCATION
^-ja
alle
Gid
He
Proruppe
in
da
sceva
what
from
It is
into
to his
place of abode.
la
riflettuto
had
separated by
quale
no-
avea;
exclamation
an
he
Guicc.
era/-"
esclamazione
una
cid che
burst
WORDS.
ritomato
case
sue
already retarned
was
He
OF
which
arose
reflected.
a
clause
of
several
words
interyening:
le
furono preservate
If on
de* soldati
mani
"
The
dalle
che
fosseroj
non
di Barbara
esempi
chiese
brutti
con
late.
deso-
feritdy spogliatee
Davila.
norainatiye
is
the
put between
participle
and
auxiliary:
Vvi^fXo
Fu
fatto
office
The
6. A.
precedes the
Genitive.
tore
Egli
"
,v"
solo
potrd
He
alone
my
Come
noun
the
genitiveor
dative
in connexion
with
delle
Essendo
guerre
king.
frequently
it :
rimasto
uinci-
Guicciard.
delle
esser
giudicej
be
can
ragioni e della
vostre
judge
"
of
fede
mia
Monti.
your
reasons
and
of
fidelity.
di
faccia
It deserves
a
re;
performed by
was
in the
noun
dal
very
gravissima
menzione
to
have
calamity
merita
se
ne
;^^ldem.
mention
gi^eat calamity.
made
of it
as
of
OF
COLLOCATION
Dative.
All'
"
util
273
WORDS,
avrb
i^ostro
riguardo;^
Tasso.
preyaleva alio sdegno la cupi^
pontefice
esaiiazione
ditd sfrenata deW
de'Jigliuoli;
IVel
Guicciardini.
"
In the
boundless
pontiff;
of his
desire
children
prerailed
ABBREVIATION
retrenchment
The
for the
ment.
resent-
oyer
WORDS.
of
of
tion
exalta-
initial vowel
the
of
a
practisedhj the early Italian writers,
The
curtailment
has long been disused.
of
but
is general and common;
word
at its termination
a
and
to be required in many
seems
cases
by the
word
was
of the
nature
language.
In
speaking
often
retrenched
even
is
these
at
consonant
regulated by
I. A. word
vowel
a
and
along
the
ending with
curtailed
four
writing Italian, a vowel
the end of a word,and sometimes
when
it.
The
ctice
pra-
following principles.
a
vowel
it is
liquids,I, niy
with
is
n^
may
have
preceded by
r.
18
one
that
of
374
ABBRBVIATIOH
EXAMPLES.
/ after
I
e
a
I
O
'
cluoIo..dQol
U
inale..inal
cieIo..cieI
vne..vU
faUle.."Ul
fedele..fed"l
wilb
.gtnlil fig1iaolo...6gU"
gentile,
cnrtailmcnt
nol
u
ever
diaino..dijHn
direino..direm
amiaiiio.amiam
s"mo.sem(poe-
with
{before
an
nomo.
m,noretrench"
is and*
with
is made
ment
ticallyfor/io-
niw
none
.uom
an
befoit
hardlT
/is
H
b^
m
mo)
n
Tino..vin
n"aoo..man
leno..
inTano..inTaD
appieno.appienmatlino
sen
ntto..aD
saono..snon
.mat-
perdono.perdonalcuncalcu
tin
mare,
.mar
andar"..aDdar
bere..ber
dire..dir
6ore..fior
pensiere..pen-
desire. .deiir
doLore.. dolor
pure, .pur, ii
the ODiy
aIlora..allor
sier
word
car-
tailabiewilb
this vowrl
without of'
fending(be
ear
!""""
PoeU
ictfuroM.
EXCEPTIONS.
I.
No
curtailment
singular of
persons
the
be
it would
indicatiye:
pcrdono
to
wrong
,
made
in
the
first
though
al-
therefore
,
substantiye
the
be
can
may
say io
be
perdon
led
curtaifor io
perdono. (i)
(I)
Tasso
layunder
line of his great poem
( Amico
until
grace
J
the
censure
of the
critical for this elision ins
:
hai vinto
i
-^
io U
perdon
j
"
perdona )
latelythat the grammatical fault has been turned into a poetical
by the taste and iugennity of Pcrticart in making it the brokcB
ariiculati"n of
,
an
expiringperson.
or
There
is
io
^or
2.
for io
can
feminine
-writing and
of
a
be
muclc
in
consequently, la Roman
sol voUa^
una
are
improper: Loth
matro^
speaking require la Roniana
volta.
sola
una
by
Yet
error
common
a
,
sol
una
s^olta
is
so"
said.
metimes
and
3. Masculine
or
curtailed^ unless
nerer
is tolerated
nrhich
plurals in
feminine
rather
;
II. When
/,
the
tion
restric-
tono.
curtailment
any
this
terminations;
matrona^
naj
from
singleexemption
a
son
,
2^5
WORDS.
n,
as
Caval
in the
Trar
the
for
dom
sel-
three
quids
li-
terminating yowel,
syllableis sometimes
following words:
(no), andran
poetry
of
the
(lo)yfiumicel
Van
the
are
ce
hy poetical licenthan
approved.
consonant
precedes
r,
of
entire
double
a
i,
ched;
retren-
(Io),Tcssil (io),fanciul
(no), den
(no), pon
(Io).
(no), (in-
deggiono, possono).
(re),seer
(re),scior (re),(for Iraere,
scc^
gliercy sciogliere).
But
this
retrenchment
of
an
entire
syllable
almost
exclusivelyto poetry, with exception
of the third
plural of verbs, as
persons
han^ dan^fany
daran,Jaran,
sa~
san,
ai^ran^
belongs
prany
and
etc.; which
common
even
retrenchments
in prose.
are
allowable
27O
ABBREVIATION
The
in
plural of
but
poetry,
in /// is also
nouns
in
different
a
abbreTiated
augelli^
manner:
capelliyioT instance, being
reduced
angeif
to
capei.
III.
There
wilhout
Frate
words
four
are
regard
to
ment
-subjectto curtailforegoing rules yiz.
the
tofraj brother;
:
when
(monastic appellations^)
with
proper
a
rotea
in other
:
si fece frate
the
former
the
though
Anastasia
when
an
latter
is
,
this word
,
disse;
Sant*
as
is
yet
nor
andarono
Roma
a
,
before
vedcre
per
vowel:
But
abbreviated
San
to
a
Antonio.
is not
,
:
an
as
stance
for in-
il
santo
or
nine
femi-
(the holy father):
,
Grande,
as,
plural,)to
or
re,
gran
vowel
a
(whether
great,
singular
before
curtailed
not
are
Do-
suor
j
appellativebefore a vowel,
thxiSyfrate Alberto, suor
Sant*
Francesco,
adjective
,
conjunction
Giovanni
suora
and
consonant,
a
padre
:
in
sister;
^
(substantive masculine)
saint
San
la
Minore^
,
as,
thej
cases
suor
:
Santo
before
used
as/ra
name,
to
suora
it
gran
may
masculine
gran
before
regina,
either
be
gran
sonant:
con-
a
cose:
contracted
to
grand* ingiuria, or
or
grande mogrande ingiuria; grand* uomo,
initial e, it will naturallybe conbefore
mo:
an
contracted, grand* eroe.
grand'
or
given
at
full:
as,
Of
Some
IV.
and
de:
{roxafeee;
but
tbcy
ducible
dii
both
pocoyfh
number,
:
as,
fromyj?-
diede; pik from
from
in
few
are
also contracted
are
and
pic^
hardly
re"
rule.
to
the
In
words
i^oglio,po* from
I'o'from
dt
other
H']'^
WORDS.
at
rapidityof pronunciation a vowel
re
of a word
will often be suppressed befo,
end
the
another
and
;
which
with
met
are
rowel
under
come
of this kind
elisions
many
rule, being
no
merely as
wholly arbitrary9 and considered
of orthography: snch
slb^ pot rebb* esse
cent'alirij sctt'anni, poc'anzif onest'uomo,
The
y.
cacophony
dei
as,
reij
would
ear
de*tuoij
though
By
y
the
y
yet
in
would
instead,
rule
is
Two
suoi
to
for instance,
which
; at
the
requires de^rei,
and
so
in
a
less
number-
sufficiently
perceptible,
make
in
word
such
a
when
in
co\ ne\ pe\
to
su\
sui.
restrictions
that
are,
article
plural
contracted
general
ending
any
the
nei, peij
abbreviation
words
such,
therefore
instances
same
coi
VI.
and
tracted
con-
expedient,
sound:
iuoiy dai
are
re,
less strong.
composition
from
dei
suoi
variety of
ai, dai,
whenever
bad
or
revolt,
da'
dei
^
de\ a\ da\
to
avoid
articles
plural
cence
li-
a
vowel
it
an
word
end
take
cannot
which
before
of the
#
in
licence
a
in
place
is accented
impura
of
;
nor
if elision
consonant,
by
a'jS
VI ATIOW
ABBRE
of tbe
reason
liarslmess
tbat
wliicli
would
duce
pro-
be
will
far
perceptible in genii I spirilo^
stretti
studio^ fanciul scostumaiOy
slan
San
Stefano,
as
,
^
must
studio
full
at
say,
Stefano
If, howerer^tbe
word
end
to
before
in
scoglio.
curtailment
Yowel
a
it
impura:
egli e
as,
will
be
may
,
s
we
strettij
stanno
scoslumatOj
grande
y
of wbicb
length, gentile spirito^fare
fanciullo
y
Santo
scoglio: instead
gran
tbe
cause
made
eren
po'stupido;
un
nan
vo' studiare,
elision of tbe
Tbe
and
compounds
its
of these
former
The
VII.
admissible
rest
only
diam
presto:
would
preclude
necessarily
grande
so
cost
y
In poetry
a
pronouns,
as
mode
a
exceptions
uom
become
but
is
to
tlie
pal
direm
inyersion
,
presto
nevertheless
in
an^
the
words
make
them
amore
,
diremo
tbe
same
cost,
of
,
not
dolorc;
the
and
contraction
lascivo
to
sentir
and
an
does
oyer
passes
d'onore:
azzo,
moreorer
pause
or
Giovanni;
that
the
word
a
stress
word,
lascivOj gran
amor
of
when
Signor
chiaro;
parlar
and
restrictions.
such
in
as
tlian
,
contraction
upon
next,
monosyllable
rather
che
articles,in
in
is considered
rowel,
orthography
of
in
,
anotber
before
yowel
palazzo
andiamo.
this rule of restriction
is
qSo
abbreviation
of
awkward
eontractions
words.
and
utter
to
anpleasing
"
hear.
to
IX.
We
three
the
of
out
prosodj
rola
plana
their
conclusion,
in
classes
of
words
distinguished
is
y
in
remark,
raay
parol
by
which
haye
nature
effected
hj
parola
tronca,
is
prosodaic
two
lian
Ita-
f/7aro/a troncajpa-
sdtucciola,)
a
that
change
a
of
these
accented
on
any
ahbreyiations.
The
the
first
last
The
the
on
sort,
syllable,
merci
as
y
second
sorty
penult
or
parola
last
pieid.
has
the
one,
as
pi ana^
but
syllable
accent
pane,
gentile.
The
third
accent
by
gentil
then
the
syllable
but
of
curtailment
becomes
piana
because
the
termination,
tronca
y
the
accent
then
rests
as
on
in
pan,
the
last
,
syllable;
piana
last
or
has
simile.
any
parola
idrueciola,
parota
antepenult
amanOf
as
Now
the
the
on
two,
sort,
y
rests
as
and
the
in
aman,
on
the
parola
simily
last
becomes
sdrucciola
the
because
syllable
but
one^
accent
28l
ADDITION
LETTER
A
OF
to
WORDS.
By
added
words
to
When
rerjr
and
witb
an
thus
$
for
the
scogliOj
in
nonisperOf
per
{
of
be
softening
it is
but
prefixed
the
sound
,
st
per
ringer
elegant
more
di
icoglio
^
a
ning
begin-
one
may
$perOj
Utringere
has
language
by
per^
as
,
an
non
conGned.
very
followed
sake
of
is
sometimes
consonant
a
the
impura^
instead
tcoglio
in
is
9
di
licence
sort
number,)
latter
this
ending
small
the
to
but
is
vowel
a
,
which
(of
y
;
Word
a
etc.
con
licence
opposite
an
to
in
c^
say
iscO'
glio.
the
When
particles aylo;
followed
immediately
a
yowel
already
in
^
a
is
,
from
Ed
to
such
ivi
preyent
concourse
presto
andare
parente.
a
commonly
mentioned
order
by
in
word
of
of
hiatus
vowels:
o^
with
them
to
for
(as
,
those
that
are
or;
beginning
joined
treating
the
and;
e^
particles,)
would
arise
instance
^
le
^"^cominciarono
f^nonfece
'motto
ad
genti
amicoy
od
ad
a
282
ACCENTS-
Italian
In
more
less
sparingly than
OTcr
a
English.
in
of
accent,
whose
meaning
varies
which
accentuation
ced
plafalls
,
when
vowel
that
Balia
to
power
,
,
(accentuated
nurse,
6r/tf, contracted
it from
the
latter
Li' accent
o
the
cey upon
word
marked
on
first
the
^
(') the
terminating
when
that
syllahle).
guish
distin-
to
lable
dissyl-
a
vowel
vowel
is
accent,
grave
of
pla-
syllable
poly-
every
is accentuated
in
virtu.
in the
in the' third
preterite,and
ro;
,
as,
accentuated, viz.
J
balia
monosyllable).
a
accordinglyused
P arid
from
gii^a^ verh,
Caritdy merely perd^
of the
,
distinguish it
from
grave
pronunciation:
It is
as
:
gidy adverb; (the former
,
the
is
accute
in words
yowel
difference
a
accents
or
prints marks
than
and
in French,
acueo,{') the
Uaccento
upon
used
sparingly
are
with
and
writing
6rst
and
parts
persons
third
future
indicative
feme,
sentl; parlerby
parlerd
temerd
,
:
of
verbs
so
singular of
persons
lar
singu-
as,
temerd,
senti^
sentird.
,
Monosyllables consistingof
two
vowels
which
ACCENTS.
make
ibis accent
dlphtliongtake
a
Towel:
83
2
the
orer
last
aSy
"
It
is
also
single Towel
tbej
are
monosyllables baring
by
taken
tbe
discriminate
to
a
in
wbieb
different
sense
sense
y
from
employed
tben
witbont
tbey bear
distinguisbed
wbicb
a
tbe
tbus
accent:
are
,
^
from
(ycrb) is
chi
si
(pron.) tbat
che
because
(conj.)
(pron.)bimself
*M(cont)-i
ld\
se
if
(conj.)
""
(pron.) Mm
//a
|(adr.)tbere
ni
Ili
nor
(conj.)
(") dieresis^bas been
Spanisb
guisb
mode
editions
late
syllablesfrom
are
adopted
from
printing,and introduced
poets in Italy, to distin-
wbicb
otber
blended
Conveniente
of
of tbe
words
tbose
Towels
(pron.) us.
ne
dieresi
La
tbe
(art.)tbe, (pron.)
ber,it
(pron.) tbem
|
II '
in
conj.)and
e
ie
words
into
a
and
in
io
separate
are
wbicb
diptbong:
tbose
two
as,
^furioio oriente, punizione.
,
Tbese
tbree
prescribeany
different
accents
or
marks
do
variety of pronunciation*
not
Tbe
a
84
ACCSNTfl.
first U
the
noticed
not
all Italian
in
perhaps in none*
language, (i) the
last
of the
it also
is in
In the
second
hest
,
dictionar
j
is used
alone
as
,
of the
some
and
grammars
hest
recent
edition
of
mark
of
poetry.
('} the apostrophe
"'a/705^rq/i;
is
a
y
contraction
languages
denote
to
article,has
The
letter
the
It is
they
the
the
in Italian
he
to
are
same
with
and
chiefly with
a
and
familiar.
be considered
of
nature
o:
to
^
a
hard
pronounced
before
as
c
a
Its
vowel.
a
is
may
in the
present head,
placed
of
elision
already rendered
been
h
European
modern
Italian, which
in
employment
the
in all the
common
as
der
un-
mark.
a
denote
before
e
that
and
i,
in
ChetOj chiaro, ghermire^ ghirianda.
This
letter
is
annexed
moreover
to
the
few
the
of grammatical
for
sake
following words
distinction, without
altering their pronunciation
:
viz.
Ho,
haiy
ha
Oh!
ahi!
ah!
O, conj.aiy
(I) Alberti's
,
art.
inter j.)
rf"rA/(
a, prep.
6 Toluroes,
(tromai^ere)
hannoy
9
4*^*
annOy
Lncca
,
subst,
1797"
l8o5.
de'^
art.
EXERCISES
will
TiiET
be
more
LESSON
VI.
diligentthan
this
genlleman.
This
pen
aignore.
is
not
so
good
the
as
You
other.
altro,
She
is
couch
as
respected
eat
much
as
as
mangiate
the
as
friend.
your
it vo"tro
They
queeo.
have
as
many
riapeltata
1
soldiers
as
8
had.
we
Do
avevamo,
than
do.
you
(line
of
battle
(yatcello
=;
Albion.
You
older
are
so
We
much.
pagseggiate
zz.
This
walk
not
than
da
less
passeggiamo
ship )
is
the
larger than
grande
guerrd)
have
They
captain.
my
walk
not
so
vecchio
patience
much
as
required
neceaaario
pazienza
diflicult
is
undetlaking.
impreaa
as
you
ilian
thought.
There
credevate,
Vi
they
fpeak^
and
parlano
they
write.
Cicero
Cicerone
was
end
an
a
long
and
zz
so
difficulties
many
di/ficolut^fem.)
incontrammo
some
are
persons
who
wriie
better
acrivono
there
ve
find
not
=:
to
condurre
per
did
We
bring
to
are
others
who
speak
belter
than
ne
more
eloquent
eloquente
than
Antony.
Antonio,
It
zz
2
EXERCISES.
it better
late
than
Friend
never.
hnrt
yon
,
oor
can."c.
allanosiracaiua
noetic
.
Why?
with
speak
You
Perchef
it
in
hospitality
provioces of
the
otpitalita
capital.
due
happy
The
his
to
alia
dovuio
wine
di
than
di
than
io^
are
we
eui
have
we
Aen
than
foolish
yooth.
than
hope
reads
In
in
nelia
vosira
state
in
"Why
are
temere.
others?
the
than
yoor
sitnation
the
fear.
to
da
sperare
a
^^68'
gioveniu
downcast
osU
n
He
yours.
more
are
your
to
our
del
in
more
more
to
alia
Jblle
da
more
than
noUe
^
you
is older
nonjoste
vecchietta
this affair is
esperienza
Ton
than
ajfare
heviamo
were
yon
of
experience
sua
by night.
giorno
age
and
drink
we
che
by day
kiagdonx
regno
termination
sagacita edalla
forta,
great
a
conclusione
sagacity
sua
strength.The
old
Theie
pradence.
proyincia
Jelice
more
than
maggiore
more
in the
zeal
in"nre
The
lesson
you
depresto
writing
are
state
he
exercise
Croesus
than
covetons
avaro
he
is.
I take
Se
belter
his.
of
The
io
wealthy
fossi dovixioso
of
use
more
Jo
(Were I) as
riches
my
dellemiericchezze
=
nonjece eglidelle
re
a
farei
did)
dormouse.
(in summer).
make)
thao
more
beve
dT estate.
(would
drinks
ghlro.
d'inyerno
Creso
(he
a
dormite
I
He
mia
than
sleep more
( in winter)
esercizio
mine.
della
Ton
eats.
than
than
scriyendo
mangia
as
eaisier
is
richer
a
is
man
the
mo-
sue,
The
more
I drink
hevo
the
more
thirstyI
assetato
S
Thoa
ihe
art
1
careless
most
traicurato
is vtrj
A
popalous.
/urioio
1
2
tile
though
uano
sebbene
manduste
are
joo
last
V
anno
gHth
of
were
and
unripe,
are
than
do.
you
than
worse
He
is
a
it?)
(Look at)
is
It
o'clock.
one
son-dial.
the
oriuolo
opera
begins
at
I
o'clock.
five) (It
wants
sono
think
a
sole
(It
I
a
is
a
quarter
We
dine
it
ehe
past
.znsono
9
half-past eight.
every
=
left
uteii
foie
man.
vni.
ineomincia
four
comporia
credo
Guardate
at
behaves
9
1
day
Si
no"tro.
upright
very
He
e
siano
lour.) The
mal-
integro.
is
o'clock.
two
eat
unwho-
very
ours.
(^^j)
LESSON
ora
ei
not
eonseguenta
=:
o'clock
you
ehe
Do
consequently
in
is
servant
(adv.)
in
apricots
ripe.
very
be
not
=:
The
1
Che
Do
maturo.
domestico
(What
mer-
mercan-
set
Sicily.
handsome.
aeerbo
Your
sano
worse
six
Sieilia.
scorso
=r
pesea
lesome.
burra$ea
coast
very
yesr,
peaches; they
any
threw
albieoeea
us)
sent
storm
meridionals
bastimenio
vain
(
southern
the
on
town
1'
9
vessels
chant
Tioleat,
This
eheioconotca.
=z
very
popolato.
I know.
maa
joaog
the
dalla
quarter
of
ball-room
ballo
six.)
(at
a
quarter
be-
sola
((t
wants
ten
mino-
5
MERCtdES.
of
lei
(htre teen
I
eight.)
r ho
the
of
del
tiamo
battle
(What
a*
if
the
iirft.
day
quanti di
line oT
Two
z:
mete
arrived
fhipf
Cadiz
at
tweoty-firftof
the
on
artivaronoaCadice
"
eleven.
at
veduto
this?) It
if
month
him)
=
1
He
last month.
died
in
hnarj,
thonfand
one
the
of
twenty*foarth
eighthundred
ad sixteen.
%
will
nor
here
be
the first of
on
March,
of
^838.
Leghorn
The
Malta
monih.
prosiimo
the
gover*
1
next
del
s=
2d
Fe^
Jialia
mori
eeorto
Italyon
4 5th
the
.^-.
of
Augost,
4838.
lAvomo
I
hope
che
epero
if
(will
jou
ttarete
a
o'clock
three
now
,
dine
and
flop
(with me) to-daj. It
and
(
oggi-
meeo
pranzo
shall sit
we
an
hour.
The
first lime
disobliging
way,
I
wrote
che
(willtell him)
gli dirb
to
(ather
my
with
hallalo
and
I
several
at
qttellu
last
parole
of
lei
parecchio
with
dined
liave
at
in
St. Helena
SunCElena
He
times.
him
lui
pranzato
poleone nacque
ihdi
The
words.
ire
o
in
parlera
the 27ih
on
her
poleon (was born)
died
was
few
a
May.
I lia-
=
volte
and
a
due
tcrissl
danced
twice,
I
maniera
tcortete
ve
speaks
{folta ehe
tavoJa
time
he
to
metieremo
ci
table)in half
down
Ajaccioon
the
has
invited
nC ha
invitaio
only
tola
una
15lh
of
me
tive
Na-
once.
volla. Na-
August,
4
769,
=
"
on
tlie 5lh of
May,
4824.
Carlo
=.
f
Qiarles
10
0
EXERCISES.
twelfth, king of SwedeOy
the
Peter
and
Svetia
of
Rossia,
two
were
Spain, and
great
great
Pietro
the
bom
was
j
emperor
"
grande
Charles
oieo.
of German
emperor
the
fifth,
king
Ghent
at
of
twenty-foordi
George
hundred.
the
perished
in
the
kings
ascended
same
ladies
Both
year.
the
salirono
paleo
perirono
throne
Both
All
jinna
alia
scaffold.
the
on
five
Anne.
Queen
$uccesse
cr
thousand
one
year
succeeded
first
Giorgio
three
the
in
February
the
on
Gand
of
tlie-hall.
at
were
sui
stesso
LESSON
n.
%
1
saw
your
vidi
cousin
dressed
in
cugino
vettito
d*
like
wiiy.
He
had
a
hizzarro
hujjo-
11
large red hat,
a
pair
of
great
1
1
spectacles,
yellow
(thickyill-shapedshoes), and
giallo
wilh
pleasantthat poor
old
ihe
admiral.
Go
the
to
Andate
the
country lasses of the
vedere
mun
while
9
How
man
is, who
(is walk-
ehe
passcggia
Quanto lepido quel
ing)
a
small
Scarpa
113
piubrella.
fie
green
maniera
nesco
see
buffooo-
eitrsvagant and
an
18
1
3
merit
a
wish
yolete
neighbouriogvillages.Poor
compassion.
pi eta.
you
fiera
vicino
! be deserves
fair, if
The
villa
young
to
"=1
lit-
ggi.
marchioness
is
*
i
EXERCISES.
^
%
take
to
gooe
walk.
a
"When
Jerusalem
Delivered
la Gerutalcmme
fare paneggiata
was
Liberata
uici
1
pilifol
rlijmers,and
published, many
ttlla
merit
began
vaglia
si misero
talk
to
ad
rashly against
ahhajare
do
ignoranle
dog
in
the
vedo
seioeehette
colle
book?
He
if
(poor sillyman.)
a
uomo.
pretty girl sings like
donzella
canta
Go
him
al
side
his
a
long
in
bad
letters
on
Chi
sqtuire,
the
of
and
cercatc^
(will easily
you
lo
the
wears
this
on
pair
a
a
O
little
bed.
\
A. hell
Camerino
uied
the
bell, *
meaot
tbe
quella
alto
a
it called
cabio
in
a
campanula,
ihin.
It is
carta.
(inconsiderateyoui"g
boi^ie
This
ate
giovinc
in
I h;t\(:
(bad paper) awny.
libro
*
(hiiyc
nut-
Ring
that
Gettate
book).
(worthless
of
$
Throw
bello.
has
tu
little table.
f i" Hf^e.
He
crowd.
1
room
conosce^
tiene
Son
little
look
you
alia .moltiludine.
mezzo
Rest
(do
piazza.
middle
tpavenievole. Riposate
left the
angelo.
spada
frightfulmusiachios.)
ttacchi
Whom
in
sword,
lunga
zzfianco
the
in
even
anche
faciltnente
rete
Ht
out,)
angel.
the
to
Andate
colonnello.
find
an
come
colonel.
The
for)?
tue
Why
street.
ilracciato
That
(liy
ttrada.
small
the
with
us
disturbarci
flne-little
a
(ihoti
gone,
p^attene
disturb
not
=
I see
(sillyexpressions.)
torn
of great
men
it. Be
dieua.
contro
despicableignorant feiloW) )
you
some
anche
molto
luce
have
even
man,)
~
will
you
W
ro-
8
EXERCISES.
yoaifelf^if
rain
yinerete
is
dirty
amico,
and
i
in
this
art
un
(bad room;)
camera
(tallhandsome
a
an
d*
consigli
dormile
Thou
of
donna.
hel
umido,
woman.)
(nasty house) !
*
What
=
sleep
not
=
damp.
sporco
=
Do
ndvice
the
to
ascoltate
yours.
veechio
vo9tro
il
of
listen
not
=
se
friend
old
do
joa
a
casa,
X.
LESSON
Marquis,
Dear
do
complain
not
vi
=
She
him.
to
We
me.
have
spoken
lagnate
from
received
has
of
France
two
gold
neck."Uces,
collana
which
sent
were
her
to
husband.
her
by
He
cJie
I
study
and
studiare
write.
I
due
1
after
dopo
la
di
lie
Speak
4
mai
speaks
Do
him.
before
as.
prima
di
ill of her.
They
She
speaks
male
pari are
to
giornija.
3
dined
never
non
di
contro
of him.
well
2
They
you.
againstus.
war
dichiarare
(two days ago-)
$crivere,
shall dine
declared
him
with
was
plays.
giuocare
cantare
and
We
sings and
not
speak
him.
Let
thing.
She
to
hene
give him
us
dare
venire
*
a
J
^
"ed
in
Let
us
not
givehim
any
nulla,
ricompensa,
to
came
reward.
a
see
us.
Give
me
a
vedere,
placed
Ilaiian.
after what
loaf.
Giving
me
a
fetla
pane.
in
an
admirative
slice
phraie, ii
not
eiprn-
of
EXERCISES.
br";aJ,
Having giveo a
chair
do
honor.
you
Having spoken
her.
Do
not
tcohl
her.
He
himself
flallert
We
wish
much.
too
know
him.
thyself.We
Dress
cannot
p^ettire
eonoscere,
grant
and
not
tlemen
with
to
permitsione
gen-
lateiare
yoo.
(He
fond
is very
Gli
prudent
la
I leave these
me.
punire
"
Do
leave.
you
accardare
They punisliedthemselves
Be
I
deaiderare
luiingare
^
lokini.
Sgridare
iheni?
sec
you
and
him
Scold
onore.
I
t
lober.
sedia
pane,
I
C)
speaking)of
piace molto
circumspect,when
and
of
il
himself.
parlar
He
speak of yourself.
you
rUervato
if not
of
master
have
bii^l^. They
padrone
been
by
sent
He
you.
^z
^
said
himself,that
within
her.
6c
lasciare
(your neighbour).
yourselfand
to
(part from)
not
che
ira
useful
would
he
prossimo (sing.)
LESSON
XI.
s
Here
is the
treaty
;
il
guaranteed by England*
signed
last
ioltoicritto
il
was
We
have
not
been
nor
and
month,
guided by
is
ava-
guidaii
guaranii'to
rice
1
hy ambition,
but
by
the
hand
of
God.
It saved
us
aalvare
from
da
every
danger;
it made
renders
us
victorious ; it will
vincilcre
assist
os.
ajuiare
I O
Let
EXERCISES.
coufiJe
us
in
iu
Give
soldiers.
the
to
tome
Give
hiai
cOTifidare
Do
some.
give
them
speak
to
him
Let
me.
him
to
give
not
of
speak
us
Send
it.
Give
any.
me
them
Do
some.
me.
it.
of
him
to
to
oot
as
oot
Let
send
not
Do
me
any.
Mandate
Here
are
cherries; hay
some
four
of
pooncb
How
them.
eiliegia;comprare
maijy
books
thank
you
will
for
Open
it.
I shall
buy?
you
the
trunk
silk
of
hope
haule,
been
stockings in
shall
we
fatal
We
j
but
court
di
a
wonderful
things.
by
guldalo
midable
lo
his
a*suoi
Yes,
it is he
done)
potato fare
The
love of
glory produces great
produrre
led
man
have
1
ammirahiU
men:
has
Ambition
avrebbe
non
I
to-morrow,
(could not
he
,
2
many
to
Englishmen.
it
without
pair
three
trovare
shall go
several
there
sec
him
to
it.
senza
so
will find
yon
,
Kingraziare
They wiU
buy twenty.
it is
very
useful
his country
to
da
and
for-
,
patria
enemies.
Who
nemico,
Chi
himself.
There
(iscoming)?
guardiao?
My
viene?
some
arc
iulore
mco,
think Jif*
who
pcnsare
ferently.
LESSON
His
house
was
built
last
XII.
year.
It is
fabhricato
Your
soldiers
are
better
disciplinedthan
(adv.)disciplinato
larger than
onrt*
grande
ours.
A
friendof
la
EXERCISES.
2
1
SI
left kaod.
her
A
aliot carried
sinfstro
shoulders.
my
slogare
hands.
hreak
heart.
my
She
will
trinciare
Go
and
a
is
hands.
her
washinn
Mind
h"i"
badare
tta
yoa
have
spezzare
lavare
carve;
I
via
You
spalla
your
you
legs away.
two
palla poriare
dislocated
wash
his
cat
fingers.
yoar
The
executioner
tagliare
hoja
14
GuL
iheir heads
The
off.
speaking with
captain was
Mra
S.,
.
troncare
told
and
her
cousin
di
a
away^
his
will
He
seiaiac*
little sister is
ill;let
ni
go
(and
malttto
quare
see
(sqaandrr
soon
aedere.
My
properly.
down.
sit
(o
her
a
.J
vederla
LESSON
This
penknife shall
be
xm.
given
to
best
yoor
popil.
Tfiese
migliore allievo,
iVihles
are
written
elegance.
with
This
is
J'nvola
which
that
famous
hallle
a
"which
the
the
enemy's
stones
pianuroy
in
the
rivulet
in
1
nemico
are
in
ruscelletto
si deite
eelehre
cniovove
is
(was fought];this
plain,
the
(quenched
leader
generate
del
these
dissetarsi
sprinkled(by the) blood
ianafjiato
and
ihirsl);
his
of
our
people. Do
EXERCISES.
1
13
tlioie curtains
take
aot
a
This
way.
man
Tbat
word.
been
keeps
mai
non
has
man
2
never
cortiue
unsnccessful
in
3
Iiis
manteitere
his
undertaking.
infelice
Speak
fnore
DO
to
of ihat
me
; he
man
has
deceived
and
me,
ingannare
who
tbose
recommended
were
him.
to
who
He,
bis
in
raccomandato
yootb (giveshimself
darti
to
^onr
in
cultivate
up)
pleasore,and
to
does
endea-
not
preda
his
proou-
mind, will in his old age
be
deprived
of
rare
relief
tbat
ia afTorded
which
sollietfo
mho,
by study. Let
prosperity,threw
in his
From
ttofortuoate.
ware
relieve
him
sollet^are
recato
compassionate
a
pietOAO
gettare
ihtt
us
that
woman
on
eye
s
guar
you
those
do
will
receive
2
good
advice.
this
From
you
woman
1
will receive
nothing
coii"(^/f.(plu.)
non
8
have
bim
seen
this
and
morning,
darmo.
/altro che
2
1
shall
I
mischief.
but
see
bim
again
tbia
eTening. Those
des"'rve
men
riuedere
praise, who
prefer
the
public
interest
to
their
praprio.
anteporre
Whose
watch
own.
is this ? It is mine,
f^at
coat
of
yours
fits
stare
you
well. Those
shoes of yours
are
not
shining.
bistro
1
tenuint
( to
clean
di
1
tbem
again ).
ripulire
Tell
your
4
1
EXERCISES.
LESSON
The
dog
(are feeding)
you
al
cane
date
quale
N., whom
Mr.
beast.
XIV.
da
wishes
table upon
The
which
write
you
ringhioso
=
speak
lo
t^olere
cofioscere
=:
snarling
a.
mangiare
know,
you
ii
to
you.
=
is broken.
Send
it
to
the
at
that
rotto.
he
joiner ;
will
repair
it. The
soldier who
racdmciare
falegmime;
battle,received
medal.
a
I
will
point
medaglia.
uin
that
was
to
tbe
you
cap-
mostrare
in that
wounded
was
oat
action.
comhattimento.
I know
that you
sapere
clie
2
will
call
andare
those
on
gentlemen
met
yon
at
the Grenerars
t*edere
a
1
yesterday. You
have
disturbed
all
the
people
itiquietaretutto
in
this
house.
shall
I
the
send
who
live
stare
persona
letters
you
have
written.
scritte.
Here
is die
lady
whom
Iwi
I
met
a
suo
secret,
sera
nfght
went
to
come
Mr.
N.
's.
whose
(are prepos-
manners
preuengono
favore.
will
is
voice
ovjersera
man
young
I
incontrare
sesfiing.)William
in
Last
"urmonioso,J^ri
tanto
There
melodious.
whose
lire
sen
(so very)
sing, and
beard
yon
whom
a
at
I
have
entrusted
with
,
confidare
cui
half-pastten.
I
wrote
to
him
our
=
to
di
allow
to
roe
binders
wbicb
; hot
shore
on
go
I baTO
received
not
those
callingon
from
me
5
1
EXERCISES.
an
answer
;
Confess
strangers.
dl
impedire
S
candidly
what
What
plotted againstns.
yon
meritorious
a
tramare
=^
1
!
deed
XV.
LESSON
of those
'Which
"ay?
I do
will
pens
him.
understand
not
Di
Who?
told us?
he
did
ia
the
at
door
?
Go
and
hear
you
inlendeie
I
No;
io
=
Who
did
non
what
To
see.
he
does
grazia
N.
Mr.
What
n.e?
Pray,
capire
what
give
you
do
not.
I'ho
inteto.
you
apply
applicare
resolntion
yourself? What
baa
he
taken
riioluzione
What
?
name
are
his
presa
?
amusements
dwertimenti
What
done
luiTe you
to-day?
Whose
?
What
ia
hia
?
these ?
rings are
?
Whoae
writing-desk
ia
that ?
icrittojo
It
hers.
is
Of
what
do
I
On
complain?
lagnarsi?
ground
my
fondare
have
shall
we
Sopra
believe
I
do
=
? To
whom
A
I offered
fare
refnge ?
ricoyero
Whom
hopeK?
what
an
In
what
=
Which
?
insult?
country
shall
I
take
=
paete
of
the
two
will
accompany
a
mj
?
Which
l6
EXERCISES.
what
Under
will^reaiaiii?
star
I born
was
(worse
is
? Wbo
pib mal'
1
2
I
than
fortane
treated)by
?
am
=:
trattato
XVI.
LESSON
There
generalsat
two
are
of ihe
the head
arm
bolb
j,
of the
testa,
age ; but
same
the
ahall
either
uincere
o
of
the
bj
unforianate
yonr
their
punishment
that
as
severe
merry
,
of
said
"
others,
the
he
will
be
not
castigo
trcufiato
so
the
compatriotto;
and
(led astray),
were
I have
countrymen;
prooesso
youngest
otii"r. "
deW
o
trial
the
examined
I
il
die
this^or
with
conquer
are
poison; cc
a
la
arme
Here
a
and
he, showing his sword
said
"
weapons,
other
the
than
brave
more
one
to
me.
Eat,
a
I
"
have
will
nk,
dr
live
and
else
nothing
"
,
alUgmmente
replied I
to
him
and
"
wish
rispondere
other
di
desiderare
people's
be
and
property
retire.
to
ritirarsL
satisfied
with
,
sptak of death, and die,
laugb, and
some
If
cry.
two
are
any
differeut
person
your
own.
del
conteuto
To
Respect
"
=
things." Some
should
know
wfa"C
piangere
*
hy
This
pbrase,
chi,.,.chi.-
and
others
of
(he
same
chi
un'
nature,
as,
Chi
Some
f/ice
say
uatt
ope
cosa,
thing
,
some
ultra i
another.
are
expreised
also
/
EXERCISES.
have
you
done,
woold
jou
1
be
longer
no
cooiidered
pih
1
Wby
man.
do
=
1
make
not
yon
great
a
riffutaio
7
troublef
your
known
to
the
I
have
re*
esporre
Duke
?
brother
his
and
Both
relieve
can
you.
tolleifare
ceived^a
great
from
ciTiHtiei
many
Mr.
Smith
hit
and
father,
finezza
and
grateful
am
to
both
-what
for
they
for
did
Yon
me.
will
di
at
meet
the
English
the
banquet
and
gentlemen
French
that
,
are
this
in
now
island.
Do
speak
not
politics
of
either
to
politica (sing.)
1
1
of
them.
will
I
send
back
you
the
peaches
and
wali-
rimandare
1
nuts
;
both
are
of
a
yery
bad
quality.VTe
i
S
only
3
have
two
ioli
5
neitlier
enemies^and
of
them
will
be
able
(to do
us
any
harm).
nuocerci.
1 have
not
given any
=
Wliy
then
do
to
reason
of them
either
molwo
they
:="
fly
yw^g"**
from
n:e
?
They
They
wish
i^olere
to
die
for
scandalize
each
other.
me.
diffamwe
deceive
ingannaie
=
"
another.
to
one
1
8
EXERCISES.
XYII.
LESSON
is
Somebody
making
When
somebody.
to
he?
speak
of
shall
We
give
zz.
sla
this letier
is
who
noise;
a
yoa
miod
body,
any
dadare
what
yoa
If
say.
these
of
any
ladies
like
volere
mandare
Some
of
Take
mnsicians.
senator
i.
relations
are
chiamare
a
tarines.
the
for)
send
your
n:
of
some
these
the
in
call
him
on
has
he
always
,
che
assists
nothing. Nothing
He
me.
assists
him.
discourages
tale
some
uisitare
Nobody
me.
When-
country.
Q^ni
I
ta
uec-
noce
persica.
ever
we
,
a
(shall
dance
to
a
nobody.
I
No
tell
to
istorietta
officer
i^oL
racconiate
have
done
shall
ou
go
scoraggire
there
without
Leghorn.
my
In
shop.
no
Not
do
We
permission.
of
oni
not
your
know
any
ships
(
body
fe
I
at
in
)
legiio ahbatter$i
h
wi
that
pirate. Nothing
in this
lasts
world.
And
he
was
durare
m
1
so
del
him
completely
tutto
again.
that
transformed
no
could
one
raffigurare
sea
was
quiet
and
no
stars.
clouds
veiled
,
nuUo
the
known
,
trasmutiao,
The
have
nuhe
(fern.)
velart
E3LCRCISES.
20
(fpbaks ill) of
aoj
cuiriM
HU
wb"te?er.
man
sparlare contro
He
believe.
speak
can
this is the
Mow
is the
bear, be silent. This
may
wLiatever.
sword
Whatever
da
sicuro
you
strong,
to
corazsa
protectedagainst any
it
that he
is
eloquence
wilh
justiceof
troth, whatever
of any
thing
may
whatever.
who
those
king^ that
the
yMi
apply
ricof'rere
be, (ar" immediately admitted;
they may
him, whoever
to
snbito.
si ammetlano
his
goddess
do
advise
who
me
art, either
thoo
whoever
Gome,
presence.
Gentlemen,
at
come
=:
a
shepherdess.
zn
=
hour
whatewer
home.
will
like ,* you
yon
t'i
at
or
,
consigliare
me
virgin
a
unhappy
an
am
to
piace;
pleased to stay here (a short time) with
Be
find
me
,
ul^uanto
di
piaceieufi
.
hide
and
from
not
celare
ehecchh
mi
=
XIX.
LESSON
We
art
hunting
hares
and
rtfbbits ,
with
When
abounds.
drinking
your
called
you
heallh.
I shall
the
(look !it)those who
pass
by.
hence,
stir
di
If he knows
all
arrived, he will be look'og for you
over
per
I
am
examining
were
we
and
qui
that
you
:^
osservare
are
j
muouersi
alia
I shall
cui
Vetturino
not
litUe
this
which
di
cacciare
island
of her.
is become
what
me
ihe
nursery
in order
to
semenznjo affinedi
choose
the
town.
=
those
plants,
EXERCISES.
(
2
opioioo,will tbrive
wbieb, tceordiDgto my
WbtB
ofun
Pado"^w6
at
w"rfl
we
went
to
PadotAa,
I
oeral
the
taw
and
't
tbe
foretold
t
pre dire
"
Rome,
at
Marte
I
Roman
ge^^
Marius,
and
"
yonog
celebrated
most
built
by Auguttut after the
Augusto
deatroyed by tbe Romant
wat
in
Philippi.CaHbagc
battle of
Tbe
grandezza,
Mart
of
disiinguere
of
intrepidity
intrepidezza
"
temple
"
bimself
eignalUed
bit future grealoeis. Tbe
of
era
He
of Namamk.
assedio
courage
Arpioom
at
Arpino
genitore.
eioge
Soipione,
I
I
ibe
Scipio, tt
pro"stors
Mario
itidotto
aoder
tbe
Me
boro
wa"
iUitertte parcaU.
aod
obaeare
I
t
Meriui
Cajo
from
pometo.
a
Ceiae
of tliet Uttivertity.
li
I
orchAid.
all ignore
seeondo
k
in your
1
wat
Filippi.
447
Chritl. The
before
yeara
prima di Crista,
tooitbiog.Di4
fare
prendente,
\
Did
ulJ
be
what
you
wat
Adriano
memoria
breakfatt
be
Adriaa
of
memory
the
with
as-
sor-
French
minister?
cplazione
my
father
to
wrote
the
committarj?
committai'io
I have
not
had
the
pleatureof
piacere
tix
leave,
month's
di iei
you.
your
frienJt. If you
(pret.iof.)
=:
1
2
a"k
teeing
mesi
un
If yott remain
the government
congedo^
quiet
will
not
grant
it
printt. We
thall
retire
ritirarsi
at
to
gouerno
I will
,
give you
beautiful
two
trafufuillo,
stampa
?
the hour
(you like). At
che
uorrete.
20
toon
a^
EXERCISES^
the
as
talk
that when
of
I shall
is over,
dinner
the
call
penire
a
captain
is
on
trovare
We
you.
shall
rz
board.
on.
He
will
oo
go
abhordo.
after he
shore
has
given
lesson
a
his
to
popils. Perhaps
he
is
JForse
zr
.
m
not
gone
the
to
play. Do
enter
not
perhaps he
;
teatro.
Do
tire
not
basy.
is
oceupaio.
thai
Do
man.
I scold
reply when
not
thee.
annojare
2
I have
this year
written
friends^in
(tomy
After
he
considered
had
little
a
while,
East
Indies.
Orientale
ho
che
agli amici
the
1
he
India-
answered.
pensatq
XX.
LESSON
s
I
wonder
should
yon
could
surprised he
afraid)you
stand
disobeyed the
have
I
temptation.
alia
resistere
poiere
sorpreso
1
much.
so
adulare
maraingliarsi
was
1
author
flatter that
orders.
(am
ho
tentazione.
he
I fear
will
die
of
paura
that
He
disease.
ig
a
good
malatiia.
his
servants
every
master
he
:
always
wishes
that
padrone;
should
thing.He
be
satisfied. I wish
(would
have)
me
yon
may
with
go
the
succeed
general.
in
I
vorrebbe
allow
that
every
one
shou'd
lell
me
the
truth, thoogh it
permettcre
hf
displeasing.I will
spiqceyole,
not
allow
you
to
neglect yonr
trascurare
aAirs.
23
SXXIICISES.
I
grant
that
joo
we
be
than
lacky
more
are
if. He
conoedere
^=
officer ibonld
that every
dered
or*
be
board
od
snn-set.
at
del sole
al tramontar
Command
that
fbould
we
and
fight
aod
go
tball
we
ob^^y.
,
iattersif
I do
doubt
BQt
but
will
jon
of his
approve
chenon
God'f
Vamor
do
detain
not
ia better
me
I
:
be
muft
(at the)
for bim
to
Il
be
waa
wilb
ge-
dcd
trattenere
o'clock.
nine
at
P^f
=
del Cielo
neral'a
k
aake
For
meaaurea.
me
neceaaary
for
than with
those
be
to
ua
silent.
(lazyfellows).
tfaccendalo.
U
it
possiblefor
not
yon
follow
to
aderire
joat that
be should
fall,who
the
waa
opinion ?
our
It
was
a
of
cause
evils. It is
our
male.
probable he
will arrive here
before
the courier.
Where
is the
corriere.
2
who
person
dares
to
contradict
roe
4
? There
is
no
who
one
1
1
2
wishes
this
in
drink
to
body
any
I
Find
me
nobody
see
has
that
chi
non
more.
work.
2
the
any
who
one
that knows
intention
to
might help
us.
boy
If
you
bouse, send
a
me
know
him
to
di
office.
my
There
is
no
man
in the world
I
philosopher
who
esleera
more
tlian
uffizio.
you.
world
I think
had
the*e
been
was
a
destroyedseveral
times.
witl
(1 rhink) he
mi
pare
ihai
the
is called
4
2
EXEKCISES.
Thoa
Francif.
art
iocredoloot
very
I do
:
wish
not
fmi*
to
Francesco
.
I believe
thee.
tAte
I ba?e
which
"on]
a
Send
is immortal.
2
nie
whom
soldier
a
I
This
trntt.
can
di
is the
difficah
moat
Jidarsi.
1
I haye
passage
in
met
erer
this
work.
paxso
opera.
LESSON
enemies
forgive our
To
how
know
Since
is
a
X^o
come
I
house).
my
dn
soul.
great
a
talent few
persons
the
To
possess.
artist, make
drinking
me.
wine, althoogh the doctor
see
from
refrain
cannot
has
medico
often
oi
abhoccarsi
"
that
mark
a
interview)with
(have an
most
Giacche
him
is
give leasonaUy
to
joa
XXI.
walking
him
forbidden
me
vietare
the Rabbins.
with
to
do
=
=
it. I
It is necessary
to
Rabbino.
pretend
not
to
see.
would
He
not
me
see
voile
them
talking together.
I
piu
heard
never
dhr
Let
me
alone;
Lasciatemi
Though
does
not
I have
care
slander
yon
discorrere
neighours.
to
obey
I
am
in
not
di
stare,
told him
many
me.
I hear
more.
any
times
pih
volte
For
all I
Benchh
to
male(genit.)
=
umore.
stay
at
starsene
am
humour.
good
a
not
your
hia
gli
home
he
,
a
casa
father,I
,
do
25
SXEACISES.
off
l"ave
not
fcokliog bim.
He
daoee.
can
Can
awim?
yoa
nuotare
but
I cao;
I
able
not
am
twim
to
dance
can
(wiihout tlopping,
Lour
one
Hi
f"el
not
pray
for
tired
it). If
jou
(draw
cao
ttaiicarmi*
senza
make
to
you
.
sentini
spostato
and
feel
I
=
=
(without ftrengih).I
to-daj,for
segititOf
colours)
in
I
,
dipingere.
me
a
of thia
copy
picture. Do
fail
not
to
t/uadro.
anawtr
me
by
col
inquiry)
about
of
return
ritorno
poat.
ri
cor
king
it. The
I
always forget
to
(make
injor"
ere.
ordered
conclude
to
me
truce
a
marsi
tregua
If yoa
the enemy.
with
help
effect
to
me
the
welfare
ej^fettuare
my
an
subjects, history will speak both
tudditOf
is
man
That
you.
,
enticingns
enticingyon
forsake
to
to
virtue.
are
is
person
of
path
honour
; but
re-
senticro
king.
a
That
da
the
from
swerve
deuiare
yon
and
me
herie
t
allontanarti
member
of
of
I
apply myself
to
from
study
morn-
dalla
ing
till
evening
be
and
alia
the
the
pbys
,
fool
the
whole
day
with
to
sop-
ruzzare
blackguards of
the
neiglibonrhood.
He
strives
monello
port bia
fiere
the
mante-
family (in a
la
esteem
every-body. I
think
I
pare
di
Mi
your
procaooiarti
decorotamente,
of
father, and
I
love
obtain
way), and aspires to
decorons
you
as
see
in yon
tenderly
tenerameut9
as
the
image
(I did
amai
of
him).
lui.
2G
EXERCISES.
professorteaches
This
how
you
an
(Iil^e
live
to
da
=
both
science
his
by
dabbene
uomo
is
treasure
a
to
you
;
tesoro
con
mind
mao),
,
He
actions.
and
hoaesr
not
lose
to
Glory
him.
mind
the
excites
perform
to
fare
I
great deeds.
ba?"
been
for you
waiting
all the
morning
to
azioni.
take
the
to
you
stood
He
governor's.
condurre
to
bis
us
inimicarsi
the
(1
give
you
pray
favour
a
pro
going
ado
to
plenty
us
call
Verrb
in
from
much
these
lines
order
you
of
to
you)
on
da
not
toascer-
Lucca
little
and
baths.
I
bagno.
lo
him.
leave.
drink
to
of mine.
friend
a
accer-
Too
congedo.
little
drink
to
take
to
voi
and
eat
parsuade
to
to
ri^a
shall
great deal
a
I write
noi.
con
truth.
OS
would
me
enemies).
(genit.)
tarsi
give
in
restore
(make
tain
nentral
hardly
I
ytith yon
I
eat.
wife
My
have
to
dissuaded
it. I
believe
had
(iaf.)
stento
all he
For
to
:
is assiduous
his
to
al
work,
(he
lavoro,
egU
business).
falti
He
listen
chezza
stenta
will
t*ostn\
to
sense
his
scarcelyget
can
a
be
not
isteutera
wliat
he
dare
armies
thou
mollo
he
a
It
comes.
a
your
=
fare
is
i
non-
sciac'
says.
retta
LESSOIV
The
long before
about
jindale
viuete.
Nou
to
livelihood).Go
=
hast
XXII.
defeated, the nations
icon/iggercj
thou
hast
sub-
sag-
28
EXERCISES.
LESSON
Greekf
Tbe
XXIII.
feared
were
the
by
Persians.
I
alwajs
was
Persiano.
Ly
invited
If
him.
yoa
do
not
review
the
to
go
they
will
rassegna
punish
He
yoo.
the
(stonedto death) by
was
mountaineers;
lapidate
but
the
chiefs
of the
murder
shot
the
upon
dance
In
men.
raramente
good health
,
hot
countries.
caldo
paese,
they eat
at
more
will be
elected
When
eletto
that the
moured;
than
in
crdine.
been
Corre
spilt
sparso
had
di
giomo
the
opera
is
da
spread)
in
are
the
They
taken
college. (It was
that
fortress
a
say
terra.
rn-
Si sparse
enemies
la
cf the
first
blood
has
Jortezza
a
great
of
deal
voce
both
on
sides.
(I will
lo
parte.
(in day-time).A
Jo
of
(*uWO
(A report
shore.
on
=
poce
class.
people
si
sea
member
a
people
=
estate
per
yon
time
summer
D'
in
are
muro.
ascoltato
seldom
They
Passions
ramparts.
melfattore
(listened to) by
much
hanged.
impicoato.
malefactors
the
fucilare
too
and
taken
were
omlcidio
capo
have
montamaro;
coward
is
non
allow) people
not
yoglio
eke
despised. Cowards
to
sleep
=(sub.)
despised.
are
codardo
of
(yesterdayevening) they
sang
a
very
fine
jersera
duet.
duetto.
Two
very
pretty
yezzoso
women
were
beard
sing. The
EXERCISES.
of S"n
UiMtre
Csrloi
it
2g
( tbat
large ,
"o
che
Carlo
teatro
pcopU fiiig diftinctly).Thty
do
diitintamente.
com'eni"itztf.(plu.)
voce
(tbow
not
genie
regard) for
reaped)
any
bark
pro-
=
deal
great
a
=:
ibe
to
rUpettare
people
si
non
(tliow aoj
not
bear
nol
ritpettare
=
perty of oiliera. When
la
=
do
Tbty
deceecy.
does
ooe
do
ibey
,
ahbajare
mnch.
bite
Dot
mordere
=
the
We
dog-daya
do
not
tbeae
answer
Tbey
mandwe
vill
Tbey
people.
tO'day. It
ia
tbon-
one
fil di spada
a
koow
not
aword
with
yon
tbia
eoat
on.
one*
pert
=
welcome*
will
Tbey
cieala
the
to
pot
coil
aand
graaabop-
a
in lulian.
ao
tbe
lettera
=
called
bear
we
canieola(^"\np)
poeo,
aing.
per
In
People will
ua.
bate
tbee. When
aceogliere bene
ooracWea
abave
we
io
radere
baate,
(we often
fretta,eovenle
facea). When
f/i#o.
pentirti
M"o
pardon. People
terve
got
great
many
tbey
thinga of
apeak
not
well
often; for
author
one
What
bim.
of bim?
tuo
fallo
tbey
do
Answer
derire
can
iaulta, we
a
tbey
bim.
do
not
Some
see
quails were
(any more)
a
? Do
tbia
read
one
of
great deal
tay
of bim
knowledge
lume
trarre
from
=
"
aay
Let
me.
de"
,
Tbey
ihalordiio.
tatlo
nel
or
our
quite atunned.
np
our
eifa un taglio al
aincerely repent
do
we
cot
seon
of tbem.
days
two
ago
will
Tbey
Lot
,
gire
me
now
the
pih
charge
inoomhenta
of it.
Tbey
will
write
to
na
about
it. Tbon
3o
1"X"RC1SES.
wishett
intiff:
tonie
shall
we
gWe
As
some.
yoa
Siccome
volere
like
you
know
they
spoken
been
send
they will
mm,
said
been
(idlestories)have
of
favour
in
to
bottles
ten
yon
that
A
man.
have
there.
They
will
speak
h"TC
I
of it.
great
many
yet spok"n
not
foU
of
but
composition
a
they
,
of
fra
aggluatamentOf
When
have
we
time
no
One
mnch^
do
cannot
we
long).
(before
it
poco.
live
can
molto.
well
this
in
they
sorry
town
if
have
had
has
one
plenty
of
for
consideration
no
had
not
the
good
give
to
sense
what
you
yon
They
age.
They
words.
fair
him
huono
accortezza
grant
our
am
alia
riguardo
have
I
spend.
to
money
Soldiers
ask.
forbidden
are
to
out
go
vietare
.
after
the
Men
retreat.
of
alone
war
allowed
are
to
enter
.
Legno
ritirata.
that harbour,
i
not
am
da
approdare
guerra
allowed
time
dine.
to
dare
in
LESSON
XXIV.
*
What
do
think
you
? Shall
of the weather
we
be
able
to
~{d"t.)sembrare
go
out
without
any
danger
of
snowed
this
will
It
?
has
rained,
hagntvrsi^
=
raining, and
gettingwet
rain
morning.
till the
The
evening.
storm
has
It
is
cold,
hindered
and
me
has
from
3
EXERCISES.
"
ileeping.It lightened, thnodered,
It hat
thif week.
thawed
not
hailed
and
I
already
dark, vhen
grown
him.
di
robbers
some
ego.
for
care
mai
non
It had
did
Dever
honrs
two
to
came
paj
ladro
me
kind
a
visit.
has
always
concerned
di
misfortunes
Divers
condition.
be
whether
is
better
to
roe
have
in
come
migliorare
befallen
us.
Tell
yet
gone
accadere
sventwa
me
far"
gentile,
i"i"Ua
your
It
1
My
time.
is
master
not
a
wish
if you
out;
speak
to
him,
to
up. We
come
had
entered
satire.
the
city before
He
haYO
perished
am
he
misery. Although
in
hopes
and
thrown
crossing
into
the
a
river.
valicaro
1
in
in
oseura.
born
was
taken
magistrateswere
Several
dungeon.
prigione
the
become
wicked,
I
I
call
to
is
back
him
virtue. He
to
fainred
in
crown
us
ricondurre
my
The
arms.
day
glory. The
with
has
at
last
of
symptoms
will
relapse having disappeared,
a
ricaduta
di
the
which
appeared
=:
mained
Since
he
should
has
stayed here
remain
earth
and
in
this
(dat.)i bagni di
has
watch-chain
This
alone.
sea-bathing.He
him
pbysieian prescribedfor
the
vein
in
the
bad
good. The
of
water
has
people. Your
season,
magician
has
,
Petrarca
never
pleased, pleases,and
re-
mare.
belonged
it is
just
has
immediately
will
has
please
a
speech has displeasedthe king. Do
to
me.
that he
touched
the
sprung
up.
great many
not
drink
3
EXERCISES.
a
this
of
any
ftour). The
tuined
it(lja8
wine,
LorizOD
rahbu-
iHocetire.
threatens
dim, and
come
be-
is
diusteri
let
Companions
.
not*
us
,
jarsi
p^T'
chosen
not
have
been
not
to
with
coma
children.
his
"H"lere
i d'animo,
den
I
has
He
lose courage.
able
to
with
along
go
them.
have
I
been
do-
=
obliged
him.
upbraid
to
(He
dot^ersi
rimproverare
I'ere
for the
death
cardinal.
of the
have
must
We
\exed)
rattristare
able
not
were
been
write
to
to
delta
him.
have
They
walked.
not
have
We
Poor
road.
strada
to
has
god-son who
my
he
Ulan.
quanta
visit
a
pay
feeble
how
man,
is
We
this
per
Go
grown!
taken
been
and
ill.
ammalarsi.
3
week
a
guidiref
=
Jiglioecio
sank
over
camminare
passeggiare
bad
walked
i
frigates,and
enemy's
two
three
(adj.)
nem/co"
s
a
What
lioe'Of-battle-shipi.
misfortune
"
!
sixty
tfaseello
fishing
pescareceio
1
have
boats
sunk
the
near
harbour,
all hands
and
barca
la genie
tutta
perished. He
give us
who
information
has
of
run
over
that
enormoos
seas^
many
will be
fish called
We
ran
to
the
place whence
luogo
the
sails; the wind
the
voice
=
came
ont.
Let
onde
has increased.
able
the
smisuraio
(sio.)
to
whale.
haUna*
ns
lower
ammainart
I have
brought
np
and
pro*
33
EXERCISES.
like
him
ueud
dowD
my
ton.
The
looner
the
mouDtaio.
No
Hal
monte.
Non
bunters
btT"
he
had
not
yet
down
gooe
come
ttairf
,
U
prima
scale
,
SSI
cooipiratorffell
than the
him
upon
addosio
nealing,I
of
art
k
5
him
made
in
waa
orefice
(to my
come
tf
goldamith
Fiorentino
ualere
the
trucidare
thia Florentine
clever
how
heard
Having
him.
murdered
gli,
3
6
S
1
and
,
honae).Had
da
niellare
my
me.
,
(been
prayera
of any
have been
they would
avail),
readmitted
t^alcre
thia
into
who
aaaembly. Te,
lived
have
comfortable
a
and
agiato
voluptnoua
youraelvea
life, prepare
lead
to
fnoHe
died
He
one.
lived.
he
aa
glorioualy
I
dolorosa
gate,
use
and
panting,
after
and
having aacended
salt
anelante,
stanco
I reated
ataira,
went
a
few
minutea
that
upon
up
to
that
him.
I followed
first,and
up
the
all'
firtt
plain
space.
pianerottolo.
They
have
not
yet
seguitare
prima,
come
the
re
tcala, (aing.)
He
reached
giungere
tired
to,
and
stentato
menare
painful
hard
a
high degree
of
glory to
which
their
father
grado
whose
great confusion
A
arrived.
steps you
have
has
followed.
That
warrior
followed,baa died to-dayof the
wound
pedata
le received
on
ihe
^^^^
head.
The
nrmy
baa
taken
tise liehl. The
tortire in campagna.
34
"XERCISES"
mtde
besieged (baw
due
Bortire
assediali
tbej
twice
thee
to
great
so
zn
1
S
alloUed
becD
hare
honoar.
an
respingere.
ToQ
been
bave
uolte,
elected
has
Heayen
repulsed.
and
tallies),
two
surprising
a
2
invincible
and
courage
sorprendente
Afler
firmness.
I
mass
la
fermezza
bim.And
from
departed
be
would
partirsi
messa
2
in
parted
have
the
two
face
of
Let
Roger.
us
Ruggiero,
scostumato
1
2
1
acquaintances, as
does
one
prutiea,
from
away
ran
serpe.
I
me.
never
ran
before
away
the
innanzi
bas
cured
yet recovered.
Ask
medicine
Ims
He
poisonous serpent.
a
ill-bred
j"liun
will
and
me,
those
cure
yon
if
ploughmen
This
enemy.
id
also.
the
I have
not
has
emperor
hifoleo
passed
the
haie
We
river.
passed
Jtime
our
(in
pleasant
a
piace^fol-
wAy).
The
bas
courier
passed yet; lejtus
not
wait
for
him.
mente.
Two
gentlemen
have
just
or
them,
and
give
them
ora
down
gone
le
smontare
these
overtake
stairs;
|Leys. The
sjcala; raggiugnere
prime
has
minister
chiaue.
just alightedfrot^ his horse,
and
(taken
vain
hopes
j^elieve
cair;^di#
?
JUiman
a
Good
t
iin
way)
auffiarsi
=
place.Hoi^
his
by
to
pa""^
who
man
ihee
I
,
or
addio,
am
verso
has fed
golpg
the
to
to
you
with
water
ahbeyer(we
36
EXERCISES.
that the
believe
me
lueciole
I
am
smemorato
will
perceive
his relations
by
think
They
it.
$
at^olo
fool ;
t^ecchio
will repent
they
tardif
old
an
; but
late, that the grand-fatherof
too
troppo
if not
cheese), and
lanterne
per
(hair-brained man)
a
of green
it made
moan
and
that
Caterina
di
nothing should
rimbambito;
without
Catherine
be
done
dovere
him.
consulting
I have
informed
been
saputo
have
you
glad of
am
the
profitedby
lessons
will know
it. Yon
godere
of
being
given
before
fra
useful
to
long
Mr.
yon
by
the
desire
N.;
have
I
in
me
his
con-
rassomiglia
He
ber
saw
the
at
public
dotta.
her.
immediately
,
fell in love
He
ducts
con-
and
walk
passeggio
fell in love with
,
with my
agent's daugliS
ter
months
two
and
ago,
he
will
I
poco
resembles
brother, who
a
to
her
many
1
month.
next
i7
You
laugh at
but
me;
that I will make
know
bipsh
yon
(inf-)
sapere
2
what
have
you
He
done.
does
for
not
to
come
1
see
(any
us
Ion-
piu
ger).Do
with
not
some
wonder
of his
at
old
it ; for he does
friends.
Be
yourselfof
my
the
well
thing
same
pleased
with
ever
what
antico
I
give yon,
and
avail
advice.
Thia
roan
in-
eonsiglio.
termeddles
with
other
and
people'sbusiness,
does
harm
to
.
a
great
many
with
his bad
tongue.
If I understood
precious
37
EXERCISES.
ttoufs
well
ai
I do mea,
""
be
I tbould
giojclliere.
^^
He
it
good judge
a
of winea.
or
aculpture. I
iosoptiy
I do
told him
pretend
001
tbat
jeweHer.
good
t
kuow
to
phi-
oppoaed UDJnitly
be
scultura.
brotber-in-law'a
my
desigua.
He
reaeoted
it, and
left oflT
Dutch
veiseli
2
Wbat
bouae.
frcqaentiogoor
tboae
are
Olandese
frequentare
1
loaded
I tbink
with?
tbey
with
loaded
are
iron
gin,
,
spiritodi ^inepro,
htirro, or biUirro
ifvine. He
Fill tbeae caska
cbeeae.
aod
hotter,
formaggio,
,
ordered
tbat
the
hall
botle
abould
be
adoroed
$ala
piciuiea.Here
is
gentleman
a
iFvilh white
with
adornare
whom
will
you
accomnioJiiie
quadro.
with
every
thing be
The
want.
may
of the
treaaurei
duke
ahbisognare.
would
not
be
sufficieol
has
tare
to
gratify
bit
impetuous paisions.
tfrenato
13
He
does
please bis
not
How
friends.
handsome
4
5
that
cliild
bambino
i,
i* !
1
resembles
it
think
alia
che
(dii,l.)ptircre
=
ing sereicly those
(Hit
from
France
revolted
who
for
its
aorae
motiier.
He
him.
They
is persecui-
=
from
He
years.
left
will
al
partirsi
hveak.
Why
"lieuts, but
doat tboo
not
from
fly
from
ihec. He
roe
ran
? I
away
fly
from
jar
from
home.
21
stt
day*
at
me
not
del
amuse-
Thia
38
EXERCISES.
wild
in whieh
hour
is the
beatts
of their
out
go
fiera
order*
jour
1
faithful
a
as
taoMt.
=
%
obey
I shall
dens.
ought
servant
bis
obey
to
deve
Those
master.
killed
who
brothers
two
z~.
another, (were
one
,
padrone,
il
brought
world) by
the
into
My
yoa.
happiness depends
naequero
upon
Very
you.
disturbances
great
iurholenza
8
brother
My
ination.
does
from
arose
like
not
assas-
Indian
these
grand seignior three
the
outlived
vis ire
succeeded
Julius
the
i5\3, and
will, he
died
buon
thing. He
Second
the
on
45th
of
4st
December,
March,
Say
and
is not
indole,ov di huona
fell in with
what
you
offended
pasta,
people)
(some
who
seemed
to
alcnni
so'cliers.
I
fell in with
a
=
who
great many
beggieg
were
accattate
door
to
uscio
trust
of
4521.
rr:
from
the
=
nulla
be
Leo
years.
Leone
(a good-natured man),
is
di
any
the
on
salsa.
signore
gran
Giulio
at
sauces.
Indiano
visier
Tenth
as"ss-
nascere
sinio.
The
that
you
Come
door.
along
in
do
,
::z
(any more).
When
I
trust
to
me.
I do
not
=.
thiuk
of
the
He
lives upon
ingratitudeof
pill.
my
people,
life is
venire
Jjive upon
burden
a
me.
injaslidio.
vegetablesfor
vegetale
to
a
week.
The
meat.
came.
poor
people
of the
^eR"e(sing.)
39
exehci^es.
iive
mouotaioi
neighboariDg
generallyon
potatoet
wicino
palata
milk.
bread, and
baa
Who
Htoleo
thy
latle
ateala
my
Do
you.
away
from
week
ago.
from
hide
not
all
me
it from
Jier.
the
ua
LESSON
has
He
shall
la
me
actually so.This
in
times
it).He
Aa
go
we
ahelter
a
yore,
I
forward,
shall
mention
fare
menzione
forfeit
rather
the
will
He
behind.
bougt
n
Faith
Tersea.
this
out
instant.
It
all my
properly.
aeeat
the poor
rich,
fo
now
waa,
of the
province. I
your
diacourse.
dei
Go
hereafter.
with
on
Let
We
him
before.
go
formerly
were
I would
members
bene.^i^Xu.)
also
college,and
same
had
,
thou
to
tired.
am
perdere
of
hnndred
two
ia gone
which
town,
il ricot^ero
cannot
I
took
He
pagherai,
is
of
king.
XXVI.
exactFy
off for
thee
pay
it from
mente
a
(1
heart
by
learnt
bide
tliat
paper
?
not
of the
a newer
Eogliah
the
do
I
always
.
horsa
Hide
pena.
segala
,
He
?
purae
rye
,
be
good friends.
for
cautious
more
We
the
have
left him
future.
Let
us
^uardingo
finish
our
affaira
and
,
ahall
we
dine
afterwards.
(I might
deiinare
then
have
potei^a
that.
to
Let
been
dieci
av^er
us
ten
go
years
old).He
uillora
baa
never
anni.
gently.You
recovered
since
riauersi
will do
this
at
leisure.
Send
Mandare
4o
lor
EXERCISES.
liiitiand
also
for thoae
and
me,
who
I
present.
were
per
Lave
the
yelexamiaed
not
Some
qaeslion.
hare
Chi
Come
much.
He
yoari.
did
me
poco,
=
ear-rings are
far
by
times
many
the
honour
(to
di
on
He
me).
is
not
finer
orecchino
tempo
per
than
These
early.
very
little, some
here
; look
short
time
for him
call
venire
a
else.
At
somewhere
trovarmi.
least I shall be
in
a
entirely recovered.
It
is
nni
guarito,
an
understand
thing to
easy
fully
some
pas
I
To-day
better.
somewhat
am
you
ordered
are
chastised.
hare
D.inte.
no
enough.
eaten
Do
(adv.)
stare
what
We
of
passages
He
with
told
punctuality
by
me
of
word
,
else
or
mouth
will
you
that there
be
were
oo
castigate.
fuilher
orders.
He
has
always spoken openly
to
Tlie
'.
m
nlteriore
pfiysicianhas
allowed
hini
to
go
about
the
in
al
morning.
Recollect
to
go
softlyin
on
this
wish
talk
to
to
Mr.
N-, let
us
go
affair.
below.
Your
fixed
above.
(He
looks
at
ben
and
says,
dress
"
it is he
after the
German
"
He
manner
of the
fashion.
ancients
antica
him
ben
is
Giacche
?
?
from
lo
guar
head
squadra
to
is that
man
are
do
fool)
,
,
entirelyrecovered.
Who
Tedesco
vestire
after th("
himself.
Since
looks
s
always
of the
fresco
negozio.
:=
you
cool
Tb^'y
dressed
4
EXERCISES.
LESSON
di
on
(to pifiyingat billiards)
board
on
che
starmeiie
higliardo
al
giuocare
gentlemen. There
those
viih
shore
XXVIf.
prefer staying
I
Surely
^
thousand
one
were
1
2
assailants
The
thereabout.
or
men
nearly
were
inclrca
asialitore
=
hun-
two
1
dred
that I
door, in order
the
open
continually.I
works
fifty.He
and
aeeiocchh
within.
there
I
First
(rising and
leyarsi
there
coperto
then
I
saw
(inf.)
porsi
midnight.
at
al
daughter speak,
the
in that
silting down)
e
sheltered
potere{%wh\.)stare
heard
to
yon
be
may
Prima
hiu
beseech
do
a
Go
seder
place. He
will
arrire
e
into
when
garden
my
like.
yon
i^o/ere.
There
will
you
find
exquisite fruit,
some
and
of
flowers
frutto,(pl.)
the
He
smell.
sweetest
warned
of
before.
it
He
had
odore.
grato
forbidden
wai
the
me
day
before
to
go
out.
Do
not
fear, for
che
dl
have
said
so
many
good
a
prayers
littlewhile
(that
ago,
che
need
ci
be
not
blsogna
afraid).The
enemy
left the
frontiers
where
we
non
iliey
temere,
shortlybefore.
assembled
had
I
For
the future
he
leg. I
have
will
be
very
ridursi
severe.
My
son
fell and
broke
his
not
had
a
42
EXERCISES.
iDonieat's
with
rest
tliis
I wish
Rioce.
is
He
man.
his
pailare
detcripu'on of
a
his
before
three
and
think
thou
dost
Do
?
not
thou
He
ehe
or
will
here.
reside
and
? Tell
This
business
also do
that
the banks
will
How
of
so.
His
father
do
How
tolerably well. Realiy
papers.
is
he
have
thoroughly
did
much,
so
speak
che
do
ferently
dif-
spite. If
me
io
?
(subj.)
are
all
be
;
to
They
examine
church
freqtienllyto
goes
of
out
brothers
jour
he-
related
this river
you
What
pure
=
ihera
sol-
still look
z=z
ahitare
him
three
doing?
thou
dost
backwards.
duke.
had
thou
art
Why
likest this cottage and
come
What
behind.
Perehh,
turn
the
by
to-morrow,
podere.
of ?
ZL
hind
lii
or
,
He
estate.
descrizione
diers
il
afjari;
de*suoi
give you
and
speaking
molto
will comeback
he
perhaps
affairs);
own
of
gliplace
e
patience
great
tiresome, (and fond
very
nojoso,
of
have
would
yoa
these
die
on
,
scrittwa.
is
contrary,
to
better
behave
there.
seen
never
:
within
go
tell you
I
frankly
and
apologise to-
,
f(areun'apologia,or
lives well
One
him.
dare
these
be
sums
che
is
within.
Do
not
equally
this
to
come
far
troppty
divided
between
(subj.)
lately
domantoo
go
qua
scusa.
in. Make
He
here
ought
you
fra
country
;
di
perceive
we
accorgersi
arrwato
them.
it.
ne.
13
have
been
till now
against
control'
in
speakiog
di
(inf.)
to
him:
be
io
Mi
a
certain
3
plans. I sometimes
our
I
shall
Yoa
succeed
riesee
praise
lodarsi
di
yon
to
a
him.
/ui.
44
EXERCISES.
serable
life
rambling
I
world). Nor
tbe
graDted
doInow(uie
Ne
lo mondo.
tapiniuidoper
back) what
aboat
formerly. And
yon
not
ripi'
or
iz:
far from
very
gl'are
place where
the
tbe
sportsman
tbe
was
dogs began
,
to
(rni
St'
after)
roe-bucks.
two
The
of this industrious
little farm
pea-
capriuolo.
guire
much
is not
sant
cultivated
more
than
that of
steward.
onr
If
Jaltore.
have
yon
nothing
sit
do,
to
he
down;
will
be
not
long cooi'
a
31347
ing.
Ii is
8
long
not
tbe
since
6
5
physiciancame
here.
John,
che
who
expected
him
say so,
Giofonni,
quite contrary
conclusion
a
tbe
was
happiest
that
man
to
this,as he heard
Yoa
existed.
ever
essere.
have
called
sometimes
bouse
that
at
(spoken
there
and
,
stato
ill of
di
contro
I?
me).
Did
Never.
yon
in
with
company
^i
He
Never.
married
sposare
that
him
see
me.
gentlemen?
those
sparlato
at^ete
woman)
(poor worthless
,
or
prendereperJM^Ue
will. I shall
against my
eat
Iff*
heard
t
donnicciuola
day
to
voice
my
taste.
crying
out
"ridare
zz
wilbout
As
he
was
going
help. He
for
failing give
the
best
he
,
always
below.
He
will
m
sumptuous
a
lauLo
Joabi
is
stairs
down
general
of
tbe
dinner.
Ho
is wiihoai
hanchetto.
age.
Upon
di tfuesto secolo*
my
faith I da
4^
EXERCISES.
lov"
j00|
dMr
my
(at
foo,
much
qnanto
pleaiet the
wbo
Lord,
if in
I do
at
thence
Heaven, and
He
tha
gOTcrna
Signore,
uoiTerie.
it
stesso.
=
me
mjielf). As
reggere
that
nt
in
np
rinchiudere
tmall
a
room,
and
ordered
the
offing).
cella
=
,
13
not
na
che
to
I
taw
thip (in
a
(tabj.)ijidi.
-
the
of it. Then
out
go
non
On
S
4
43lh
of
per I'alto
Angutt
he
made
a
aringa
1
2
and
enemiet,
about
a
few
a
pochi
limpid
a
after
dayt
dl
brook.
indi
He
it betidet
and
tpoke
gentleman
large on
at
who
had
the
taken
men
fear.
"
Thit
not
WAt
Non
at
ii
contrary,
it
kingdom
all
the
he
by
abathed)
lind, nor
deaf; your
ciecOf nesordoi
t
peaking, time
long
a
there
that
taid
io
time
bene
pritoo.
that
plant.And
to
"c
me,
,
far
at
than
powerful
more
tharp
to
brusco
per
her
again
che
pregare
1
del
Do
not
the other.
antwer;
an
behaviour
to
ting. We
9
1
are
not
(8ob].)r=
is known
to
non
ut.
the
in
del
paroline
=
the
on
=:
gentle (and pretiiettwordt)
mott
entreated
good,
,
for
dolci
world,
do
to
desiderio
wat
me
there-
are
spaurl mica
with
with
a
propertiet of
,
find
Ih in'
bat
He
will
You
=:
:r
rich.
very
died.
he
I'lmpidoruicello.
tomo
(He
agaioat hit
ttroog tpeech
=
He
mare.
While
3
mtea
I
am
andamenio(^l.)nolo
fliet away.
fuggire.
He
taid
that
he
withed
more
4G
EXERCISES.
tLao
ever
trust
me
be
to
to
friend
a
I
body.
%vy
bottom
is
would
a
2
but
certainly
,
rwa.
sz
no
non
-"
has
which
sea
mad
not
never
4
5
2
He
shore.
nor
in
swimmiog
am
13
neither
He
wanior.
the
to
1
He
extravagant.
answered
Do
no.
not
answer
no.
me
.
strayagante.
Have
broken
you
the
looking-glass? No,
Should
sir.
yon
rompere
1
want
thing, write
any
to
immediately. Nothing
us
root
can
sradioare
1
that
propensity for
UDfortunate
infelice
did
sleep
not
gambling
passione
at
all last
ont
So
his
violent
the
was
forte
first
division, which
harassed
cruelly
diuisione^
that the
the
left
1
wing
battle
lasted
but
a
few
=
not
was
committed
ran
4
atrocious
=
in
even
the
ages
(of barbarism).
barbaro
misfatto
He
So
minutes.
,
crime
secretly.This
away
of the
straccare
12
a
of
assault
3
enemy
He
assalto
2
the
heart.
dal
giuoco
night.
of
(adj.)
legislatoris undoubtedly
severe,
legislatore
aud
merciful
:
to
severe
clemente:
merciful
(to them
t^erso
those
who
contro
that
i
are
essere
misled).
traviati.
persist
ostinato
in
vice,
and
4?
EXERCISES.
LESSOrV
shall
We
XXIX.
thif work.
begin
now
4are prinoipio
Sometimea
barrackt.
the
"ited
a
jiiit
now
fl-
pi'omiitei,aometimea
he
He
hai
lat^oro.
be
quartiere.
She
titreatena.
alwaya
ia
We
longer complain.
the
the end
at
aie
Now
aame.
of
thon
aoaldat
journey
onr
1
S
It ia time
at
(toconform
laat
telf)to public opinion. I
one'a
uniformarsi
d*
1
aball dine
to-day
at
liable
to
comeit.
Whence
the
d*
me
Where
they come?
do
now-a-daya
are
voi
paaaiona. Let
aame
2
Men
houae.
your
da
know
are
whence
the
very
was
and
,
pleated.He
much
:
sixty of infantry
great number
of
had
he had
ships.These
Rather
to
than
die
would
sooner
of
valry
ca-
in the harbour
moreover
placed perfectly
picturesare
t'Uuato
be
disgraced.Who
arrived
first ?
disonoralo.
=
I
muiketa?
thirtyregiments
nawe.
well.
thou
schioppo?
(aubj.)
a
lait.
at
(iof*)
pih
He
no
see
him
killed
than
conquered.
He
acts
tfinto.
1
worse
(adv.)
than
he
speaks. A
dire.
lame
and
most
wretchedly
dressed
48
"X"AC1S"S.
His
man.
aacestors
persecaled by
fortune.
fine
man
young
I have
it
done
not
speaks always
to
he
and
uofortunate,
were
That
purpose.
on
the
likewise
is
Saj
purpose.
no-
^
leggiadro
thing preposterously.He
It
openly.
there
goes
is
pablicly
si dic"
1
that
reported
him
gave
you
(box
a
the
on
ear). The
laws
are
schiaffo.
not
"
extortions, and
many
thing. The
same
Bascia
-
without
does
'
he
Mid
would
He
come.
is
all
at
i
2
3
crucciato,
5
If
dead.
not
nonpunto
S
wish
you
precisely
himself
showing
,
1
*"g"7"
non
=
questo
zzz
pupil
great
a.
usare
(present one)
the
poco(adj.)angheria,
the
committed
first Bashaw
properly applied.The
well
me
(folere
1
at
all, and
desire
di
bene
punto,
will do
what
I shall tell yon.
to
saye
from
n"e
compare
2
death, you
has
He
no
con-
di
1
science
all. Tell
at
me
near
as
,
you
lost
those
in
as
skirmishes.
He
how
possible,
is
nearly
men
many
ruined.
If
we
sciwamuccia.
happy
were
future.
I
am
in
former
almost
days,
decided
must
ci6
dot^ere^iuf.)
to
avvenire.
thou
hope,
wilt
when
make
that
fear
us
And
marry.
for
the
aftewards
ammogliarsi.
see
those
it is
who
time,
pleased in
are
to
go
to
the
because
the fire
,
they
(blessed people). Qence
beate
genti.
49
EXERCISES.
hill.
the
we
can
-wc
opened
He
he
anil thence
window,
a
poggio.
himself
threw
arrive
daring
haate,
sir.
wbat
will
He
I
water.
And
this time.
be
aaw
he
back
great
a
arrived
this
here
Gome
like.
yon
the
into
that
at
Speak
soon.
lime.
and
evening,
people
many
do
low.
Mtike
qaickly
We
shall
cene
1
2
garden
the
to
go
slowly.Danghter,
very
walk
gently.He
andremo
be
will
tliree
dnys
They
most.
at
yellow,
are
and
for
the
stare
part made
most
this
in
He
way.
mostly
is
iti
guisa*
the
for
part
most
other
each
see
home.
at
die
in
We
casa.
prince's
bo".
He
palco.
took
made
and
aside
me
this
read
me
Pat
paper.
this
by
fogUo.
trarre
He
money.
pot his
sword
into
scabbard
the
and
left him
,
fodero
pierced through. They
for the
are
,
part avaricioos.
most
Love
trafitto
him
prompting
was
on
side, anh
one
honour
istigare
Your
treasures
are
partly
exhausted.
leave
I
the
(on
dalV
altra.
you
tO'^ay.
1
?
knows
Who
perhaps
shall
we
1
each
see
rii^edere
where.
in
the
him.
newa
not
Tell
grave
He
him
^
people
seldom
that
iz(fl(pl
o ,)
from
goes
to
me
will
come
seldom
out.
rejoices
rallcgrare
us.
np
speak
We
hear
I
other).
often
other
again
soroe-
ci
here.
of
When
and
us,
and
now
fall
we
in
are
of
never
then
with
some
him;
50
EXERCISES.
"ometimet
in
fountain;sometimes
the
at
the
Thou
wood.
1
whenever
below
here
sleep
wilt
thou
I
likest.
desiderare
cemaiD
starsene
1
by myself,
here
and
love
as
prompts
I
sometimes
me,
make
ifwiture
and
rhymes
here.
Come
embraced
herbs.
and
Mowers
the last time.
for
me
strangers latelyarrived
the
are
he
There
gather
I
sometimes
verses,
? Where
does
Where
live?
he
di
stare
casa?
Opposite.
LESSOIV
has
be
Surely
lost
(his senses).Bo
la
It is
that
true
ihy
XXX.
speak
you
is often
?
earnest
testa.
is
tutor
a
of great
man
hot
understanding,
^jo
he
in
senno,
obstinate,and
will
act
never
according
to
my
ad-
fare
If
vice.
(uke
you
f arete
sent
a
to
messenger
advice),
my
a
us
mio
will
you
be
He
happy.
senno,
immediately.
Since
Heaven
wishes
Giacche
that
I
should
tell you.
The
be
for
unhappy
elector
has
Do
ever.
signed the
quickly
sentence
just
I
what
now.
Go
lelettore
quick.
Let
us
make
baste
,
gentlemen,
it
late.
grows
Those
Jarsi
who
come
late shall
dine
in the
other
room.
stanza.
They
esteem
52
E^LERCISES.
i
i
painfal
life
1
la gravosa
liangs,
that if another
altenersi,
altri
does
help
not
it
me
,
aitare
z=z
1.
%
.
be)
(will soon
Jia
tosto
her
out,
at
the end
a
=r
could
tight.
Tell
him
widower
a
? Yes
And
friends
his
answered
nh
yes, I
of
give
reading
was
the
but) my
esteem?
else.
Nothing
Non
che
altro
it all
1=
4
else
(nothing
volere
I
=
12
Co
thou
.
uedouo?
3
wishest
I
Debho
,
zz
cry
Oogltt
yes.
stretta,
remain
not
corso.
suo
bo
She
its coiirse.
rwa
being
throat
of
Yes,
altro.
thee.
to
LESSON
XXXI.
the
The
near
bride. There
master.
several
were
aunt
at
was
warriors
the
by
the
side
pavilion.
padiglione.
I do
abandon
not
about
money
I
yon;
The
me.
always
am
dogs
Like
man.
poor
a
who
man
granfuria
con
is
who
(are afraid) of
him.
He
put
the
the
bed
on
no
"it
addosso
act
like
the
side
.
cradle
temono
of
have
dreaming. They
sogiuire
men
I
you.
furiously barking
out
came
uscirono
the
near
at
cuna
which
he
used
to
sleep.
I have
desired
the
pregare
widow
his
to
death.
excuse
He
me
arrived
battery opposite
butler
ia
the
to
I received
you.
before
camp
these
day-light.The
of
the
papers
French
Spaniards. Whjit
Spaguuolo.
before
built
I do
a
is
53
EXERCISES*
before
I
what
noifiingto
bit crime
dispaicheabefore
my
tbaii bo
I
jon.
confetsed
He
dinner.
"ball read
owe
ni
j,
dispaccio
about
bim.
The
whole
I
camp.
Jjlnr
soe
judge, i
the
departure.He
about
round
country
beforo
to
challenged
sfidare
partenza.
the
before
enemies
two
oMiged
always
Florence
them
see
is beautiful.
Fircjize
LESSON
We
about
them
from
received
hsve
XXXII.
thousand
ten
florins
Jiorino
gold. He
of
wrote
a
satire
against
Tbon
us.
art
strong
a
saldo
satira
I asked
againstmisfortunes.
shield
of
wbetlier what
him
had
scudo
been
said
againsthim
true.
was
Within
breast
my
soundi
risonare
a
that
voice
heart).So within
(breaks my
a
cloud
of
flowers
ttcoorare.
a
lady appeared
to
me
under
a
behind
We
The
who
me
shall remain
Russians
are
till on
talking of
was
this side of
on
the
I heard
some
ammanto,
=
woman
dress.
green
other
with
her
the river
till
us
side of the
nions.
compasun
Vistula.
set.
Aftfr
yittola.
(clapsof thunder),a
many
very
big and
tuoni,
gan
to
fall. He
ruled
thick
spesso
over
every
bail
be-
grae;nuolii
place except
sigftoreg'"giare
22
litis ciiy.
54
I
EXERCISES^
of you
beg
Do
not
set
to
"ceompanj
till
oat
me
tn
u
spring.He
the gate
m
corered
wai
of tbe town.
with
mad
di
head
to
(almott dead)
him
I foand
foot.
from
/ango
outside
the
wails-
semwivo
Out
assembly,cowardly people.Thou
of this
I
She
myself.
beside
am
of
out
was
beside
art
self.
thy-
(her wits). I
senno.
fell
with
in
him
I
as
walking along the
was
rifer.
This
ez-
inconirarsi:=^
ambassadors
will
ask
thingyon
cepted, every
speaking,I
were
bis
direct
opposite
was
the
towards
coarse
granted to
shall be
While
yon.
tbe
to
far
capital.Not
the
king.
He
from
(be
cammino
wood
you
from
that
will
see
The
river.
a
her
palm-tree when
wife
waiter's
fell
daughter
palrfia
not
you
stsy
an
hour
1
longer?
is not
yet
at
the
(of
middle
its
Look
at
tbe
sao,
Guardarezz
altro?
which
sentiment^.
XXXUI.
a
Why
senseless.
senza
LESSON
do
far
not
was
I
course).
back
came
ci'e/o.
almost
in the
middle
of the
day. He
met
half
us
a
the middle
days.
of
I shall
the
do
He
summer.
it for
two
will be
thousand
here
Venetian
P^eneziano
way.
In
mezzo,
within
a
sequins.
zecchino.
fev
He
55
EXfeacisEs.
sQeeM"led
hefood
expectation. Tbej
my
9*iu$cire
than
the
from
milei
taltre
Ai
town.
mia
do
I
aa
shall
be
not
able
According
wilhoot
Go
arma.
hia
terminate
to
no
on
pert
the
on
aquare
this
tell him
and
write
they
evening.
All
remigata
una
without
accounta
what
to
pull
to
fire
appeared
ia
=
againat the coffee-^jouae.
we
\ive"
He
am.
dolente
ua,
contento
rammaricarsi.
wretched
ao
pleased
am
There
complain.
not
sorte,
world
the
to
(I
me,
sono
lot,) and
my
over
for
miglio
delta
in
lontani
speranza.
two
with
farther
not
were
that he
The
ua.
will be
able
Christiana
sur-
conto
rendered,
condition
on
that
back
gave
reneiere
but
war,
(bat
to
all it
(Having
islands.
began
for you
ceasary
to
aaved
possessed before
to
board
on
gone
and
row;
de'remi
dare
be
the
potenza
a
up
la
snpra
went
gall(*y)
galera,
ft will
aw.iy.
in acqua,
go
the
,
Montati
they
ahoold
persone
power
=
two
livea
le
saline
They
their
be
ne-
via.
tree.
These
evils
will
fall
npoii
piombare
2
(As
us.
waa)
I
walla of the
the
on
caatle, I
armed
two
saw
Stwido
1
men
under
a
looking around
will
You
tree.
on
the
it under
find
graaa.
He
the
table.
hid
I
himself
was
in
a
natcondere
small
cottage between
the
moor
and
the
hill.
(To
Per
paludc
between
ourselves),he
fra di noi.
hates
you.
say
He
went
Passare
dirla
to
over
^
ic
in
Eng-
56
EXERCISES.
in
land,and
tbjself
Show
he
dress
poor
a
humane
to
bis
took
always loved
have
who
us
London.
towards
way
thee.
benigno
His
this
will be
companions
evening
Stay
Rome.
near
near
Roma.
have
nothing. I
fear
and
me,
little cottage
a
Exercises
General
the
near
sea.
the
on
PREPOSITIONS.
I
place (in which)
The
luogo
he
where
writing
was
the
was
near
by
him.
room
oue
used
I
dine.
to
down
sat
A
pei-son
Msidersi
that
stood
you
compared
asleep
at
on
side said
my
a
him?
to
to
I
"
saw
the
of
beautiful
most
a
kind
What
a
by
meadow
green
me-:
man
a
ire
shepherdess
fountain,and
of
two
her
dormire
1
1
companions
(were)
likewise
asleep (at her
dormire
on
me,
bed.
and
for
stood
Marseilles, an
a
quarter
ancient
of
and
feet).He
called
appie di lei.
hoflr
an
noble
most
the
at
town,
foot of
is,
as
the
you
Alarsiglia,
know,
upon
situated
by
poslo
sopra
the
faith, and
per
my
lawful
legtttimo
the sea-side
in Provence.
you
Prot^enza.
marina
(by the)
I promise
love
I
lo, or pel
sovereign,that within
hold
to
portare
a
you
,
as
to
come
few days I shall be with
*
57
nXEKClSE3.
The
yoa.
of
king
Jerusalem
in
with
company
,
Ermtnia,
d*
placed himaelf
00
high
a
obferre
to
tower
the
the
of
camp
mettere
All thii conotrj
Craaaderi.
Crooiato,
went
at
on
board
tu
per
-set
sun
that
mootrcb.
one
of
they
and
mooey
towards
Turn
She
these
said
atones.
sheep
wilhio
words
fostered, and
fed,
Being
iis.
nudrire,alletfare,
wild
lonely
and
with
cell, he
cellaf
lamented
within
mountain
day
and
had
loss
night the
grown
=:
walls of
the
on
up
crescere
of
the
a
poor
from
him
granted
his
conoedere
infancy. Among
infanzia,
=
S
things
varioas
"ither
a
1
of
a
family delightsin
dilettare
ohe
in his
estates
own
a
of nseful
great nnmber
of
which
his
children
in
ma
ornbra
d*
r=
trees^
to
(under
all*
summer-time
potere
themselves.
divert
\"
,
buotio
z=:
shade)
friend
only
solo
perdita
piangere
fortune
have
herself.
iolitario
Malt^atico
the
uia
lupo.
rapace
the
away
tra
wolves.
rapacioos
that
took
prectons
1 left
my
I left thee?
bafe
where
ahip, whence
mitero!
Oime
a
They
portare
fall
tronki
1
Alas
ander
paese
great many
a
is
All
spoke
well
of
but
him;
the
Sici-
traitullare
liao
others
amongst
praised bim
veiy
much.
The
Conte
lodare
(having got
montato
on
a
horseback),arrived
cat^allOf
Earl
after
the
third
day
nt
hit
58
EXERCISES.
friend's
(couolrjhouse).
t^illa.
order
that) the
acciocche
bebind
squat
GiuVacquatta
fiends
who
are
scoglio^
the other
on
of the
side
bridge
perceive
thee.
I surrendered
conditioir
(on
that
vedere
life should
be
ces
but
both
left
the
evening)
firing
fuoco
in
retired
enemy
order
good
,
ritirarsi
parte,
the
on
The
sides.
da ambo
sore
of the
dusk
In the
saved)*
AlVimbrunire
on
my
salua
la tfita,
ceased
(in
rock,
a
dim^olo
not
may
Sit
field of battle
eight thousand
wA
dead
men
tra
(If 1
wounded.
do
Se
ferito.
mistake,
not
I believe
that
Si
die
rivers and
la
the
r=
the
my
that
now
may
a
vere.
high
be) which
di che
is hidden
(blooming vailies)are
contrary
non
in
cry
gentle breezes.
a'soatfi
from
others.
=
attrui.
eelare
ualli
al
of
no
advantage
V"Uere(pd
fine
sereno
parola, or fauella,
,
and
ed
her
riconoscere
which
p.
to
disposition
sia
tempra
alas !
But
lasso!
I
me:
do
oo
sin.)
rainy weather,
alia
in
cold
pioggiafid a*gelati
1
I knew
uenti.
speech,
the natural
(subj.)
t^ita
fiorirdi
shores
piaggia
1
ed
il
and
nMuntains
(what
sapere
piangere
and
sal^^o
or
trutl")-
to
respect
XXXIV.
know
woods
life
mia
due
omai
self
of
with
m'inganno,
fie"n
LESSON
So
or
has
often
again by
al
her
^=.
comforted
racconsolatQ
face
vol
my
and
to
heart
Co
EXERCISES.
2
"dlj corumiued
1
grievoas fault;
a
You
ipdebted
are
to
nevertheless
the honours
for
me
dcH^ere
possess,
I
do
forgive
folio;
enorme
yon.
nevertheless
and
riches
nz
(to
dared
jou
make
attempts)
upon
insidiare
life. Do
then
for
yoa
what
me
I
mi
=
vriUiogfy for
do
my
To
you.
la
he
whom
AliUare
happy)
and
ihy mind,
Change
else hut,
nothing
answered
cc
with
come
I have
deserved
for
me,
(1
oonsiglio,
=
abandon
sentii
that
caUed)j
(was
stone
avesse
have
What
with
do
to
we
nome
asked
Calandrino
and
;
the
answered
since
name,
we
know
of it?)) Since
virtu
the
will have
yon
"=.
saw
kept
he
me
Since
you
wish
that I should
re
1
let itb^so.
Fron
z^
his
constantly
eyes
gli oeehi
tenere
me.
it so,
z=L
h^
moment
the
tape
2
property
:
"
del
a
'
non
"
huw
"c
ben
Buffalmacco
me.
"
felt
never
mat
didst
thou
since
it.
I
remain,
apes
addosso
sbail
=
ke^
yoa
(dat.)
Riches
company.
do
not
only palliate the
body^
but
also
those
of
the
And
soul.
having
=
PnnGlo, she bid him
towards
one
of his
stories.
turned
ritfolgere
(in a pleasant manner)
begin
piaeei*olmentec"e(sabj.)
dire
with
For
which
reason
Panfilo
began
novella.
thus.
All
your
words
dciio
are
of
difetto
coprire
the
imperfections
examined
and
weighed
pesare^
; tb^efore
6
EXERCISES*
I
desira
be
to
you
caotiout.
And
iboie
1
ihingf which
da
pregare
iheir defecta
show
not
ourselvei
guard
not
at first are
againstthem^
prender guardia
do
Why
you
wish
we
in
see
us?
lire
cao-
traitor.
a
Be
quiet. Nei-
tcdiare
threateningus
are
we
tradUore.
io
the fleets that
as
di
annojarefOV
ther
daogerouf, for
more
zitto.
by
sea,
the
nor
army
per
already violated
has
which
will makje
aoil,
our
territorio,
il col to al
hia
aov
have
I neither
Sir,
u
:
the
esteem
father
of
that
but
have
cranes
Ourrade^then
family
and
thigh
one
He
leg.
gamha"
they
1
How
cc
but
hate
the
one
turhato,
one
Ug?
No
had
aooner
he
cut
down
the
plant,
ahbutterc
than
an*
one
coacia
perplexed,aaid:
Currado^
friends.
nor
money
gru
thigh and
piegare
giogo.
sons.
swered
neither
I
yoke.
the
lo
yield
us
cauaeof
the death
of the
unfortunate
two
mitero
cettOf
lovers
waa
amantt
known.
apparwe.
XXXV.
LESSON
He
(waa
not
nonsi/eoe
hurt
at
alcun
all
by
male
hia
nella
fal1)#though
he
fell
eadula,
1
3
from
a
=
place
=
somewhat
high.
alto.
Though
he
was
hungry
he
G4
EXJBRaSEfi,
ward
if you
jou
give
(any ihing to)
me
drink.
I
do
not
da
I
whether
know
allowed
am
do
to
I do
it.
know
not
2
think
tlier yon
it
:=:
(dat.)/)arere
to
proper
yoa
how
know
sapere
:=:
secret
what
longer.
Pro-
altro.
hint, I
a
me
shall
go
via,
this
mix
shall
I
away.
=:
cenno
to
hour
an
1
give
fare
1
convenevole
1
vided
stay
whe-
medicine, provided
keep
can
you
comporre
will
yoa
Tell
see.
that
him^
whenever
he
(dat.)
likes
to
is
the coach
go oat"
ready"
If
I
wish,
you
leady
am
piacere
pronto
13
8
all
walk
to
Jare
a
pressed
the
piedi
me
stimotare
pat
end
an
to
to
do
it
yoa
obtain
kind
enoagh
volere,ov compiacersi
presence,
I
will
invite
I
all
to
=
your
:
favour
a
impetrare
are
=
spendere
presto di
for
gratia
honour
that
I escape,
I will
Ove
with
me
If it
should
give yon proofs of
hapawe-
attachment
my
attaccamento
ihe
sovereign.
After
traveller, who
the
viaggiatore,
sired
gate
your
di
nire
to
If
me.
=
onorare
friends.
am
fsing.)
e^li
pen
time
expenses:
my
(subj)=:
provided yoa
long
a
=
.
ready
for
have
ttrada.
to
che
You
w^ty.
him
to
was
they had
almost
given somelhing
choaked
moriredi
stay there the whole
with
sete,
night and
to
drink
thirst, they
to
de*
prethe
followingday.
"5
VaiCERCISES.
will
petiliuot
Theie
Tell them
arrived.
beheaded
was
Be
as
presented
I shall
soon
be
there
the
as
No
out
aet
had
she
said
1
I
as
of
words
Bell
was
campana
to
than
me,
leave
of
(inf.)
congedo
da
taking
He
can.
the
s
is
governor
I
body.
any
4
little
lighta
the
these
without
journey
my
as
Draw
soon
as
colpo
sooner
on
the
as
first sound
dceapitare
heard.
soon
as
Fare
and
nearer
until
stay here
^
I
have
pitiqua,
bridled
Leave
horse.
my
the
in
water
the
until
coffee-pot
eaJlfettiera
it
boils.
LESSON
That
XXXVI.
interestingyoung
who
man,
surprised us
by
his
interessante
knowledge,
fell
from
yesterday
his
and
horse
died
immc-
dottrina.
diately.Oh,
O
father!
poor
sad
I shall
thing I
longerpay
no
disgrazia1
attention
listen
to
to
me
what
write
you
Well
more?
any
or
,
(go your
fate
pity
not
Ha,
you.
shall
4
get
a
room
faro
ho; you have
have
rogue,
the
way)
own
I
;
will
not
I
shall
vostro;
caught
thee?
I
:=:
1
prepared
at
you
corre
3
alle itire
won
!
modo
a
hriccone,
compiangere
i
What
say.
for
thee
(in(.)=:
lotterytwelve
lotto
at
Newgate.
"
thousand
"Ho,
"
pounds !
I
66
KXfiRCISSS.
coDgralnlate
yon
I
and
that
noibing
tee
day
in wbich
Alas!
it.
on
but
he
before
misery
born!
was
lost all I
I have
Oh
me.
She
possesaeJ^
blessed
be
henedetto
":
pleased
ixas
sin^
to
compiacersi (pret.)
to
varions
OS
the
at
of
end
of
the company,
and
songs
"
them
of
eadi
:
fall of mirth,
!
The
"
themselves
tragedy distingnished
this
in
oat
formers
per-
the
last
diatinguere
tori
heard
and
act
times
various
at
the
voUa
:=
a/to,
!
Bravo
"
the
are
interpreterof
true
giudice,
!
laws
leggel
just
exclaimed
N
inicrpreie
in
king
the
out:
(inf.)
spetiaiore
jndge, you
Bravo,
n
crjing
spectators
,
n
I bravo
Braro
"
cried
hearing him
pronoimce
very
a
a
Cheer
sentence.
up,
friends.
dear
my
Do
let
not
us
lasciare
be
(beat down)
rz
firm,
by adversity. Courage^
along.
come
ahhattere
=:
let
companions,
enriches
Be
himself
attack
as
fraud
by
!
the enemy.
Woe
to
you
Woe
if
him
to
cIo
yon
not
wdo
oome!
colla
Woe
to
if I should
me
dare
to
ardire
how
your
unfortanate
is
father
I
ill.
,
Ah!
his orders
happy
!
do
assist
me
and
open
the
cere
that
enemy
door
for
=
"
as
sleepers,
you
dormiglione,
svegliarsi
qacr
Alai'
madamt
,
O
us.
Hush
infermo.
awake,
!
di
Oh
I
am
contradict
I have
I wish
him.
I could
(dat.)
conquered
this
cob-
w'/i-
cruel
wild
beast!
fiera !
67
EXERCISES.
'Well 1 aid
tell you
I not
would
ditagieeable
persons
nojoto
Alssl
the
sow
diMensions
in this
reduced!
jMe]^royself
I
what
yesterdaythat
To
! let
Oh
!
si
quiet
Be
iozzo
asleep.
are
,
do
not
cf^
be
quiet. Gently , sir,
,
ziitino,
stare
get angry,
not
andare
eollera.
in
LESSON
I
piece of
a
Quiet gentlemen, they
figliuolo^
do
Cnmily?
muoja.
child,
my
"
die.
me
beg
Mendicare
ridotiol
bread
tbit
la diicordia
mettere
to
before
day
XXXVII.
always thirstyafter (my meals). GiTe something \a
am
il pasto,
eat
those
to
who
hungry
are
thick
and
of
not
,
who
us
are
saSU'
If
tiated.
cold, put
are
you
tollo.
ashamed
let
to
far
olde
How
know
us
yoni
S
W
cloak.
He
be?
when
he
is
not
yon
il
old
Quanti
debolezza?
sapere
Are
failings? (How
your
he
may
on
twenty
years
is
he)!
anni
old.
ha?
He
was
potere
siity years
old
acknowledge
I
am
wrong,
died.
and
Tou
have
convinoed
shall tell my
=:(inf.)
you
are
right to
act
roe:
I
superiors ihat
superior e
1
differently.
would
not
neglect my
operare
dnty
:
he
is
angry
with
qM}
and
would
avenge
vendicare
himself
with-
69
out
SXKftCUKS.
rdocianee.
aay
I mutt
"erses:
apply
I tell
what
amiss
I
miself
:
you
in
not
am
to-day
somelhing else..
to
I do
hamonr
a
wish
not
hurt
to
make
to
Never
take
What
you.
is
nuoccre
the
with
matter
Why
you?
do yon
Has
sigh?
misfor-
any
sospirare?
befallen
tune
coder
a c
What
you?
is the matter
with
that
gentleman ?
e
a
What
is the matter
in
this house?
t
Every thing inspii'esbne
s^pirare
melancholy
and
It
mourning.
cold
was
yesterday
and
ii is
,
ttuolo,
We
to-day.
warm
shall go this
day
week
(Inio the countrr))
in
villeggialura
.
if it be
would
weather.
fine
be
better
to
neighbour
Your
put off
differire
weather
to-day.
How
out.
My
hands
are
is the
weather?
Non
=
cold, give
me
a
to
was
is
(There
pair
of
uscire.
He
since it
,
8
Che fa
going
it
me
cavalcata
13
is bad
and
come
till Saturdy
riding
our
told
si
no
pub
gloves.
guanto.
once
in
good circumstances,
great distress.
Take
an
is
and
from
example
at
present reduced
him,
ye
scialac-
^
thrifts. What
will become
speud-
of that
What
family?
will become
qnaiore.
of me?
And
having thanked
him
for
the
portmanteau
prettare
roe,
he
had
valigia
r;
lent
he
answered:
iiSIr, you
are
welcome
to
rlj
EXERCISES.
no
do
:
yoQ
sptse
knocked
I
wont.
your
stain.
the
npOD
came
one
no
and
come
,
times;
(him who)
Let
makes
who
He
ready.
get
likes
chi
zr
liox
three
or
butsare
pretzare
hat
two
to
volere
aitempts upon
a
preparar$L
lile should
irieud's
expelledfrom
he
the
(society of
eonsorzio
You
pretend
if
as
JDg layingsnares
wonld
yon
on
umano.
notwitfcsCaod-
are
third
is the
Thu
honour.
my
and
love me,
men).
time
eke
you
disappointed me.
owe
yon,
lf" etc.
wish
not
miss
to
on
guard
di
guardia
Stay
in
hen
I do
shall
but
surrender,
nol
arrendersi,
Strength hegins to
provisions. My
want
we
respect I
place,because
my
:=
IK
the
veee
We
lesson.
my
in
wanting
he
shoald
I
fail me,
vweri.
knd
that
me
warns
I
gettingold
am
as
life is
ourselyes;our
you
told
He
me.
quarrel. (Let
drunken
is
laid hold
of
and
stick,
a
I
Friends,
went
those
of
one
make
ns
slake.
at
end
an
Finiamola
He
aceorlo
stake.
is at
honour
your
and
let
Sapere
defend
liim
that
Know
yaloroso.
ns
prudent
iwfeechiare,
avvertire
1)1ave.
Be
who
cal/ed
and
for
seek
a
it),sir; I yield.
"^
,
began
strike
to
me
the
on
hattonCf
head.
I
do
right.
I
have
not
lay
the
blame
yet been
not
on
at
the
you,
do
nor
president'sto
I say
wish
he
him
is
a
presidente
happy
new
year.
I wish
G'snlleinen
.
,
y^u
a
good morning.
SXERCISEfl.
Let
wiih
and
go
UB
himself
trouble
Mr.
about
S.
Thif
life.
ooerry
He
thinlf
does
of
wine
not
(infj
pale
gets
fleet is within
1
livinga
nulla;
dare
enemy's
good jouroej.
a
thing; he only
any
di
eurare
7
it
as
old.
grows
The
nelpallido
gun-shot.
floiia
LESSON
The
I
trees
ingraftedeightdays
they depart?
o'clock must
directly. The
dinner
in
set
a
np
shop, and
or
let
for honours
cared
that
has stolen your
right. The
is
for
da
riches
But
was
manager
lay the
cloth
table. He
to
(hislivelihood).Yo
only
and
will force
I
think
Put
of
do
to
yon
loser last year.
a
have
vivere.
^
heart.
what
dine:
gels
nor
I shall
sit down
us
guadagnare
not
thriving.At
are
ago
five. Then
At
ready :
is
adetto,
has
XXXVIU.
her
what
things
my
impresario
He
in order.
wrote
it.
is
am
always been
fault
that man's
It is yonr
duty
starvingwith
to
do
and
man;
have
been
remedy
a
assist
me
very
I
was
very
nOone
thirsty,
sleepy nobody
"
offered
a
me
da
pity
compiangere
yoa
whom
me
gave
ueilher my
for it.
Gentlemen
,
for
sake.
charity's
carita
bedt
and
=:
=
drink; when
dormtre:
am
1
was
I
to
avere
sleepiness nor
,
sonno
to
swear
days without
two
per
When
he
what
would
great many
a
we
find
hunger ;
credible
a
firmlybelleyed^that
Through
water.
I
so
haj
my
thirst,
"2:ERCiSE"
y2
nor
hnof^^rmoved
my
of
Oul
coaiFislon?
to
yia
qua
J
varioaa
medico
"ciaguraio,
:=
di
fioally,after
pfaysicianibaye
The
wretches.
you
place,
ihi"
consuUations, discovered
Ihe
of
caose
illness, aoJ
his
said
consulto
,
has
thai
he
very
alien
live
Gaelfo
what
to
chiaro
him
the
,
apprendcre
As
ancestors.
the
that
dogs
have
etempio
the
lost
of his
deeds
from
hears
and
says
(Rtoaldo)Is
he
Ihat
sees
""
'-
illustrious
He
UTcr-complaint.
Ihe
of
trace
beast
wild
a
melancholy
back
come
^
and
mesto
after
panling
long
a
aileutiou
hail taken
me
light-house.O
the
near
langhed at
She
masler.
she
I do
manner
a
We
another.
my
brethren,
take
,
cast
that I perceived
anchor
our
examine
whether
afterwards
me
your
con-
as
an
honour,
action
an
at
innocent.
are
you
,
not
si^htoi
Jraielloy
tell
and
such
it in
for
lantema,
sciences
losl the
(inf.)
chiaechiera^ (p^"*)
aliendere
my
Per
I have
ihy prattling,
to
having
By
elc.
Jaticoao caccia.
anelante
paid
painful chase,
and
blush
I may
which
aito
afterwards.
He
his father, and
was
out
put
let that
of
enough
be
bastare
di'unk
too
for
much
,
in
your
for
lakes
He
countenance.
you.
I think
you
afler
have
(dat.)
=
conversation
you
nothing
do
di soverchiOi
9
but
digress (xom
the
matter.
Gi^e
me
a
glass of
iced
nevaia
1
water,
'j3
ESLERCISES.
I
aai
I
am
with
clioaked
almosl
that
aware
Ihirst.
wish
ynu
Do
sift
lo
thiak
yon
I
I wish
me.
foulUh?
am
tutor
your
ajo
accorgersi
here
was
enough
are
you
table.
remunerate
No
king
than
who
man
who
acquainted,
aod
boarders,
open
disgrazia
about
will
erery
little from
learn
very
body
knows.
with
S.
the
always praised
and
roe
Baron
that
Who
stood
whom
I
am
,
for
himself
them
teaches
an
in
I shall entreat
interest
to
keeps
and
ventre
things
godfatherto y.)u?
nobly
displeasure of
Tou
me.
conceals
pro-
you,
the
were
"
cut
t)ai"
a
1 incurred
che
all those
lives
"
bad
I
conduct,
my
He
us.
sooner
iubilo
art
tale.
rome
Tided
Tnoa
awe.
shall side with
We
such.
as
soldiers
hundred
Two
in
the inhabitants
keep
to
despised
and
tor,
iwiihia bounds.
keep you
to
Italian and
keeps
He
yon.
twelve
I have
French.
a
insegnare
great mind
to
dare
left
Having
zz:
you.
delle
"i#"#e(dat.)
Florence, they
did
ready
was
go away.
pariir$i
stop until
not
to
they
reached
di
useilo
This
England.
I
thrash
veal
stewed
Wines
smoky.
tastes
that
itufato di vitella
taste
sweet
do
not
agree
with
Let
me.
^s
eonjarti
At
what
game?
giuoco
We
?
shall
play a
fare
play at
chess?
Can
you
game.
partita.
play on
giocare
%
any
instrument
iiirumentof
f
I
play on
the flute.
ftauia.
Did
you
hear the drum
74
EXERUSES.
1
Wbeo
beat?
smiles
she
at
I
me,
("iAl*}
parere
torridere
Id
Iiappy.
of your
parU
some
I
fancy
of
sermon
quae
am
"/"(inf.)
=
to-day
haw
you
,
predica
loacbed
with
tbe
lo
ns
except the
me,
It is your
major.
coachman;
on,
shook
and
came
deal.
Jore,
arrive before
mast
we
hands
to
turn
maggiore.
tranne
Drive
all
Tbey
quick.
dare
or
the
le
otbeiv.
carte.
He
takes
month
thing
every
is full of
his house
and
trust
upon
of
pescivendolo, heecaro^
the
began
He
and
bear
to
gmdge
a
me
simil/atla,
=
from
sort).
(the same
of each
end
tbe
fishmoogers,botchers,
bakers,
fomaro^
others
at
,
day
wish
expressed yom*
yon
send
to
to
me
manifestare
France.
yoQ
I should
with
angry
like
us?
to
Be
hire
angry
house
a
with
near
VHtj
yours.
yourself. If
ue
cofiler
your
tcrig^o
be
full of
poondi.
I
I shall
money,
long
to
go
borrow
I
away.
from
long
you
thousand
two
tell him
to
this
foe*
andarsene,
I
nets.
that
acquaint yon
cenda,
Jare
sound
and
I have
justarrived
at
this island
sapere
If I
safe.
arrive
safely,and
get
by
guadagnoda
Padua.
goods,
my
It is
I shall send
to
you
the
=z
Univernty
of
XJniversita
merce,
their
not
great
a
ritrarre
profit
bnsi-
duty
to tell him
what
he has
to
do:
Padova.
it is
my
business
to
direct
dirigerc
him.
He
lives upon
hi* eiUte"
75
EXSKCISES.
1
awl
He
mine.
on
hac
of
need
no
of
I
nor
me
him.
(Most
,
La
gior
di
parte
wofild
tiTe
people)
those
of
from
hand
moalb.
to
I
mag-
wish
he
colore
arrive
and
make
not
ns
wait
long.
so
I
wish
could
I
y
tanto,
useful
be
think
that
to
friend
our
he
hates
wish
to
a
his
use
show
with
month
1
contrary,
If
favour.
your
to
I
us;
Take
the
that
mean
should
you
dire
umbrella,
think
I
it
looks
to
you.
omhrello,
if
it
had
jou,
not
credito
it
us.
in
interest
stare
as
do
the
on
you,
VoJer
slay
We
pleasure.
tell
iervini
well,
us
with
it
can
we
:
jon
ditposlo
yon
do
,
inclined
is
would
I
you
was
no
if
I
going
to
Do
rain.
if
it
it
be
convenient
,
opportunity
drink?
What
speaking
of
is
THE
that
to
END.
to
yoii,
What
her.
if
he
comes
is
that
here?
to